OptiX OSN 3500 V200R011 Product Description V1.0 (20100129)

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission
System
V200R011
Product Description

Issue 01
Date 2010-01-15

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

System
Product Description About This Document

Issue 01 (2010-01-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
iii

About This Document
Purpose
This document describes the OptiX OSN 3500 in the terms of network application, functions,
hardware and software structure, and features.
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX OSN 3500 V200R011

Intended Audience
The intended audiences of this document are:

Network Planning Engineer

Data Configuration Engineer

System Maintenance Engineer
Organization
This document is organized as follows.
Chapter Description
1 Introduction Describes the product orientation and product features of
the OptiX OSN 3500.
2 Software Architecture and
Hardware Structure
Describes the hardware architecture and software
architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500.
3 Functions and Features Describes the basic functions and features of the OptiX
OSN 3500 in packet mode and TDM mode.
About This Document
System
Product Description

iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Chapter Description
6 Products and Application
Scenarios
Describes hybrid networking applications of the OptiX
OSN 3500 and other equipment.
7 OAM Describes the common OAM schemes of the OptiX OSN
3500.
8 Security Management Describes the features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of
security management.
9 Technical Specifications Describes the dimensions, interface specifications,
transmission performance, environment requirements and
power specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500.
11 Energy Saving and
Sustainable Development
Descirbes energy conservation and emission reduction
regarding the OptiX OSN 3500.
12 Compliant Standards Descirbes the standards that the OptiX OSN 3500
complies with.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows.
Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk
which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not
avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and
performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
your time.

Provides additional information to emphasize or
supplement important points of the main text.

System

v

General Conventions
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For
example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Cour i er New Terminal display is in Courier New.

Command Conventions
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italic.
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are
optional.
{ x | y | ... } Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square
brackets and separated by vertical bars. One or none is
selected.
{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all
can be selected.

GUI Conventions
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in
boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For
example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operation
Format Description
Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
About This Document
System
Product Description

vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Format Description
Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means
the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys
should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operation
Action Description
Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.
Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without
moving the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a
certain position.

Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version
contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Issue 01 (2010-01-15) Based on Product Version V200R011
This document of the V200R011 version is of the first release. Compared with version
V100R009C03, this version has the following new or optimized contents:

The N1PXCSA, N1PEG8, N1PEX2, N2PEX1, N1PEFF8, N1EDQ41, N1CQ1,
N1MD75, N1MD12, N6GSCC, and N1PIUB boards are added.

The R1PEF4F and R1ML1 boards are added.

The document structure is re-organized.

The "Energy Conservation and Sustainable Development" chapter is added.
Updates in Issue 05 (2009-11-10) Based on Product Version V100R009C03
This document of the V100R009C03 version is of the fifth release. Compared with Issue 04,
this version has the following new or optimized contents:

In section "Packet Features", the description of the package LPT is added.

In section "Data Features", the supports of the strict and non-strict modes are added.

The description of the high precise time on the TDM mode are deleted.
System

vii

This document of the V100R009C03 version is of the fourth release. Compared with Issue 03,

In section "OAM Information Interworking", the note of the inband DCN technology is
added.

In section "Package Loading", the description of the package loading is optimized.

The GXCSA/EXCSA/UXCSA/UXCSB/SXCSA/SXCSB/IXCSA/IXCSB/XCE board is
deleted.

The description of extended subrack/main subrack are deleted.
This document of the V100R009C03 version is of the third release. Compared with Issue 02,

The section "Synchronization Technologies" and "High Precise Time and Clock" are
optimized.

The section "Synchronous Ethernet" is added.

In section "SDH Processing Boards", the interface type of N1SLT1 board is modified.

In "Packet Features", the static PW of the packet boards is modified.

In "Package Loading", the topic on software package loading is deleted.

The topic that the N1GSCC supports packet features is added.

In "Packet Features", the topic on the differences regarding the functions and features
supported by the equipment when different GSCCs (such as N1GSCC, N3GSCC, or
N4GSCC) are used is added.

In "Packet Features", the topic that the Tunnel label and the PW label must be different
from each other is added.
This document of the V100R009C03 version is of the first release. Compared with Issue 01,
this version has the following new or optimized content:

Several bugs are fixed.
This document of the V100R009C03 version is of the first release. Compared with the
V100R009, this version has the following new or optimized content:

The N1PSXCS, N1PEG16, N1PEX1, and N1PETF8 boards are added.

The 3.3 Packet Features topic is added.

The ASON features are deleted.

This document of the V100R009 version is of the second release. Compared with Issue 01,
About This Document
System
Product Description

viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

The N3SLT1, N3SLD41, and N3SLN boards are deleted.

The slots supported by the N1EMS2 (without an interface board) are changed.

This document of the V100R009 version is of the first release. Compared with the
V100R008, this version has the following new or optimized content:

The N1IFSD1, N1RPWR, N3SLT1, N3SLO1, N1SLO16, N3SLN, N3SLD41, N3SLQ41,
N1RPC01, N1RPC02, N5EFS0, N3EFS4, N3EGS2, N4EGS4, N2EGT2, N1EFS0A,
N1EMS2, N1EFF8A, N1ETF8A, N2EAS2, N1PIUA, N5GSCC, N2SXCSA and
N2SXCSB boards are added.

The following sections are added: 5.25 Microwave Technology and 3.1.3.2 IEEE 1588
V2 Time and Clock Synchronization.

The following sections are deleted: "DCN Features", "Clock" and "Basic Principle".

The mapping relation between boards and slots in 2.1 Hardware Architecture are
optimized.
This document of the V100R008 version is of the third release. Compared with issue 02, issue
03 has the following optimized content.

Optimize the figures.

This document of the V100R008 version is of the second release. Compared with issue 01,
issue 02 has the following revised or optimized content.

Chapter 7 OAM is optimized, and chapter 8 Security Management is added.
This document of the V100R008 version is of the first release. Compared with the V100R007,

The description is added for the N4GSCC, N1EAS2, N1SLQ16, N1SLQ4A, N1SLD4A,
N1SL4A, N1SLQ1A, N1SL1A, and N2BPA boards.

The following sections are added: 7.8.4 NSF Function, "Shared Mesh Restoration Trail"
and "Alarms of the Control Plane".

The description about DCC allocation modes is modified in Overview.

Perfect 12 Compliant Standards, describes the standards and protocols complied with by
the OSN equipment.
This document of the V100R007 version is of the third release. Compared with issue 02, issue
03 has the following revised or optimized content.

The N3EGS4 board is added.
System

ix

"ASON Clock Tracing" is added.

In ASON Features and 3.1.3.1 Traditional Clock Synchronization, the description of
ASON clock is added.

In 7.8.2 Package Loading, the description of proliferated loading is added.

This document of the V100R007 version is of the second release. Compared with issue 01,
issue 02 has the following revised or optimized content.

The access capacity in 3.2.2.3 Service Access Capacity is rectified.

Related information on the N1SL16A and N2SL16A is supplemented.

In 3.2.5.3 SNCP, the number SNCP protection pairs is increased.

In 9.1.3 Power Supply Parameters, the Max. power consumption and current are
rectified.

In 10 Quick Reference of Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board, the power and
weight is updated.

9.1.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility, "Environmental Specification" and Environmental
Conditions are revised.

The interface type, BNC is all changed to SMB.

The mapping relation between boards and slots is optimized in 2.1.3.2 Slot Allocation.
This document of the V100R007 version is of the first release. Compared with the V100R006,

Description of the N1SLD64, N1SLD16, N3SL16, N3SL16A, N2PQ3, N2PD3, N2PL3,
N2PL3A, TN11OBU1, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2 and TN11CMR4 is added.

Sections of the new features are added.
Section "Intelligent Optical Power Adjustment"
Section "External Clock Output Shutdown Function"
7.8.2 Package Loading
7.8.3 Hot Patch
Inter-Board Alarm Suppression
PRBS Function
7.8.1 Board Version Replacement
The updated contents are as follows.
Several bugs in this document of the previous version are fixed.
The updated contents are as follows.
Several bugs in this document of the previous version are fixed.
About This Document
System
Product Description

x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

This document of the V100R006 version is of the first release.
System
Product Description Contents

xi

Contents
About This Document................................................................................................................... iii
1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Positioning ....................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Features .........................................................................................................................................................1-3
1.2.1 Dual-Core Architecture, Multi-Service Transmission..........................................................................1-3
1.2.2 Support for 3G Mobile Bearer and IP RAN L3 Networking ...............................................................1-4
1.2.3 Built-In WDM/Radio, Flexible Networking ........................................................................................1-4
2 Software Architecture and Hardware Structure...................................................................2-1
2.1 Hardware Architecture ..................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 Cabinet .................................................................................................................................................2-3
2.1.3 Subrack ................................................................................................................................................2-4
2.1.3.1 Structure......................................................................................................................................2-5
2.1.3.2 Slot Allocation ............................................................................................................................2-6
2.1.4 Boards ..................................................................................................................................................2-8
2.1.4.1 Classification of the Boards........................................................................................................2-9
2.1.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards..............................................................................2-16
2.1.4.3 Packet Boards ...........................................................................................................................2-17
2.1.4.4 Dual-Mode Bridging Board......................................................................................................2-18
2.1.4.5 CES Boards...............................................................................................................................2-18
2.1.4.6 SDH Processing Boards............................................................................................................2-19
2.1.4.7 PDH Processing Boards............................................................................................................2-22
2.1.4.8 EoS Boards ...............................................................................................................................2-24
2.1.4.9 ATM Boards..............................................................................................................................2-29
2.1.4.10 RPR Boards ............................................................................................................................2-29
2.1.4.11 SAN Boards ............................................................................................................................2-30
2.1.4.12 WDM Boards..........................................................................................................................2-31
2.1.4.13 Microwave Boards..................................................................................................................2-31
Contents
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical
Transmission System
Product Description

xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

2.1.4.14 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards ..........................................................................................2-32
2.1.4.15 Other Boards...........................................................................................................................2-33
2.2 Software Architecture..................................................................................................................................2-33
2.2.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................2-34
2.2.2 Communication Protocols..................................................................................................................2-34
2.2.3 Board Software ..................................................................................................................................2-35
2.2.4 NE Software.......................................................................................................................................2-35
2.2.5 Network Management System...........................................................................................................2-36
3 Functions and Features .............................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Basic Functions on Packet Mode ..................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.1.1 Switching Capability ..................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.1.2 Slot Access Capacity On The Packet Mode................................................................................3-2
3.1.2 Services................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.1.2.1 Service Types..............................................................................................................................3-4
3.1.2.2 Service Interfaces........................................................................................................................3-4
3.1.2.3 Service Access Capacity.............................................................................................................3-5
3.1.3 Clock Synchronization.........................................................................................................................3-6
3.1.3.1 Traditional Clock Synchronization .............................................................................................3-6
3.1.3.2 IEEE 1588 V2 Time and Clock Synchronization .......................................................................3-6
3.1.3.3 Synchronous Ethernet .................................................................................................................3-7
3.1.4 Equipment Level Protection.................................................................................................................3-8
3.1.4.1 1+1 Protection of Packet Boards.................................................................................................3-9
3.1.4.2 MC-LAG Protection .................................................................................................................3-10
3.1.4.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units ....................................................... 3-11
3.1.4.4 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit............................................................................................3-12
3.1.4.5 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit ..........................................................................3-13
3.1.4.6 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply .................................................................3-13
3.1.4.7 Intelligent Fans .........................................................................................................................3-13
3.1.4.8 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions..........................................................3-13
3.1.5 Network Level Protection..................................................................................................................3-14
3.1.5.1 MPLS Tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 Protection ......................................................................................3-15
3.1.5.2 PW APS 1+1/1:1 Protection......................................................................................................3-18
3.1.5.3 DNI APS...................................................................................................................................3-20
3.1.5.4 Linear MSP of CES Boards ......................................................................................................3-22
System

xiii

3.1.5.5 LPT...........................................................................................................................................3-23
3.1.5.6 Ethernet Spanning Tree Protection ...........................................................................................3-26
3.2 Basic Functions on TDM Mode ..................................................................................................................3-27
3.2.1 Capacity .............................................................................................................................................3-28
3.2.1.1 TDM Cross-Connect Capacity..................................................................................................3-28
3.2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity On The TDM Mode................................................................................3-29
3.2.2 Service ...............................................................................................................................................3-29
3.2.2.1 Service Types............................................................................................................................3-30
3.2.2.2 Service Interfaces......................................................................................................................3-31
3.2.2.3 Service Access Capacity...........................................................................................................3-32
3.2.3 Clock Synchronization.......................................................................................................................3-33
3.2.3.1 Traditional Clock Synchronization ...........................................................................................3-33
3.2.4 Equipment Level Protection...............................................................................................................3-34
3.2.4.1 TPS Protection..........................................................................................................................3-35
3.2.4.2 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards ..........................................................................................3-36
3.2.4.3 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards................................................................................................3-39
3.2.4.4 Protection for the Microwave Boards .......................................................................................3-40
3.2.4.5 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit .......................................................................3-41
3.2.4.6 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units .......................................................3-41
3.2.4.7 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit............................................................................................3-42
3.2.4.8 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit ..........................................................................3-43
3.2.4.9 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply .................................................................3-43
3.2.4.10 Intelligent Fans .......................................................................................................................3-43
3.2.4.11 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions ........................................................3-43
3.2.5 Network Level Protection..................................................................................................................3-44
3.2.5.1 Linear MSP...............................................................................................................................3-45
3.2.5.2 MSP Ring..................................................................................................................................3-45
3.2.5.3 SNCP........................................................................................................................................3-47
3.2.5.4 DNI ...........................................................................................................................................3-50
3.2.5.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection........................................................................................3-51
3.2.5.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP.........................................................................................................3-52
3.2.5.7 RPR Protection .........................................................................................................................3-53
3.2.5.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection ...................................................................................................3-55
3.3 Packet Features............................................................................................................................................3-56
Contents
Transmission System
Product Description

xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

3.3.1 MPLS Overview................................................................................................................................3-56
3.3.1.1 Background...............................................................................................................................3-57
3.3.1.2 Basic MPLS Concepts ..............................................................................................................3-57
3.3.1.3 System Structure.......................................................................................................................3-58
3.3.1.4 MPLS Capability of the Equipment..........................................................................................3-58
3.3.2 Service Description............................................................................................................................3-59
3.3.2.1 Service Models .........................................................................................................................3-60
3.3.2.2 Ethernet Services ......................................................................................................................3-64
3.3.2.3 CES Services ............................................................................................................................3-67
3.3.2.4 L3VPN Services .......................................................................................................................3-69
3.3.3 Introduction to Features .....................................................................................................................3-69
3.3.3.1 PWE3........................................................................................................................................3-71
3.3.3.2 MS PW.....................................................................................................................................3-72
3.3.3.3 VRRP........................................................................................................................................3-72
3.3.3.4 BFD ..........................................................................................................................................3-73
3.3.3.5 DHCP Relay .............................................................................................................................3-74
3.3.3.6 VLAN Sub-Interface.................................................................................................................3-74
3.3.3.7 L3VPN......................................................................................................................................3-75
3.3.3.8 MPLS OAM.............................................................................................................................3-76
3.3.3.9 HQoS........................................................................................................................................3-76
3.3.4 Protection...........................................................................................................................................3-76
3.3.5 Board Functions.................................................................................................................................3-77
3.3.5.1 Ethernet Processing Boards ......................................................................................................3-78
3.3.5.2 Dual-Mode Bridging Boards ....................................................................................................3-89
3.3.5.3 CES Service Processing Boards................................................................................................3-91
4 MSTP Data Features ..................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Ethernet Features...........................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 Functions of Transparent Transmission Boards ...................................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Functions of Switching Boards ............................................................................................................4-8
4.1.3 Application.........................................................................................................................................4-34
4.1.4 Protection...........................................................................................................................................4-38
4.2 RPR Features...............................................................................................................................................4-39
4.2.1 Functions............................................................................................................................................4-40
4.2.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................4-44
4.2.3 Protection...........................................................................................................................................4-46
4.3 ATM Features..............................................................................................................................................4-47
System

xv

4.3.1 Functions............................................................................................................................................4-47
4.3.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................4-49
4.3.3 Protection...........................................................................................................................................4-53
4.4 DDN Features..............................................................................................................................................4-53
4.4.1 Functions............................................................................................................................................4-53
4.4.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................4-54
4.4.3 Protection...........................................................................................................................................4-55
4.5 SAN Features ..............................................................................................................................................4-55
5 ASON Features ...........................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies ........................................................................................................5-3
5.1.1 Auto-Discovery of ASON NEs ............................................................................................................5-3
5.1.2 Auto-Discovery of Control Links.........................................................................................................5-4
5.1.3 Auto-Discovery of TE Links................................................................................................................5-5
5.2 End-to-End Service Configuration................................................................................................................5-6
5.3 Routing Computation Policies.......................................................................................................................5-7
5.4 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration ..............................................................................................5-7
5.5 ASON Clock Tracing ....................................................................................................................................5-8
5.6 SLA............................................................................................................................................................. 5-11
5.7 Diamond Services .......................................................................................................................................5-14
5.8 Gold Services ..............................................................................................................................................5-18
5.9 Silver Services.............................................................................................................................................5-20
5.10 Copper Services ........................................................................................................................................5-22
5.11 Iron Services..............................................................................................................................................5-22
5.12 Tunnels ......................................................................................................................................................5-23
5.13 OVPN........................................................................................................................................................5-25
5.14 UNI Services .............................................................................................................................................5-28
5.15 Service Association ...................................................................................................................................5-30
5.16 Service Optimization.................................................................................................................................5-31
5.17 Service Migration......................................................................................................................................5-32
5.18 Reverting Services to Original Routes ......................................................................................................5-32
5.19 Preset Restoring Trail ................................................................................................................................5-33
5.20 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail ..................................................................................................................5-33
5.21 Shared Risk Link Group............................................................................................................................5-34
5.22 Amalgamation of ASON and LCAS .........................................................................................................5-34
5.23 Merging an ASON Network with a Traditional SDH Network.................................................................5-36
5.24 Built-in WDM Technology........................................................................................................................5-42
5.25 Microwave Technology.............................................................................................................................5-43
6 Products and Application Scenarios ......................................................................................6-1
6.1 Networking Topologies .................................................................................................................................6-1
6.2 Typical Networking of the Pure packet mode ...............................................................................................6-2
6.3 Typical Dual-Mode Networking....................................................................................................................6-3
Contents
Transmission System
Product Description

xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

6.4 Hybrid Networking with Other Huawei Equipment......................................................................................6-5
6.4.1 Hybrid Networking with the PTN Equipment .....................................................................................6-5
6.4.2 Hybrid Networking with the RTN Equipment .....................................................................................6-6
7 OAM.............................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces .......................................................................................................7-2
7.2 DCN Management Scheme...........................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.1 Outband DCN......................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.2 Inband DCN.........................................................................................................................................7-4
7.3 Network Management ...................................................................................................................................7-5
7.4 Operation and Maintenance ..........................................................................................................................7-5
7.5 Alarm and Performance Management ...........................................................................................................7-5
7.6 ALS Function And Optical Power Management ...........................................................................................7-6
7.7 Fault Locating and Equipment Maintenance.................................................................................................7-6
7.8 Board Replacement and Equipment Upgrade ...............................................................................................7-7
7.8.1 Board Version Replacement .................................................................................................................7-8
7.8.2 Package Loading..................................................................................................................................7-8
7.8.3 Hot Patch..............................................................................................................................................7-9
7.8.4 NSF Function.....................................................................................................................................7-10
7.8.5 Smooth Upgrade ................................................................................................................................7-10
8 Security Management................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 Authentication Management .........................................................................................................................8-1
8.2 Authorization Management ...........................................................................................................................8-2
8.3 Network Security Management.....................................................................................................................8-2
8.4 System Security Management .......................................................................................................................8-3
8.5 Log Management ..........................................................................................................................................8-3
8.5.1 NE Security Log Management.............................................................................................................8-3
8.5.2 Syslog Management.............................................................................................................................8-4
9 Technical Specifications ...........................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment.......................................................................................................9-2
9.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet ...............................................................................................................9-2
9.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack...............................................................................................................9-3
9.1.3 Power Supply Parameters ....................................................................................................................9-5
9.1.4 Laser Safety Class................................................................................................................................9-5
9.1.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................................................................................................9-6
9.1.6 Environmental Specification................................................................................................................9-7
9.2 Performance Specifications of Packet Switching..........................................................................................9-8
9.2.1 Packet System Performance.................................................................................................................9-8
9.2.2 Protection Performance of Packet Switching.......................................................................................9-9
9.2.3 IEEE 1588 V2 Synchronization Performance....................................................................................9-15
9.3 TDM Performance Specification.................................................................................................................9-15
9.3.1 Timing and Synchronization Performance.........................................................................................9-15
System

xvii

9.3.2 Transmission Performance.................................................................................................................9-16
9.3.3 Protection Performance......................................................................................................................9-16
9.3.4 Timeslot Numbering ..........................................................................................................................9-20
9.4 Microwave RF Performance .......................................................................................................................9-20
9.4.1 Radio Work Modes ............................................................................................................................9-21
9.4.2 IF Performance...................................................................................................................................9-22
9.4.3 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem..................................................................9-22
9.4.4 Equipment Reliability ........................................................................................................................9-22
9.4.5 SP ODU .............................................................................................................................................9-23
9.4.6 HP ODU.............................................................................................................................................9-30
9.5 Parameters Specified for the Optical Interfaces ..........................................................................................9-38
9.5.1 STM-1 Optical Interfaces...................................................................................................................9-39
9.5.2 STM-4 Optical Interfaces...................................................................................................................9-40
9.5.3 STM-16 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................9-41
9.5.4 STM-64 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................9-43
9.5.5 Ethernet Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................9-44
9.5.6 Tunable-Wavelength Optical Interfaces .............................................................................................9-45
9.5.7 ATM Optical Interfaces......................................................................................................................9-46
9.5.8 Colored Optical Interfaces .................................................................................................................9-47
9.5.9 Wavelength Allocation.......................................................................................................................9-48
9.6 Parameters Specified for the Electrical Interfaces.......................................................................................9-49
9.6.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces...................................................................................................................9-49
9.6.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces..................................................................................................................9-50
9.6.3 Ethernet Electrical Interfaces .............................................................................................................9-51
9.7 Parameters Specified for the Auxiliary Interfaces.......................................................................................9-51
9.7.1 Clock Interface Specifications ...........................................................................................................9-51
9.7.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications.......................................................................................................9-52
9.7.3 RS-232 Interface Specifications.........................................................................................................9-52
9.7.4 RS-422 Interface Specifications.........................................................................................................9-52
9.7.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications..........................................................................................9-53
10 Quick Reference of Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board.........................10-1
11 Energy Saving and Sustainable Development.................................................................11-1
11.1 Energy Saving and Emission Reduction.................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Sustainable Development .......................................................................................................................... 11-2
12 Compliant Standards.............................................................................................................12-1
12.1 ITU-T Recommendations..........................................................................................................................12-2
12.2 IEEE Standards .........................................................................................................................................12-4
12.3 IETF Standards..........................................................................................................................................12-5
12.4 ANSI Standards.........................................................................................................................................12-5
12.5 Environment Related Standards ................................................................................................................12-6
12.6 EMC Standards .........................................................................................................................................12-6
Contents
Transmission System
Product Description

xviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

12.7 Safety Compliance Standards....................................................................................................................12-7
12.8 Protection Standards..................................................................................................................................12-8
12.9 ASON Standards .......................................................................................................................................12-8
12.10 Microwave Standards..............................................................................................................................12-9
12.11 Packet Standards.................................................................................................................................... 12-11
12.12 Glossary ................................................................................................................................................12-12
12.13 Acronyms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................................12-37

System
Product Description Figures

xix

Figures
Figure 1-1 exterior of the OptiX OSN 3500.......................................................................................................1-2
Figure 2-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment ...................................................................................2-2
Figure 2-2 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500....................................................................................2-3
Figure 2-3 Exterior of an ETSI cabinet ..............................................................................................................2-4
Figure 2-4 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack .......................................................................................2-5
Figure 2-5 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.....................................................................................2-6
Figure 2-6 Dual-slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack ............................................................................2-7
Figure 2-7 Software architecture with the ASON feature.................................................................................2-34
Figure 3-1 Slot access capacity when the N1PSXCS board is used...................................................................3-3
Figure 3-2 Slot access capacity when the N2PSXCSA board is used (single slots) ...........................................3-3
Figure 3-3 Slot access capacity when the N2PSXCSA board is used (double slots)..........................................3-4
Figure 3-4 Networking diagram of RNC dual-homing adopting the MC-LAG technology ............................3-10
Figure 3-5 MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection...........................................................................................................3-16
Figure 3-6 MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection............................................................................................................3-16
Figure 3-7 Typical networking of PW APS 1+1 protection..............................................................................3-19
Figure 3-8 Typical networking of PW APS 1:1 protection...............................................................................3-19
Figure 3-9 Networking diagram of DNI APS in packet mode .........................................................................3-21
Figure 3-10 Typical networking of dual-mode DNI APS working with other APS schemes ...........................3-22
Figure 3-11 Point-to-point LPT........................................................................................................................3-24
Figure 3-12 Point-to-multipoint LPT ...............................................................................................................3-25
Figure 3-13 Switching network with multiple VLANs ....................................................................................3-26
Figure 3-14 Network topology after the MSTP starts running.........................................................................3-27
Figure 3-15 Access capacity of each slot when the N1PSXCS board is used ..................................................3-29
Figure 3-16 Access capacity of slots when the N2PSXCSA is used ................................................................3-29
Figure 3-17 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail ......................3-47
Figure 3-18 Principle of multipath protection ..................................................................................................3-48
Figures
Transmission System
Product Description

xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 3-19 SNCMP networking......................................................................................................................3-49
Figure 3-20 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure ..............................................................3-49
Figure 3-21 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure ................................................................3-50
Figure 3-22 DNI protection of two SNCP rings ...............................................................................................3-51
Figure 3-23 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection ..............................................................................................3-52
Figure 3-24 Optical-path-shared MSP..............................................................................................................3-52
Figure 3-25 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines .....................................................................3-53
Figure 3-26 One line shared by two lines at the same rate...............................................................................3-53
Figure 3-27 Example of bidirectional RPR......................................................................................................3-54
Figure 3-28 RPR wrapping protection..............................................................................................................3-54
Figure 3-29 RPR steering protection................................................................................................................3-55
Figure 3-30 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection .......................................................................................................3-55
Figure 3-31 Label encapsulation structure .......................................................................................................3-57
Figure 3-32 Encapsulation location of labels in Ethernet frames .....................................................................3-58
Figure 3-33 PWE3 networking diagram...........................................................................................................3-60
Figure 3-34 MPLS-based PWE3 model ...........................................................................................................3-61
Figure 3-35 MPLS model.................................................................................................................................3-62
Figure 3-36 Service model of the OptiX OSN equipment................................................................................3-64
Figure 3-37 E-Line service...............................................................................................................................3-65
Figure 3-38 E-LAN service..............................................................................................................................3-66
Figure 3-39 E-Aggr service..............................................................................................................................3-67
Figure 3-40 Networking diagram of the CES...................................................................................................3-68
Figure 3-41 Networking diagram of an intranet VPN......................................................................................3-69
Figure 3-42 Networking diagram of single-hop PWE3....................................................................................3-71
Figure 3-43 Networking diagram of multi-hop PWE3.....................................................................................3-72
Figure 3-44 MS PW networking diagram........................................................................................................3-72
Figure 3-45 Networking diagram of RNC dual-homing adopting the VRRP technology................................3-73
Figure 3-46 Networking diagram of BFD (with the VRRP technology adopted) ............................................3-74
Figure 3-47 Networking diagram of DHCP relay ............................................................................................3-74
Figure 3-48 VLAN sub-interface networking diagram....................................................................................3-75
Figure 3-49 Networking diagram of L3VPN....................................................................................................3-75
Figure 4-1 EPL service based on port...............................................................................................................4-35
Figure 4-2 Port-shared EVPL services .............................................................................................................4-35
System
Product Description Figures

xxi

Figure 4-3 EVPL service based on VLAN ID..................................................................................................4-36
Figure 4-4 EVPL service based on MPLS........................................................................................................4-36
Figure 4-5 EVPL service based on QinQ.........................................................................................................4-36
Figure 4-6 EPLAN service...............................................................................................................................4-37
Figure 4-7 EVPLAN service ............................................................................................................................4-38
Figure 4-8 RPR ring .........................................................................................................................................4-40
Figure 4-9 Spatial reuse....................................................................................................................................4-43
Figure 4-10 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1.......................................................................................4-44
Figure 4-11 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different .......................................................................4-44
Figure 4-12 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping ......................................................................4-45
Figure 4-13 EVPL service convergence ...........................................................................................................4-45
Figure 4-14 RPR EVPLAN service..................................................................................................................4-46
Figure 4-15 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services.......................................................................4-51
Figure 4-16 VP-Ring/VC-Ring ........................................................................................................................4-52
Figure 4-17 IMA service networking ...............................................................................................................4-52
Figure 4-18 DDN networking and application.................................................................................................4-55
Figure 5-1 Auto-discovery of control links ........................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-2 Management of control topology......................................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-3 TE link auto-discovery......................................................................................................................5-6
Figure 5-4 End-to-end service configuration......................................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-5 Trail restoration.................................................................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-6 ASON clock subnet.........................................................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-7 Diamond Services...........................................................................................................................5-14
Figure 5-8 Gold services ..................................................................................................................................5-18
Figure 5-9 A silver service................................................................................................................................5-20
Figure 5-10 Tunnel ...........................................................................................................................................5-24
Figure 5-11 Lower cross-connection................................................................................................................5-24
Figure 5-12 Networking diagram of an OVPN................................................................................................5-26
Figure 5-13 Partitioning the TE link resources.................................................................................................5-27
Figure 5-14 Ethernet UNI services...................................................................................................................5-29
Figure 5-15 SDH UNI services ........................................................................................................................5-30
Figure 5-16 Service association........................................................................................................................5-31
Figure 5-17 Shared mesh restoration trail ........................................................................................................5-33
Figures
Transmission System
Product Description

xxii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 5-18 LCAS (different path)...................................................................................................................5-35
Figure 5-19 LCAS (same path) ........................................................................................................................5-35
Figure 5-20 A traditional SDH network connected to an ASON network in 1+1 or 1:1 MSP mode................5-36
Figure 5-21 A traditional SDH network connected to an ASON network in SNCP mode ...............................5-37
Figure 5-22 VC-4 services between SDH NEs that cross the ASON network.................................................5-37
Figure 5-23 VC-12 services between SDH NEs that cross the ASON network ...............................................5-38
Figure 5-24 1+1 VC-4 services between SDH NEs that cross the ASON network..........................................5-38
Figure 5-25 1+1 VC-12 services between SDH NEs that cross the ASON network........................................5-39
Figure 5-26 VC-4 services between ASON NEs and SDH NEs ......................................................................5-40
Figure 5-27 VC-12 services between ASON NEs and SDH NEs.....................................................................5-40
Figure 5-28 1+1 VC-4 services between ASON NEs and SDH NEs ...............................................................5-41
Figure 5-29 1+1 VC-12 services between ASON NEs and SDH NEs .............................................................5-42
Figure 5-30 Processing flow of the service signals ..........................................................................................5-43
Figure 6-1 Typical networking diagram of the packet mode..............................................................................6-2
Figure 6-2 The access layer overlaid with the GE ring and the convergence/core layer overlaid with the 10GE
ring ......................................................................................................................................................................6-3
Figure 6-3 Using the EoS service dividing board to overlay the convergence/core layer with the 10GE ring...6-4
Figure 6-4 Hybrid networking with Huawei MSTP and PTN equipment ..........................................................6-5
Figure 6-5 Hybrid networking with Huawei MSTP and RTN equipment ..........................................................6-6
Figure 8-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting.........................................................................8-4

System
Product Description Tables

xxiii

Tables
Table 2-1 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards ............2-8
Table 2-2 Paired slots .........................................................................................................................................2-8
Table 2-3 SDH boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports ..............................................................................2-10
Table 2-4 PDH boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports .............................................................................. 2-11
Table 2-5 Packet boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports............................................................................ 2-11
Table 2-6 Dual-mode bridging boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500......................................................2-12
Table 2-7 CES boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500...............................................................................2-12
Table 2-8 Data boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports...............................................................................2-12
Table 2-9 Interface boards and switching and bridging boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports ................2-13
Table 2-10 Cross-connect boards and system control boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports ...................2-14
Table 2-11 Auxiliary boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports......................................................................2-14
Table 2-12 WDM boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports ..........................................................................2-15
Table 2-13 Microwave boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports ..................................................................2-15
Table 2-14 Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports
...........................................................................................................................................................................2-16
Table 2-15 Power boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports ..........................................................................2-16
Table 2-16 Cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 ..............2-16
Table 2-17 Valid slots and interfaces of the packet boards ...............................................................................2-17
Table 2-18 Valid slots and interfaces of the dual-mode bridging boards ..........................................................2-18
Table 2-19 Valid slots and interfaces of the CES boards ..................................................................................2-19
Table 2-20 SDH processing boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500..................2-19
Table 2-21 PDH processing boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 3500............................................2-23
Table 2-22 PDH interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 3500...............................................2-24
Table 2-23 Valid slots and interfaces of the EoS boards...................................................................................2-24
Table 2-24 Valid slots and interfaces of the mapping interface boards of the EoS boards ...............................2-28
Table 2-25 Valid slots and interfaces of the ATM boards .................................................................................2-29
Table 2-26 Valid slots and interfaces of the RPR boards ..................................................................................2-29
Tables
Transmission System
Product Description

xxiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 2-27 Mapping interface boards of the RPR boards and their valid slots.................................................2-30
Table 2-28 Valid slots and interfaces of the SAN boards..................................................................................2-30
Table 2-29 WDM boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500..................................2-31
Table 2-30 Microwave boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500..........................2-32
Table 2-31 Optical booster amplifier boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500....2-32
Table 2-32 Mapping relation between the valid slots and connectors of the power boards and auxiliary boards
supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 ...................................................................................................................2-33
Table 3-1 Switching capability of the OptiX OSN 3500 ....................................................................................3-2
Table 3-2 Ethernet service interfaces on the OptiX OSN 3500 ..........................................................................3-5
Table 3-3 CES service interfaces on the OptiX OSN 3500 ................................................................................3-5
Table 3-4 Service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 (in packet mode)....................................................3-5
Table 3-5 Equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500..........................................3-8
Table 3-6 Parameters for 1+1 LAG protection of Ethernet boards (in packet mode) .........................................3-9
Table 3-7 Parameters of RNC dual-homing adopting the MC-LAG technology.............................................. 3-11
Table 3-8 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units ...................................................3-12
Table 3-9 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit .....................................................................................3-12
Table 3-10 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500..........................................3-14
Table 3-11 MPLS 1+1 and 1:1 protection parameters ......................................................................................3-17
Table 3-12 Parameters of PW APS...................................................................................................................3-20
Table 3-13 Parameters of DNI APS in packet mode.........................................................................................3-21
Table 3-14 Parameters of dual-mode DNI APS working with other APS schemes ..........................................3-22
Table 3-15 Parameters of linear MSP supported by CES boards......................................................................3-23
Table 3-16 Parameters of point-to-point LPT...................................................................................................3-24
Table 3-17 Parameters of point-to-multipoint LPT...........................................................................................3-25
Table 3-18 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500............................................................................3-28
Table 3-19 Service type supported by the OptiX OSN 3500............................................................................3-30
Table 3-20 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.....................................................................................3-31
Table 3-21 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 on the TDM mode.............................3-32
Table 3-22 Equipment level protection.............................................................................................................3-34
Table 3-23 TPS protection schemes and supported boards...............................................................................3-35
Table 3-24 TPS protection parameters..............................................................................................................3-36
Table 3-25 1+1 protection parameters of Ethernet boards................................................................................3-37
Table 3-26 Parameters for 1+1 LAG and DLAG protection of Ethernet boards (on the TDM mode) .............3-38
Table 3-27 Parameters for 1+1 LAG protection of Ethernet boards (on the packet mode) ..............................3-39
System

xxv

Table 3-28 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards .....................................................................................3-39
Table 3-29 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection for the microwave boards..................................................................3-40
Table 3-30 N+1 protection for the microwave boards ......................................................................................3-41
Table 3-31 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX.........................................................................3-41
Table 3-32 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units .................................................3-42
Table 3-33 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit ...................................................................................3-42
Table 3-34 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500..........................................3-44
Table 3-35 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500............................................3-45
Table 3-36 MPLS features supported by the OptiX OSN 3500........................................................................3-59
Table 3-37 MPLS performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500...........................................................3-59
Table 3-38 Parameters of RNC dual-homing adopting the VRRP technology.................................................3-73
Table 3-39 Functions and features of the PEX2 ...............................................................................................3-78
Table 3-40 Functions and features of the PEG8 ...............................................................................................3-81
Table 3-41 Functions and features of the PEG16 .............................................................................................3-84
Table 3-42 Functions and features of the PETF8..............................................................................................3-87
Table 3-43 Functions and features of the PEFF8..............................................................................................3-88
Table 3-44 Functions and features of the EDQ41.............................................................................................3-90
Table 3-45 Functions and features of the CQ1 .................................................................................................3-91
Table 3-46 Functions and features of the MD12 ..............................................................................................3-92
Table 3-47 Functions and features of the MD75 ..............................................................................................3-93
Table 4-1 Functions and features of the EFT8....................................................................................................4-2
Table 4-2 Functions and features of the EFT8A.................................................................................................4-4
Table 4-3 Functions and features of the EGT2 ...................................................................................................4-6
Table 4-4 Functions and features of the EFS0....................................................................................................4-8
Table 4-5 Functions and features of the EFS0A...............................................................................................4-12
Table 4-6 Functions and features of the EFS4..................................................................................................4-14
Table 4-7 Functions and features of the EGS2 .................................................................................................4-17
Table 4-8 Functions and features of the EMS2.................................................................................................4-20
Table 4-9 Functions and features of the EMS4.................................................................................................4-23
Table 4-10 Functions and features of the EGS4 ...............................................................................................4-27
Table 4-11 Functions and features of the EGS4A.............................................................................................4-30
Table 4-12 Functions and features of the EAS2 board .....................................................................................4-32
Table 4-13 Function list of RPR boards............................................................................................................4-41
Tables
Transmission System
Product Description

xxvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 4-14 RPR service class ...........................................................................................................................4-42
Table 4-15 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1.......................................................................................................4-48
Table 4-16 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1..........................................................................................................4-48
Table 4-17 ATM service types and traffic types ...............................................................................................4-50
Table 4-18 Functions and features of DDN......................................................................................................4-54
Table 5-1 Service level .....................................................................................................................................5-12
Table 5-2 TE links used by ASON services......................................................................................................5-13
Table 5-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services...........................................................................5-15
Table 5-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service ..............................................................................5-16
Table 5-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service.......................................................................5-17
Table 5-6 Attributes of gold services ................................................................................................................5-18
Table 5-7 Attributes of silver services ..............................................................................................................5-21
Table 5-8 Attributes of copper services ............................................................................................................5-22
Table 5-9 Attributes of iron services.................................................................................................................5-23
Table 5-10 Attributes of tunnels........................................................................................................................5-25
Table 5-11 Principle for an NM user to use resources ......................................................................................5-27
Table 5-12 OVPN service attributes .................................................................................................................5-28
Table 5-13 Attributes of service association.....................................................................................................5-31
Table 5-14 Microwave capacity of the equipment............................................................................................5-43
Table 7-1 Administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN 3500 .......................................7-2
Table 7-2 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 3500.................................................................................7-3
Table 7-3 Relationship Between the Software Package Loading and Different SCC Boards ............................7-9
Table 9-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet......................................................................................9-2
Table 9-2 Technical specifications of the PDU...................................................................................................9-3
Table 9-3 Dimensions and weight of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack ..................................................................9-4
Table 9-4 Maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.......................................................9-4
Table 9-5 Power supply parameters....................................................................................................................9-5
Table 9-6 Laser safety class................................................................................................................................9-6
Table 9-7 EMC test results .................................................................................................................................9-7
Table 9-8 Environment specifications for long-term operation ..........................................................................9-8
Table 9-9 System performance specifications ....................................................................................................9-8
Table 9-10 MPLS 1+1 and 1:1 protection parameters ......................................................................................9-10
Table 9-11 PW APS 1+1/1:1 protection parameters .........................................................................................9-12
System

xxvii

Table 9-12 Parameters for point-to-point LPT protection.................................................................................9-12
Table 9-13 Parameters for point-to-multipoint LPT protection ........................................................................9-13
Table 9-14 Parameters for 1+1 LAG protection of Ethernet boards (packet mode) .........................................9-14
Table 9-15 Parameters for RNC dual-homing by using the VRRP technology................................................9-14
Table 9-16 Timing and synchronization performance of the IEEE 1588 V2 high precision clock...................9-15
Table 9-17 Timing and synchronization performance of the synchronous Ethernet.........................................9-15
Table 9-18 Timing and synchronization performance ......................................................................................9-16
Table 9-19 Transmission performance..............................................................................................................9-16
Table 9-20 Linear MSP parameters ..................................................................................................................9-16
Table 9-21 MSP ring parameters ......................................................................................................................9-17
Table 9-22 SNCP parameters............................................................................................................................9-18
Table 9-23 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (scheme I).........................................................................................9-20
Table 9-24 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (scheme II) .......................................................................................9-20
Table 9-25 Radio work modes..........................................................................................................................9-21
Table 9-26 IF performance ...............................................................................................................................9-22
Table 9-27 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem................................................................9-22
Table 9-28 Link reliability per hop...................................................................................................................9-23
Table 9-29 Modulation Mode (SP ODU)..........................................................................................................9-23
Table 9-30 Frequency Band (SP ODU) ............................................................................................................9-23
Table 9-31 Transceiver Performance (SP ODU)...............................................................................................9-24
Table 9-32 IF Performance ...............................................................................................................................9-24
Table 9-33 Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption (SP ODU) ............................................................9-25
Table 9-34 Frequency information of the 7 GHz frequency band (SP ODU)...................................................9-25
Table 9-35 Frequency information of the 8 GHz frequency band (SP ODU)...................................................9-27
Table 9-36 Frequency information of the 11 GHz frequency band (SP ODU) .................................................9-27
Table 9-37 Frequency information of the 13 GHz frequency band (SP ODU).................................................9-28
Table 9-43 Modulation Mode (HP ODU) .........................................................................................................9-30
Table 9-44 Frequency band (HP ODU) ............................................................................................................9-31
Tables
Transmission System
Product Description

xxviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 9-45 Transceiver performance (HP ODU) ..............................................................................................9-31
Table 9-46 IF Performance ...............................................................................................................................9-32
Table 9-47 Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption (HP ODU) ...........................................................9-33
Table 9-48 Frequency information of the 7 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) ..................................................9-33
Table 9-49 Frequency information of the 8 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) ..................................................9-34
Table 9-50 Frequency information of the 11 GHz frequency band (HP ODU) ................................................9-35
Table 9-58 Parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500............................9-39
Table 9-59 Parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500............................9-40
Table 9-60 Parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500..........................9-41
Table 9-61 Parameters specified for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500...............9-42
Table 9-62 Parameters specified for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500...............9-43
Table 9-63 Parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500..........................9-44
Table 9-64 Parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500..........................9-45
Table 9-65 Parameters specified for the tunable-wavelength optical interface.................................................9-46
Table 9-66 Parameters specified for the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500...................9-46
Table 9-67 Parameters specified for the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500...................9-47
Table 9-68 Parameters specified for the STM-16 and STM-64 colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500
...........................................................................................................................................................................9-47
Table 9-69 Wavelength allocation information of the STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces.......................9-48
Table 9-70 Parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces...................................................................9-50
Table 9-71 Parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces..................................................................9-50
Table 9-72 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces............................................................................9-51
Table 9-73 Specifications of the clock interface...............................................................................................9-51
Table 9-74 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface..........................................................................................9-52
Table 9-75 Specifications of the RS-232 interface ...........................................................................................9-52
Table 9-76 Specifications of the RS-422 interface ...........................................................................................9-52
Table 9-77 Specifications of the orerwire phone interface ...............................................................................9-53
System

xxix

Table 10-1 Power consumption and weight of each board ...............................................................................10-1
Table 12-1 ITU-T recommendations ................................................................................................................12-2
Table 12-2 IEEE standards ...............................................................................................................................12-4
Table 12-3 IETF standards................................................................................................................................12-5
Table 12-4 ANSI related standards ...................................................................................................................12-6
Table 12-5 Environment related standards .......................................................................................................12-6
Table 12-6 EMC related standards....................................................................................................................12-7
Table 12-7 Safety compliance related standards...............................................................................................12-7
Table 12-8 Protection related standards............................................................................................................12-8
Table 12-9 ASON related standards..................................................................................................................12-9
Table 12-10 Microwave related standards ........................................................................................................12-9
Table 12-11 Packet related standards.............................................................................................................. 12-11

System
Product Description 1 Introduction

1-1

1 Introduction
About This Chapter
This topic describes the positioning and features of the OptiX OSN 3500.
1.1 Positioning
The OptiX OSN 3500 intelligent optical transmission system (hereinafter referred to as the
OptiX OSN 3500) developed by Huawei is the next-generation intelligent optical transmission
switching equipment.
1.2 Features
This topic describes the features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in the aspects of system architecture,
networking, and technologies.
1.1 Positioning
The OptiX OSN 3500 intelligent optical transmission system (hereinafter referred to as the
OptiX OSN 3500) developed by Huawei is the next-generation intelligent optical transmission
switching equipment.
The OptiX OSN 3500 is of a "dual core" architecture. That is, the OptiX OSN 3500 can be
used on the packet mode or on the TDM mode. When used with the other equipment of
Huawei, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports various networking applications, such as the pure
packet mode application, hybrid networking application (overlay networking of the packet
mode and TDM mode), and pure TDM mode application. By using a proper networking
solution, the data service and conventional SDH service can be processed in the optimal
manner.
The OptiX OSN 3500 transmits voice and data services on the same platform with high
efficiency. It integrates the following technologies:
On the packet mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following technologies:

MPLS

Ethernet

IP forwarding

CES
1 Introduction
System
Product Description

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

On the TDM mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following technologies:

Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)

Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)

Ethernet

Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)

Storage area network (SAN)

Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM)

Digital data network (DDN)

Microwave technology
Figure 1-1 shows the exterior of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Figure 1-1 exterior of the OptiX OSN 3500

The OptiX OSN 3500 is mainly used at the convergence layer and backbone layer of the
metropolitan area network (MAN). On the TDM mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 can be
networked with the other OptiX transmission equipment (the OptiX OSN 9500, OptiX OSN
7500, OptiX OSN 3500 II, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500 REG, OptiX OSN 1500,
OptiX 2500+
(Metro 3000)
, and OptiX 155/622H
(Metro 1000)
) to optimize the carrier's investment.
Meanwhile, with the packet switching technology, the OptiX OSN 3500 can constitute a
packet data transmission network with the other OptiX transmission equipment (OptiX OSN
7500, OptiX OSN 1500, OptiX 155/622H
(Metro 1000)
, OptiX PTN 910, OptiX PTN 950, OptiX
System
Product Description 1 Introduction

1-3

PTN 1900, OptiX PTN 3900, OptiX RTN 900) to meet the requirement for bearing the IP
service.
1.2 Features
This topic describes the features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in the aspects of system architecture,
networking, and technologies.
1.2.1 Dual-Core Architecture, Multi-Service Transmission
With a dual-core architecture, the OptiX OSN 3500 can meet the current requirement for
bearing the conventional service and the growing requirement for bearing the packet service.
1.2.2 Support for 3G Mobile Bearer and IP RAN L3 Networking
Huawei equipment provides a comprehensive L3+L2 transmission solution based on the
packet mode for service convergence and grooming of the wireless network at the core layer.
In this manner, Huawei equipment meets the requirements of the 3G mobile bearer.
1.2.3 Built-In WDM/Radio, Flexible Networking
The OptiX OSN 3500 uses the built-in WDM technology to transmit several wavelengths
over one optical fiber. In this manner, the OptiX OSN equipment can be interconnected with
the WDM equipment.
1.2.1 Dual-Core Architecture, Multi-Service Transmission
With a dual-core architecture, the OptiX OSN 3500 can meet the current requirement for
bearing the conventional service and the growing requirement for bearing the packet service.
The dual-core architecture refers to the packet mode networking based on the SDH
networking (TDM mode networking) implemented through replacing the single-mode
(TDM-mode) cross-connect board with the dual-mode (TDM and packet modes)
cross-connect board. In this manner, SDH services and packet services can coexist.
The specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 in packet and TDM modes are as follows.
Packet modes:

3.1.1 Capacity

3.1.2 Services

3.1.4 Equipment Level Protection

3.1.5 Network Level Protection
TDM modes:

3.2.1 Capacity

3.2.2 Service


1 Introduction
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

1.2.2 Support for 3G Mobile Bearer and IP RAN L3 Networking
Huawei equipment provides a comprehensive L3+L2 transmission solution based on the
packet mode for service convergence and grooming of the wireless network at the core layer.
In this manner, Huawei equipment meets the requirements of the 3G mobile bearer.
The packet mode combines the following technologies for efficient and reliable end-to-end
signal transmission of 3G base stations. As a result, the packet mode reduces the maintenance
workload and improves the network performance.

3.3.3.1 PWE3

3.3.3.2 MS PW

3.3.3.3 VRRP

3.3.3.4 BFD

3.3.3.5 DHCP Relay

3.3.3.6 VLAN Sub-Interface

3.3.3.7 L3VPN

3.3.3.8 MPLS OAM
1.2.3 Built-In WDM/Radio, Flexible Networking
The OptiX OSN 3500 uses the built-in WDM technology to transmit several wavelengths
over one optical fiber. In this manner, the OptiX OSN equipment can be interconnected with
the WDM equipment.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the radio technologies to transmit the conventional SDH
service over radio. In this manner, the radio equipment can be used as a substitute to access
the SDH service.
The following sections describe the 5.24 Built-in WDM Technology and 5.25 Microwave
Technology.
System
Product Description 2 Software Architecture and Hardware Structure

2-1

2 Software Architecture and Hardware
Structure
About This Chapter
This topic describes the software architecture and hardware structure of the OptiX OSN 3500.
2.1 Hardware Architecture
The equipment can house several types of boards and can reside in several types of cabinets.
2.2 Software Architecture
2.1 Hardware Architecture
The equipment can house several types of boards and can reside in several types of cabinets.
2.1.1 Overview
The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of the cabinet, subrack and boards.
2.1.2 Cabinet
The cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 3500. A power
supply box is installed on the top of the cabinet to access -48 V or -60 V power.
2.1.3 Subrack
The subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured.
2.1.4 Boards
The equipment supports different types of boards.
2.1.1 Overview
The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of the cabinet, subrack and boards.
Figure 2-1 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment.
2 Software Architecture and Hardware Structure
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 2-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment
7
7
W
H
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7

1. DC PDU 2. Side panel 3. Cable distribution plate 4. Orderwire phone fixing frame
5. Subrack 6. Cabinet 7. fiber management tray 8. Front door

The OptiX OSN 3500 uses various types of boards and thus forms the system frame where the
cross-connect matrix is the core. The system frame of the OptiX OSN 3500 has the following
units:

SDH interface unit

PDH interface unit

DDN interface unit

Ethernet interface unit

Resilient packet ring unit

ATM interface unit

SAN interface unit
System

2-3

WDM unit

SDH cross-connect matrix unit

Synchronous timing unit

SCC unit

Overhead processing unit

Auxiliary interface unit

Power interface unit

Optical amplifier unit and dispersion compensation unit

Packet switch unit
Figure 2-2 shows the system architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Figure 2-2 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500
STM-N optical signal
SDH signal
Ethernet signal
ATM signal
S
D
H
/
E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t
i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

u
n
i
t
O
v
e
r
h
e
a
d
p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g
u
n
i
t
S
y
n
c
h
r
o
n
o
u
s
t
i
m
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
A
u
x
i
l
i
a
r
y
I
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

u
n
i
t
S
C
C

u
n
i
t
DDN signal
PDH signal
Ethernet signal
S
D
H
/
P
D
H
/
E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t
/
A
T
M
/
D
D
N

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

u
n
i
t
TDM & Packet
Switch Fabric

2.1.2 Cabinet
The cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 3500. A power
supply box is installed on the top of the cabinet to access -48 V or -60 V power.
Figure 2-3 shows the appearance of an ETSI cabinet.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 2-3 Exterior of an ETSI cabinet
T63 Cabinet N63E Cabinet

2.1.3 Subrack
The subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured.
2.1.3.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the
processing board area, interface board area, fan area, and cable routing area.
System

2-5

2.1.3.2 Slot Allocation
The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of the upper layer and the lower layer. The upper layer,
where 19 slots are available, is the slot area for interface boards. The lower layer, where 18
slots are available, is the slot area for processing boards.
2.1.3.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the
processing board area, interface board area, fan area, and cable routing area.
Figure 2-4 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
Figure 2-4 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
1
2
3
4
W
H
D
5

1. Interface board area 2. Fan area
3. Processing board area 4. Cable routing area
5. Mounting ear -

The functions of the areas are as follows:

Interface board area: This area houses the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 3500.

Fan area: This area houses three fan modules, which dissipate heat generated by the
equipment.

Processing board area: These areas house the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500.

Cable routing area: This area houses the fiber jumpers in the subrack.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

The interface board is also called the access board or transit board. The interface board provides physical
interfaces for optical signals and electrical signals, and transmits the optical signals or electrical signals
to the corresponding processing board.
2.1.3.2 Slot Allocation
The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of the upper layer and the lower layer. The upper layer,
where 19 slots are available, is the slot area for interface boards. The lower layer, where 18
slots are available, is the slot area for processing boards.
Figure 2-5 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
Figure 2-5 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
Fiber Routing
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
P
S
X
C
S
A
FAN
SLOT 38
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
3
S
L
O
T
4
S
L
O
T
5
S
L
O
T
6
S
L
O
T
7
S
L
O
T
8
S
L
O
T
1
9
S
L
O
T
2
0
S
L
O
T
2
1
S
L
O
T
2
2
S
L
O
T
2
3
S
L
O
T
2
4
S
L
O
T
2
5
S
L
O
T
2
6
S
L
O
T
1
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S
L
O
T
1
3
S
L
O
T
1
4
S
L
O
T
1
5
S
L
O
T
1
6
S
L
O
T
1
7
S
L
O
T
1
8
S
L
O
T
2
7
S
L
O
T
2
8
S
L
O
T
2
9
S
L
O
T
3
0
S
L
O
T
3
1
S
L
O
T
3
2
S
L
O
T
3
3
S
L
O
T
3
4
S
L
O
T
3
5
S
L
O
T
3
6
S
L
O
T
3
7
FAN
SLOT 39
FAN
SLOT 40
P
S
X
C
S
A
P
I
U
P
I
U
A
U
X
G
S
C
C
G
S
C
C

Figure 2-6 shows the dual-slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
System

2-7

Figure 2-6 Dual-slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
Fiber Routing
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
P
S
X
C
S
FAN
SLOT 38
S
L
O
T
1
9
S
L
O
T
2
0
S
L
O
T
2
1
S
L
O
T
2
2
S
L
O
T
2
3
S
L
O
T
2
4
S
L
O
T
2
5
S
L
O
T
2
6
S
L
O
T
1
7
S
L
O
T
1
8
S
L
O
T
2
7
S
L
O
T
2
8
S
L
O
T
2
9
S
L
O
T
3
0
S
L
O
T
3
1
S
L
O
T
3
2
S
L
O
T
3
3
S
L
O
T
3
4
S
L
O
T
3
5
S
L
O
T
3
6
S
L
O
T
3
7
FAN
SLOT 39
FAN
SLOT 40
P
S
X
C
S
P
I
U
P
I
U
A
U
X
G
S
C
C
G
S
C
C
S
L
O
T
1
S
L
O
T
3
S
L
O
T
5
S
L
O
T
7
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
3
S
L
O
T
1
5

Slot Area for Interface Boards
Slots for the interface boards: slots 19-26 and 29-36
Slot Area for Processing Boards
Slots for the processing boards: slots 1-8 and 11-17
Other Slots

Slots for the cross-connect and timing boards: slots 9-10

Slots for the SCC boards: slots 17-18 (slot 17 can also house a processing board)

Slots for the PIU boards: slots 27-28

Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 37

Slots for the fan boards: slots 38-40
Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing
Boards
Table 2-1 lists the mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the
processing boards.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 2-1 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing
boards
Slots for
Processi
ng
Boards
Dual-Slots
for
Processing
Boards
Slots for
Correspondin
g Interface
Boards
Slots for
Processing
Boards
Dual-Slots
for
Processing
Boards
Slots for
Correspondi
ng Interface
Boards
Slot 2 - Slots 19 and 20 Slot 13 Slot 13 Slot 29 and 30
Slot 3 Slot 3 Slots 21 and 22 Slot 14 - Slot 31 and 32
Slot 4 - Slots 23 and 24 Slot 15 Slot 15 Slot 33 and 34
Slot 5 Slot 5 Slots 25 and 26 Slot 16 - Slot 35 and 36

Paired Slots
If the overhead bytes pass through the backplane bus between two slots, the two slots are
paired slots. When an NE is configured with an orderwire phone, realizes the service
protection in DPS mode, or is configured with the ring MSP at the STM-16/STM-64 level, the
two boards that form a ring must be inserted into the paired slots. Table 2-2 lists the paired
slots.
Table 2-2 Paired slots
Cross-Connect Capacity Paired Slots
(Slot 2, Slot 17)
(Slot 3, Slot 16)
(Slot 4, Slot 15)
(Slot 5, Slot 14)
(Slot 6, Slot 13)
(Slot 7, Slot 12)
200 Gbit/s
(Slot 8, Slot 11)

2.1.4 Boards
The equipment supports different types of boards.
2.1.4.1 Classification of the Boards
By function, the boards can be classified into SDH boards, PDH processing boards, packet
boards, dual-mode bridging boards, CES boards, data boards, WDM boards, and auxiliary
boards.
2.1.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several cross-connect and system control boards.
System

2-9

2.1.4.3 Packet Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports packet boards.
2.1.4.4 Dual-Mode Bridging Board
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports dual-mode bridging boards.
2.1.4.5 CES Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports CES boards.
2.1.4.6 SDH Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the SDH processing boards.
2.1.4.7 PDH Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the PDH processing boards.
2.1.4.8 EoS Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports EoS boards.
2.1.4.9 ATM Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports ATM boards.
2.1.4.10 RPR Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports RPR boards.
2.1.4.11 SAN Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports SAN boards.
2.1.4.12 WDM Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports WDM boards.
2.1.4.13 Microwave Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports Microwave boards.
2.1.4.14 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several optical amplifier boards.
2.1.4.15 Other Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the power boards and auxiliary boards.
2.1.4.1 Classification of the Boards
By function, the boards can be classified into SDH boards, PDH processing boards, packet
boards, dual-mode bridging boards, CES boards, data boards, WDM boards, and auxiliary
boards.
SDH Boards

For details on the board version replacement relation between boards, refer to the table of board version
replacement relations in the Parts Replacement.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the SDH boards that operate at the STM-64, STM-16, STM-4,
and STM-1 rates.
Table 2-3 lists the SDH boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.
Table 2-3 SDH boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports
Board Description Board Description
N1SL64,
N2SL64
1xSTM-64 optical interface
board
N1SLD4,
N2SLD4
board

N1SF64,
N1SF64A
board (with the forward
error correction (FEC)
function)
N1SLD4A 2xSTM-4 optical interface
board
N1SLD64 2xSTM-64 optical interface
board
N1SLT1 12xSTM-1 optical interface
board
N1SL16,
N2SL16,
N3SL16
board
N1SLQ1,
N2SLQ1
board
N1SL16A,
N2SL16A,
N3SL16A
board
N1SLQ1A 4xSTM-1 optical interface
board
N1SLD16 2xSTM-16 optical interface
board
N1SL1, N2SL1 1xSTM-1 optical interface
board
N1SLQ16,
N2SLQ16
board
N1SL1A 1xSTM-1 optical interface
board
N1SF16 1xSTM-16 optical interface
board (with the out-band
FEC function)
N1SLH1 16xSTM-1 signal
processing board
N1SLO16 8xSTM-16 optical interface
board
N1SEP1 2xSTM-1 line processing
board when the interfaces
are available on the front
panel
8xSTM-1 line processing
board when the interfaces
are available on the
corresponding interface
board
N1SL4,
N2SL4,
N1SL4A
board
N2SLO1,
N3SLO1
board
N1SLQ4,
N2SLQ4,
N1SLQ4A
board
N3SLQ41 4xSTM-4/STM-1 optical
interface board
System

2-11

PDH Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the PDH boards that operate at different rates and have
different impedances.
Table 2-4 lists the PDH boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.
Table 2-4 PDH boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports
N1PQ1,
N2PQ1
63xE1 service processing
board
N2PQ3 12xE3/T3 service processing
board
N1PQM 63xE1/T1 service processing
board
N1DX1 DDN service accessing and
converging board
N1PL3,
N2PL3
3xE3/T3 service processing
board
N1DXA DDN service converging and
processing board
N1PL3A,
N2PL3A
board (The interfaces are
available on the front panel.)
N1SPQ4,
N2SPQ4
4xE4/STM-1 electrical
processing board
N1PD3,
N2PD3
board
- -

Packet Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the processing boards and electrical interface boards that
operate at various rates and provide the packet feature.
Table 2-5 lists the packet boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.
Table 2-5 Packet boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports
N1PEG16 16xGE processing board N1PEX1 1x10GE processing board
N1PETF8 8xFE electrical interface
board
- -
N1PEG8 8xGE Ethernet switch
processing board
N1PEX2 2x10 GE Ethernet switch
processing board
N2PEX1 1x10GE processing board N1PEFF8 8-port Megabit Ethernet
optical interface board

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Dual-Mode Bridging Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple dual-mode bridging boards.
Table 2-6 lists the name and description of the dual-mode bridging boards supported by the
OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 2-6 Dual-mode bridging boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500
N1EDQ41 4-port 622M/155M SDH
optical interface Ethernet
double mode multiple
function processing board
- -

CES Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple CES boards.
Table 2-7 lists the name and description of the CES boards supported by the OptiX OSN
3500.
Table 2-7 CES boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500
N1CQ1 4-port channelized STM-1
optical interface board
N1MD75 Multi-protocol 32 channels E1
interface board (75 ohm)
N1MD12 Multi-protocol 32 channels E1
interface board (120 ohm)
- -

Data Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the data boards that provide the transparent transmission
function, switching function, or RPR function.
Table 2-8 lists the data boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.
Table 2-8 Data boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports
N1EFT8 8xFE or 16xFE transparent
transmission board
N1EMS2 2xGE and 16xFE transparent
transmission and converging
board
N1EFT8A 8xFE transparent
transmission board
N2EGR2 2xGE ring processing board
System

2-13

N1EGS4,
N3EGS4,
N4EGS4
4xGE switching and
processing board
N2EMR0 12xFE and 1xGE ring
processing board
N1EGT2,
N2EGT2
2xGE transparent
transmission board
N1ADL4 1xSTM-4 ATM service
processing board
N1EFS0,
N2EFS0,
N4EFS0,
N5EFS0
8xFE switching and
processing board
N1ADQ1 4xSTM-1 ATM service
processing board
N1EFS0A 16xFE switching and
processing board
N1IDL4 1xSTM-4 ATM service
processing board
N1EFS4,
N2EFS4,
N3EFS4
4xFE switching and
processing board
N1IDQ1 4xSTM-1 ATM service
processing board
N2EGS2,
N3EGS2
2xGE switching and
processing board
N1MST4 4-port multi-service
transparent transmission
board
N1EMS4 4xGE and 16xFE transparent
transmission and converging
board
N1EAS2 2-port 10xGE Layer 2
switching and processing
board

Interface Boards and Switching and Bridging Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports optical interface boards, electrical interface boards, and
switching and bridging boards.
Table 2-9 lists the interface boards and switching and bridging boards that the OptiX OSN
3500 supports.
Table 2-9 Interface boards and switching and bridging boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports
N1EU08 8xSTM-1 electrical interface
board
N1D12S 32xE1/T1 switching access
board (120 ohms)
N1OU08 8xSTM-1 optical interface
board (LC)
N1D12B 32xE1/T1 access board
(120 ohms)
N2OU08 8xSTM-1 optical interface
board (SC)
N1EFF8,
N1EFF8A
8x100M Ethernet optical
interface board
N1D75S 32xE1 switching access board
(75 ohms)
N1ETF8,
N1ETF8A
8x100M Ethernet twisted
pair interface board
N1MU04 4xE4/STM-1 electrical
interface board
N1ETS8 8x10/100M Ethernet
twisted pair interface
switching board
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

N1D34S 6xE3/T3 switching access
board
N1DM12 DDN service interface
board
N1C34S 3xE3/T3 switching access
board
N1TSB4 4-channel electrical
interface protection
switching board
N1EU04 4xSTM-1 electrical interface
board
N1TSB8 8-channel electrical
interface protection
switching board

Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple system control boards and cross-connect boards that
have different cross-connect capacities.
Table 2-10 lists the cross-connect boards and system control boards that the OptiX OSN 3500
supports.
Table 2-10 Cross-connect boards and system control boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports
Board Description
N1PSXCS Cross-connect and timing board (supporting the packet feature)
N4GSCC,
N6GSCC
Intelligent system control and communication board
N2PSXCSA Super cross-connect and timing board

Auxiliary Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports auxiliary boards such as the system auxiliary interface board
and fan board.
Table 2-11 lists the auxiliary boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.
Table 2-11 Auxiliary boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports
Board Description
N1AUX System auxiliary interface board
N1FAN Fan board

WDM Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports WDM boards such as the optical add/drop multiplexing board
and optical amplifier board.
System

2-15

Table 2-12 lists the WDM boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.
Table 2-12 WDM boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports
TN11CMR2 2-channel optical
add/drop
multiplexing board
N1MR2C 2-channel optical
add/drop
multiplexing board
TN11CMR4 4-channel optical
add/drop
multiplexing board
N1LWX Arbitrary bit rate
wavelength
conversion board
TN11MR2 2-channel optical
add/drop
multiplexing board
TN11OBU1 Optical booster
amplifier board
TN11MR4 4-channel optical
add/drop
multiplexing board
N1FIB Filter isolating board
N1MR2A 2-channel optical
add/drop
multiplexing board
- -

Microwave Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports microwave boards such as the microwave IF board and
microwave power board.
Table 2-13 lists the microwave boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.
Table 2-13 Microwave boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports
Board Description
N1IFSD1 Dual-port IF board
N1RPWR 6-channel ODU power board

Optical Amplifier Boards and Dispersion Compensation Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation
boards.
Table 2-14 lists the optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards that the
OptiX OSN 3500 supports.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 2-14 Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards that the OptiX OSN
3500 supports
N1BPA and
N2BPA
Optical booster and
pre-amplifier board
N1COA, 61COA, and
62COA
Case-shaped optical
amplifier
N1BA2 Optical booster
amplifier board
N1DCU, N2DCU Dispersion
compensation board
N1RPC01 Forward Raman
driving board
(external)
N1RPC02 Backward Raman
driving board
(external)

Power Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports power boards such as the UPM and power interface board.
Table 2-15 lists the power boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.
Table 2-15 Power boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports
Board Description
UPM Uninterruptible power module
N1PIU Power interface board
N1PIUA Power interface board (This board can be
used in the enhanced subrack that consumes
1100 W high power.)
N1PIUB Power interface board (This board can be
used in the enhanced subrack that consumes
2300 W high power.)

2.1.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several cross-connect and system control boards.
Table 2-16 lists the cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots for the
OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 2-16 Cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500
Board Valid Slot Interfacing
Mode
Interface
Type
Connector
N1PSXCS Slots 9 and 10 - - -
N2PSXCSA slot 9 and 10 - - -
System

2-17

Mode
Interface
Type
Connector
N4GSCC,
N6GSCC
slot 17 and 18 - - -

2.1.4.3 Packet Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports packet boards.
Table 2-17 provides the valid slots and interfaces of the packet boards on the OptiX OSN
3500.
Table 2-17 Valid slots and interfaces of the packet boards
Mode
Interface Type Conn
ector
Interfaces
available on
the front
panel
1000BASE-SX/L
X/ZX/VX
LC N1PEG16 Valid slots when the
N1PSXCS/N2PSXCSA is
installed: slots 1, 3, 5, 13, and
15
Interfaces
available
with two
N1PETF8/N
1PEFF8 (8 x
10/100M
Ethernet
electric/opti
cal interface
board)
- -
N1PEX1 Valid slots when the
N1PSXCS/N2PSXCSA is
installed: slots 1, 3, 5, 7, 11,
13, and 15
Interfaces
available on
the front
panel
10GBase-SR/SW
/LR/LW/ER/EW/
ZR/ZW
LC
N2PSXCSA is installed: slots
1-3 and 16 (2.5 Gbit/s
bandwidth); slots 4-6 and
13-15 (5 Gbit/s bandwidth);
slots 7 and 12 (10 Gbit/s
bandwidth); slots 8 and 11
(20 Gbit/s bandwidth)
Interfaces
available on
the front
panel
10GBase-SR/LR/
ER/ZR
LC
1-3 and 16 (2.5 Gbit/s
13-15 (5 Gbit/s bandwidth)
Interfaces
available on
the front
panel
10GBase-SR/LR/
ER/ZR
LC
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Mode
Interface Type Conn
ector
Interfaces
available on
the front
panel
1000BASE-SX/L
X/ZX/VX
LC N1PEG8 Valid slots when the
1-3 and 16 (2.5 Gbit/s
13-15 (5 Gbit/s bandwidth)
Interfaces
available
with two
N1PETF8/N
1PEFF8 (8 x
10/100M
Ethernet
electric/opti
cal interface
board)
- -
N1PETF8 Valid slots when the
N1PEG16/N1PEG8 is
installed: slots 21, 22, 25, 26,
29, 30, 33, and 34
- 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
N1PEFF8 Valid slots when the
N1PEG16 is installed: slots
19, 20, 23, 24, 29, 30, 33, 34
Valid slots when the
N1PEG8 is installed: slots
19-26, 29-36
- 100BASE-FX LC

2.1.4.4 Dual-Mode Bridging Board
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports dual-mode bridging boards.
Table 2-18 provides the valid slots and interfaces of the dual-mode bridging boards on the
OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 2-18 Valid slots and interfaces of the dual-mode bridging boards
Mode
Interface Type Conn
ector
N1EDQ41 Used with the N2PSXCSA
board: slots 4-8 and 11-14
Interfaces
available on
the front
panel
S-1.1, L-1.1,
L-1.2, Ve-1.2,
S-4.1, L-4.1,
L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC

2.1.4.5 CES Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports CES boards.
System

2-19

Table 2-19 provides the valid slots and interfaces of the CES boards on the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 2-19 Valid slots and interfaces of the CES boards
Mode
Interface Type Conn
ector
N1MD75 Slots 19-26 and 29-36 Interfaces
available on
the front
panel
75/120-ohm E1
interface
DB44
N1MD12 Slots 19-26 and 29-36 Interfaces
available on
the front
panel
75/120-ohm E1
interface
DB44
N1CQ1 Slots 19-26 and 29-36 Interfaces
available on
the front
panel
S-1.1, L-1.1,
L-1.2
LC

2.1.4.6 SDH Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the SDH processing boards.
Table 2-20 lists the SDH processing boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX
OSN 3500.
Table 2-20 SDH processing boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500
Mode
Interface
Type
Connect
or
N1SLD64 Valid slots when the
cross-connect capacity
is 200 Gbit/s: slots 7-8
and 11-12
Interfaces available
on the front panel
I-64.1, S-64.2b LC
N1SL64,
N2SL64
and 11-12
on the front panel
I-64.1, I-64.2,
S-64.2b,
L-64.2b,
Le-64.2,
Ls-64.2,
V-64.2b
LC
N1SF64,
N1SF64A
and 11-12
on the front panel
Ue-64.2c,
Ue-64.2d,
Ue-64.2e
LC
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Mode
Interface
Type
Connect
or
N1SLQ16,
N2SLQ16
and 15-16 (for the
board housed in any of
slots 1-4 and 15-16, two
optical interfaces can be
configured), and slots
5-8 and 11-14 (for the
slots 5-8 and 11-14,
four optical interfaces
can be configured)
on the front panel
I-16, S-16.2,
L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
N1SLD16 Valid slots when the
and 11-12
on the front panel
I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
N1SL16A,
N2SL16A
and 11-14
on the front panel
I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
N1SL16,
N2SL16,
N3SL16
and 11-14
on the front panel
L-16.2,
L-16.2Je,
V-16.2Je ,
U-16.2Je
LC
N1SLO16 Valid slots when the
and 11-12
on the front panel
I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
N1SF16 Valid slots when the
and 11-14
on the front panel
Ue-16.2c,
Ue-16.2d,
Ue-16.2f
LC
N1SLQ4,
N2SLQ4,
N1SLQ4A
and 15-16 (for the
slots 1-4 and 15-16, two
four optical interfaces
can be configured)
on the front panel
I-4, S-4.1,
L-4.1, L-4.2,
Ve-4.2
LC
System

2-21

Mode
Interface
Type
Connect
or
N1SLD4,
N2SLD4,
N2SLD4A
and 11-17
on the front panel
I-4, S-4.1,
L-4.1, L-4.2,
Ve-4.2
LC
N1SL4,
N2SL4,
N1SL4A
and 11-17
on the front panel
I-4, S-4.1,
L-4.1, L-4.2,
Ve-4.2
LC
N1SLH1 Valid slots when the
and 13-16 (for the
slots 2-5 and 13-16, 16
configured)
on the front panel
- LC
N1SLT1 Valid slots when the
and 15-16 (for the
slots 1-4 and 15-16, 1-8
1-12 optical interfaces
can be configured)
on the front panel
S-1.1, L-1.1,
L-1.2
LC
and 11-17 (for the
eight optical interfaces
can be configured)
on the front panel
I-1.1, S-1.1,
L-1.1, L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC
and 11-17 (for the
eight optical interfaces
can be configured)
on the front panel
I-1.1, S-1.1,
L-1.1, L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Mode
Interface
Type
Connect
or
N3SLQ41 Valid slots when the
and 11-16
on the front panel
I-1.1, S-1.1,
L-1.1, L-1.2,
Ve-1.2, I-4,
S-4.1, L-4.1,
L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1SLQ1,
N2SLQ1,
N1SLQ1A
and 11-17
on the front panel
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1,
L-1.1, L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC
N1SL1,
N2SL1,
N1SL1A
and 11-17
on the front panel
I-1, S-1.1,
L-1.1, L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC
N1SEP1
(without the
interface
board)
Slots 1-6 and 13-16 Interfaces available
on the front panel
75-ohm
E4/STM-1
electrical
interface
SMB
on the 4 x STM-1
line processing
board N1EU04
75-ohm STM-1
electrical
interface
SMB
on the 8 x STM-1
line processing
board N1OU08
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 LC
on the 8 x STM-1
line processing
board N2OU08
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 SC
N1SEP1
(with the
interface
board)
Slots 2-5 and 13-16
on the 8 x STM-1
line processing
board N1EU08
75-ohm STM-1
electrical
interface
SMB

2.1.4.7 PDH Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the PDH processing boards.
Valid Slots
Table 2-21 lists the PDH processing boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 2-22 lists the PDH interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 3500.
System

2-23

Table 2-21 PDH processing boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 3500
Board Valid Slot Interfacing Mode Interface
Type
Connect
or
N1SPQ4,
N2SPQ4
Slots 2-5 and 13-16 Interfaces available
on the 4 x electrical
interface board
N1MU04
75-ohm
E4/STM-1
electrical
interface
SMB
N1PL3,
N2PL3
is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2-5,
13-16
interface switching
board N1C34S
75-ohm E3/T3
electrical
interface
SMB
N1PL3A,
N2PL3A
(without
the
interface
board)
11-17
on the front panel
75-ohm E3/T3
electrical
interface
SMB
N1PD3,
N2PD3
13-16
interface switching
board N1D34S
75-ohm E3/T3
electrical
interface
SMB
N2PQ3 Slots 2-5 and 13-16 Interfaces available
interface switching
board N1D34S
75-ohm E3/T3
electrical
interface
SMB
N1PQ1(A
/B),
N2PQ1(A
/B)
and 13-16
on the 32-channel
electrical interface
switching board
N1D12S/N1D75S
120-ohm/75-oh
m E1 interface
DB44
N1PQM Valid slots when the
13-16
on the 32-channel
switching board
N1D12S and
N1D12B
120-ohm E1
interface,
100-ohm T1
interface
DB44
N1DX1 Slots 1-5 and 13-16 Interfaces available
on the N x 64 kbit/s
interface board
N1DM12
RS449,
EIA530,
EIA530-A,
V.35, V.24,
X.21, Framed
E1
DB28,
DB44

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 2-22 PDH interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 3500
Board Valid Slot
N1DXA Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and
11-17
N1DM12 Slots 19-26 and 29-36
N1TSB8 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19, 20,
35, 36
N1TSB4 Slots 19 and 35
N1MU04 Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35
N1C34S Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21,
23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35
N1D34S Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19-26,
29-36
29-36
29-36
N1D12B Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19-26,
29-36

2.1.4.8 EoS Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports EoS boards.
Table 2-23 provides the valid slots and interfaces of the EoS boards on the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 2-24 provides the mapping interfaces boards of the EoS interface boards and their valid
slots on the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 2-23 Valid slots and interfaces of the EoS boards
Mode
Interface
Type
Connect
or
N1EAS2 Valid slots when the
and 11-14 (10 Gbit/s)
on the front panel
10GBASE-LW/
LR
LC
N1EGS4,
N3EGS4
and 15-16 (1.25 Gbit/s),
and slots 5-8 and 11-14
(2.5 Gbit/s)
on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/
LX/ZX
LC
System

2-25

Mode
Interface
Type
Connect
or
N4EGS4 Valid slots when the
and 15-17 (1.25 Gbit/s),
(2.5 Gbit/s)
on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/
LX/ZX
LC
on the front panel
and the 8 x
10/100M Ethernet
board N1ETF8
10/100BASE-T
X
RJ-45 N1EMS4
(with the
interface
board)
and 15-16 (1.25 Gbit/s),
and slots 5 and 13-14
(2.5 Gbit/s)
on the 8 x 10/100M
Ethernet optical
interface board
N1EFF8
100BASE-FX,
1000BASE-SX/
LX/ZX
LC
N1EMS4
(without
the
interface
board)
and 15-16 (1.25 Gbit/s),
(2.5 Gbit/s)
on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/
LX/ZX
LC
on the front panel
and the 8 x
10/100M Ethernet
board N1ETF8
10/100BASE-T
X
RJ-45 N1EMS2
(with the
interface
board)
and 13-16 (2.5 Gbit/s)
on the 8 x 10/100M
Ethernet optical
interface board
N1EFF8
100BASE-FX,
1000BASE-SX/
LX/ZX
LC
N1EMS2
(without
the
interface
board)
and 11-16 (2.5 Gbit/s)
on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/
LX/ZX
LC
and 15-16 (1.25 Gbit/s),
(2.5 Gbit/s)
on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/
LX/ZX
LC
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Mode
Interface
Type
Connect
or
and 11-17 (2.5 Gbit/s)
on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/
LX/ZX
LC
N1EGT2 Valid slots when the
and 15-16 (1.25 Gbit/s),
(2.5 Gbit/s)
on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/
LX/ZX
LC
N2EGT2 Valid slots when the
and 11-17 (2.5 Gbit/s)
on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/
LX/ZX
LC
N1EFT8 Slots 1-6 and 13-16
(622 Mbit/s)
on the front panel
10/100BASE-T
X
RJ-45
on the 8 x 10/100M
Ethernet electrical
interface board
N1ETF8
10/100BASE-T
X
RJ-45 N1EFT8 Valid slots when the
and 13-16 (1.25 Gbit/s)
on the 8 x 10/100M
Ethernet optical
interface board
N1EFF8
100BASE-FX LC
N1EFT8A Slots 1-8 and 11-16
(622 Mbit/s)
on the front panel
10/100BASE-T
X
RJ-45
N1EFS4 Valid slots when the
and 11-17 (622 Mbit/s)
on the front panel
10/100BASE-T
X
RJ-45
N2EFS4,
N3EFS4
(without
the
interface
board)
and 11-17 (1.25 Gbit/s)
on the front panel
10/100BASE-T
X
RJ-45
N1EFS0 Slots 2-5 and 13-16
(622 Mbit/s)
on the 8 x 10/100M
Ethernet electrical
interface board
N1ETF8
10/100BASE-T
X
RJ-45
System

2-27

Mode
Interface
Type
Connect
or
on the 8 x 10/100M
Ethernet optical
interface board,
N1EFF8
100BASE-FX LC
on the 8 x 10/100M
Ethernet electrical
interface board
N1ETF8
10/100BASE-T
X
RJ-45 N1EFS0A Slots 2-5 and 13-16
on the 8 x 10/100M
Ethernet optical
interface board,
N1EFF8
100BASE-FX LC
on the 8 x 10/100M
Ethernet electrical
interface board
N1ETF8
10/100BASE-T
X
RJ-45 N2EFS0,
N4EFS0
and 13-16 (1.25 Gbit/s)
on the 8 x 10/100M
Ethernet optical
interface board
N1EFF8
100BASE-FX LC
on the 8 x 10/100M
Ethernet electrical
interface board
N1ETF8A
10/100BASE-T
X
RJ-45 N5EFS0 Valid slots when the
and 13-16 (1.25 Gbit/s)
on the 8 x 10/100M
Ethernet optical
interface board
N1EFF8A
100BASE-FX LC
on the 8 x 10/100M
Ethernet electrical
interface board
N1ETF8
10/100BASE-T
X
RJ-45 N2EMR0 Valid slots when the
and 15-16 (1.25 Gbit/s),
and slots 5 and 13-14
(2.5 Gbit/s)
on the 8 x 10/100M
Ethernet optical
interface board
N1EFF8
100BASE-FX LC
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Mode
Interface
Type
Connect
or
N2EMR0 Valid slots when the
and 15-16 (1.25 Gbit/s),
and slot 5-6 and 13-14
(2.5 Gbit/s)
on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/
LX/ZX
LC
N2EGR2 Valid slots when the
and 15-16 (1.25 Gbit/s),
(2.5 Gbit/s)
on the front panel
1000BASE-SX/
LX/ZX
LC
N1ADL4 Valid slots when the
and 11-17 (1.25 Gbit/s)
on the front panel
S-4.1, L-4.1,
L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1IDL4 Valid slots when the
and 11-17 (1.25 Gbit/s)
on the front panel
S-4.1, L-4.1,
L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1ADQ1 Valid slots when the
and 11-17 (1.25 Gbit/s)
on the front panel
Ie-1, S-1.1,
L-1.1, L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC
N1IDQ1 Valid slots when the
and 11-17 (1.25 Gbit/s)
on the front panel
Ie-1, S-1.1,
L-1.1, L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC
N1MST4 Valid slots when the
and 15-16 (1.25 Gbit/s),
and slot 5-8 and 11-14
(2.5 Gbit/s)
on the front panel
X3.296/(DVB-
ASI)
EN50083-9,
200-M5-SN-I,
200-SM-LC-I
LC

Table 2-24 Valid slots and interfaces of the mapping interface boards of the EoS boards
Board Valid Slot
N1EFF8, N1EFF8A Slots 19-26 and 29-36
N1ETF8, N1ETF8A Slots 19-26 and 29-36
N1ETS8 Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35

System

2-29

2.1.4.9 ATM Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports ATM boards.
Table 2-25 provides the valid slots and interfaces of the ATM boards on the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 2-25 Valid slots and interfaces of the ATM boards
Mode
Interface
Type
Connector
N1ADL4 Valid slots when the
cross-connect capacity is
200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and
11-17 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
S-4.1,
L-4.1,
L-4.2,
Ve-4.2
LC
N1IDL4 Valid slots when the
11-17 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
S-4.1,
L-4.1,
L-4.2,
Ve-4.2
LC
N1ADQ1 Valid slots when the
11-17 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
Ie-1, S-1.1,
L-1.1,
L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC
N1IDQ1 Valid slots when the
11-17 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
Ie-1, S-1.1,
L-1.1,
L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC

2.1.4.10 RPR Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports RPR boards.
Table 2-26 provides the valid slots and interfaces of the RPR boards on the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 2-27 provides the mapping interface boards of the RPR boards and their valid slots on
the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 2-26 Valid slots and interfaces of the RPR boards
Mode
Interface
Type
Connector
200 Gbit/s: slots 2-4, 15,
and 16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and
slots 5, 13, and 14 (2.5
Gbit/s)
Interfaces
available on the
8x10/100M
Ethernet
electrical
interface board
N1ETF8
10/100BAS
E-TX
RJ-45
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Mode
Interface
Type
Connector
Interfaces
available on the
8x10/100M
Ethernet optical
interface board
N1EFF8
100BASE-F
X
LC
200 Gbit/s: slots 1-4, 15,
slots 5, 6, 13, and 14 (2.5
Gbit/s)
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
1000BASE-
SX/LX/ZX
LC
N2EGR2 Valid slots when the
200 Gbit/s: slots 1-4, 15,
slots 5-8 and 11-14 (2.5
Gbit/s)
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
1000BASE-
SX/LX/ZX
LC

Table 2-27 Mapping interface boards of the RPR boards and their valid slots
Board Valid Slot
N1EFF8 Slots 19-26 and 29-36
N1ETF8 Slots 19-26 and 29-36

2.1.4.11 SAN Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports SAN boards.
Table 2-28 provides the valid slots and interfaces of the SAN boards on the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 2-28 Valid slots and interfaces of the SAN boards
Mode
Interface
Type
Connector
N1MST4 Valid slots when the
200 Gbit/s: slots 1-4, 15,
slots 5-8 and 11-14 (2.5
Gbit/s)
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
X3.296/(DV
B-ASI)
EN50083-9,
200-M5-SN
-I,
200-SM-LC
-I
LC

System

2-31

2.1.4.12 WDM Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports WDM boards.
Table 2-29 lists the WDM boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN
3500.
Table 2-29 WDM boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500
Board Valid Slot Interfacing Mode Connector
N1LWX Valid slots when the
cross-connect capacity is 200
Gbit/s: slots 1-8, 11-17
on the front panel
LC
N1FIB Valid slots when the
on the front panel
LSH/LC
TN11OBU1 Valid slots when the
on the front panel
LC
N1MR2A Valid slots when the
on the front panel
LC
N1MR2C Valid slots when the
Gbit/s: slots 19-26, 29-36
on the front panel
LC
TN11MR2 Valid slots when the
on the front panel
LC
TN11MR4 Valid slots when the
on the front panel
LC
TN11CMR2 Valid slots when the
on the front panel
LC
TN11CMR4 Valid slots when the
on the front panel
LC

2.1.4.13 Microwave Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports Microwave boards.
Table 2-30 list the microwave boards, their valid and their interface slots for the OptiX OSN
3500.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 2-30 Microwave boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500
N1IFSD1 Valid slots when the
11-17
Interfaces available on the
front panel
IF
N1RPWR Valid slots when the
11-17
- Power supply
interface

2.1.4.14 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several optical amplifier boards.
Table 2-31 lists the optical booster amplifier boards, their valid slots and their interface nfor
the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 2-31 Optical booster amplifier boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX
OSN 3500
N1BA2 Valid slots when the cross-connect
capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8,
11-17
Interfaces available on
the front panel
LC
N1BPA,
N2BPA
Valid slots when the cross-connect
11-17
the front panel
LC
N1DCU,
N2DCU
Valid slots when the cross-connect
11-17
the front panel
LC
N1COA,
61COA
Slots 101 and 102 Interfaces available on
the front panel
SC/PC
62COA Slots 101 and 102 Interfaces available on
the front panel
LSH/SC
ROP Slot 103 Interfaces available on
the front panel
LC
N1RPC01 Slot 104 Interfaces available on
the front panel
LSH/APC,
LC/PC
N1RPC02 Slot 105 Interfaces available on
the front panel
LSH/APC,
LC/PC
System

2-33

NOTE
The slots of the N1COA, 61COA, 62COA, and ROP that are displayed on the NMS are logical slots
rather than physical slots.

2.1.4.15 Other Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the power boards and auxiliary boards.
Table 2-32 lists the mapping relation between the valid slots and connectors of the power
boards and auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 2-32 Mapping relation between the valid slots and connectors of the power boards and
auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500
Board Valid Slot Connector
N1AUX Slot 37 SMB, RJ-45
N1PIU,
N1PIUA,
N1PIUB
Slots 27-28 Power supply
interface
N1FAN Slots 38-40 None

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the 110 V/220 V power supply through an uninterrupted
power modules (UPM). The UPM is used to convert 110 V/220 V AC into -48 V DC, and to
provide power supply for the OptiX OSN 3500.
A UPM consists of five power boxes and thus realizes the protected power supply. The output
power of each UPM is 5 x 800 W.
The dimensions of the power box are 436 mm (W) x 255 mm (D) x 130 mm (H).
2.2 Software Architecture
2.2.1 Overview
The software system is of a modular design. Each module provides specific functions and
works with other modules.
2.2.2 Communication Protocols
Complete protocol stack and messages of Qx interface are described in ITU-T G.773, Q.811
and Q.812.
2.2.3 Board Software
The board software runs on each board and it manages, monitors and controls the operation of
the board.
2.2.4 NE Software
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

The NE software manages, monitors and controls the board operations in the NE. In addition,
the NE software functions as a communication service unit between the T2000 and the boards,
so that the T2000 can control and manage the NE.
2.2.5 Network Management System
The NM system implements a unified management over the optical transmission network, and
maintains all OSN, SDH, Metro, DWDM NE equipment in the network.
2.2.1 Overview
The software system is of a modular design. Each module provides specific functions and
works with other modules.
The entire software is distributed in three modules including board software, NE software and
NM system.
The software resides respectively on functional boards, the SCC, and NM computer.
Hierarchical structure ensures that it is highly reliable and efficient. Each layer performs
specific functions and provides service for the upper layer.
The system software architecture is shown in Figure 2-7.
In the diagram, all modules are NE software except "Network Management System" and
"Board Software".
Figure 2-7 Software architecture with the ASON feature
High Level
Communication Module
Communication Module
Equipment Management
Module
NE software
Network Management
System
Board Software
Database
Management
Module
Network side Module
Real-time
multi-task
operating
system

2.2.2 Communication Protocols
Complete protocol stack and messages of Qx interface are described in ITU-T G.773, Q.811
and Q.812.
System

2-35

Qx interface is mainly used to connect mediation device (MD), Q adaptation (QA) and NE
(NE) equipment through local communication network (LCN).
At present, QA is provided by NE management layer. MD and operating system (OS) are
provided by NM layer. They are connected to each other through Qx interface.
According to the Recommendations, Qx interface provided by the system is developed on the
basis of TCP/IP connectionless network layer service (CLNS1) protocol stack.
In addition, to support remote access of the NM through Modem, IP layer uses serial line
internet protocol (SLIP).
2.2.3 Board Software
The board software runs on each board and it manages, monitors and controls the operation of
the board.
It receives the command issued from the NE software and reports the board status to the NE
software through performance events and alarm.
The specific functions include:

Alarm management

Performance management

Configuration management

Communication management
It directly controls the functional circuits in corresponding boards and implements ITU-T
compliant specific functions of the NE.
2.2.4 NE Software
The NE software manages, monitors and controls the board operations in the NE. In addition,
the NE software functions as a communication service unit between the T2000 and the boards,
so that the T2000 can control and manage the NE.
According to ITU-T M.3010, NE software is at unit management layer in telecom
management network, performing NE function (NEF), partial mediation function (MF) and
OS function at network unit layer.
Data communication function (DCF) provides communication channel between NE and other
equipment (including NM and other NEs).

Real-time multi-task operating system
The NE software offers real-time multi-task operating system to manage public resources
and support application programs.
It isolates the application programs from the processor and provides an application
program execution environment, which is independent of the processor hardware.

Communication module
The communication module is the interface module between NE software and board
software.
According to related protocol, communication function between the NE software and the
board software is for information exchange and maintenance of the equipment.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Through the communication, board maintenance and operation commands from the NE
software are sent to the boards. On the other hand, the state, alarm and performance
events of the board are reported to the NE software.

Network Side (NS) Module
The NS module is between the communication module and the equipment management
module. It converts the data format between the user operation side (at the application
layer) and the NE equipment management layer, and provides security control for the NE
layer.
Functionally, the NS module is divided into the following three submodules:
Qx interface module
Command line interface module
Security management module

Equipment management module
The equipment management module is the core of the NE software for the NE
management. It includes administrator and agent.
Administrator can send NM operation commands and receive events.
Agent can respond to the NM operation commands sent by the administrator, implement
the operations of the managed object, and send up events according to the change of
status of the managed object.

High-level communication module
The high-level communication module exchanges management information among NEs
and between the NM system and the NE.
It consists of network communication module, serial communication module and ECC
communication module.

Database management module
The database management module is a part of the NE software.
It includes two independent parts: data and program.
The data are organized in the form of database, including network database, alarm
database, performance database and equipment database.
The program manages and accesses the data in the database.
2.2.5 Network Management System
The NM system implements a unified management over the optical transmission network, and
maintains all OSN, SDH, Metro, DWDM NE equipment in the network.
In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, it is an NM system that integrates standard
management information model as well as object-oriented management technology.
It exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module to monitor
and manage the network equipment.
The NM software runs on a workstation or PC, managing the equipment and the transmission
network to help to operate, maintain and manage the transmission equipment.
The management functions of the NM software include:

Alarm management: collects, prompts, filters, browses, acknowledges, checks, clears,
and counts in real time; fulfills alarm insertion, alarm correlation analysis and fault
diagnosis.
System

2-37

Performance management: sets performance monitoring; browses, analyzes and prints
performance data; forecasts medium-term and long-term performance; and resets
performance register.

Configuration management: configures and manages interfaces, clocks, services, trails,
subnets and time.

Security management: provides NM user management, NE user management, NE login
management, NE login lockout, NE setting lockout and local craft terminal (LCT) access
control of the equipment.

Maintenance management: provides loopback, board resetting, automatic laser shutdown
(ALS) and optical fiber power detection, and collects equipment data to help the
maintenance personnel in troubleshooting.

Querying service alarm: queries the current real alarms on the service path; determines
the connectivity or degrade status of the service, according to the current alarm; analyzes
the faulty node and locates the faulty board.

Detecting the MS protection channel: detects the VC-4 channel alarms on the VC-4
channel that maps the MS protection channel.
System
Product Description 3 Functions and Features

3-1

3 Functions and Features
About This Chapter
This topic describes the functions and features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in packet mode and in
TDM mode. This topic also focuses on the data features and ASON features.
3.1 Basic Functions on Packet Mode
This topic describes the capacity, services, clock, and protection schemes of the OptiX OSN
3500 in packet mode.
3.2 Basic Functions on TDM Mode
The equipment has many functions.
3.3 Packet Features
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides certain boards that have packet features. The TDM mode can
be overlapped with the packet mode to transmit data on the two planes. Hence, the equipment
can realize the smooth evolution from the multiservice transport platform (MSTP) network to
the packet transmission network (PTN) network.
3.1 Basic Functions on Packet Mode
This topic describes the capacity, services, clock, and protection schemes of the OptiX OSN
3.1.1 Capacity
This topic describes the switching capacity and slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 in
packet mode.
3.1.2 Services
This topic describes the service types, interfaces, and maximum access capacity of each
service type supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 in packet mode.
3.1.3 Clock Synchronization
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple synchronization technologies: traditional clock
synchronization, high precision time (IEEE 1588 V2) and clock synchronization, and
synchronous Ethernet.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

In packet mode, the equipment supports various equipment level protection schemes.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports various network level protection schemes.
3.1.1 Capacity
This topic describes the switching capacity and slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 in
packet mode.
3.1.1.1 Switching Capability
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the packet-based service switching by using the
N1PSXCS/N2PSXCSA.
3.1.1.2 Slot Access Capacity On The Packet Mode
When the cross-connect board is N1PSXCS or N2PSXCSA, the access capacity of each slot
on the OptiX OSN 3500 is different.
3.1.1.1 Switching Capability
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the packet-based service switching by using the
N1PSXCS/N2PSXCSA.
Table 3-1 provides the maximum switching capability of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 3-1 Switching capability of the OptiX OSN 3500
Board Maximum Switching
Capability
Access Capacity of a Single
Subrack
N1PSXCS 80 Gbit/s 60 Gbit/s
N2PSXCSA 160 Gbit/s 100 Gbit/s

3.1.1.2 Slot Access Capacity On The Packet Mode
When the cross-connect board is N1PSXCS or N2PSXCSA, the access capacity of each slot
on the OptiX OSN 3500 is different.
When the N1PSXCS board is used to support packet services, one service processing board
occupies two slots. In this case, the neighboring two slots function as one slot, as shown in
Figure 3-1.
System

3-3

Figure 3-1 Slot access capacity when the N1PSXCS board is used
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
Cable routing
FAN FAN FAN
S
L
O
T
3
S
L
O
T
5
S
L
O
T
7
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
3
S
L
O
T
1
5
S
L
O
T
1
S
L
O
T
1
7
S
L
O
T
1
8
N
1
P
S
X
C
S
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
G
S
C
C
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
7
.
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
7
.
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
N
1
P
S
X
C
S
G
S
C
C

Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-3 show the slot access capacity when the N2PSXCSA board is used
to support packet services.
Figure 3-2 Slot access capacity when the N2PSXCSA board is used (single slots)
Cable routing
FAN FAN FAN
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
3
S
L
O
T
4
S
L
O
T
5
S
L
O
T
6
S
L
O
T
7
S
L
O
T
8
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S
L
O
T
1
3
S
L
O
T
1
4
S
L
O
T
1
5
S
L
O
T
1
6
S
L
O
T
1
S
L
O
T
1
7
S
L
O
T
1
8
N
2
P
S
X
C
S
A
G
S
C
C
2
.
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
2
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
2
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
2
.
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
N
2
P
S
X
C
S
A
2
.
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
2
.
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
G
S
C
C

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 3-3 Slot access capacity when the N2PSXCSA board is used (double slots)
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
Cable routing
FAN FAN FAN
S
L
O
T
3
S
L
O
T
5
S
L
O
T
7
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
3
S
L
O
T
1
5
S
L
O
T
1
S
L
O
T
1
7
S
L
O
T
1
8
N
2
P
S
X
C
S
A
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
G
S
C
C
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
7
.
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
7
.
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
N
2
P
S
X
C
S
A
G
S
C
C

3.1.2 Services
This topic describes the service types, interfaces, and maximum access capacity of each
service type supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 in packet mode.
3.1.2.1 Service Types
OptiX OSN 3500 supports Ethernet services and CES services.
3.1.2.2 Service Interfaces
This topic provides the Ethernet and CES service interfaces supported by the OptiX OSN
3.1.2.3 Service Access Capacity
The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can access vary according to the type and
quantity of the configured boards.
OptiX OSN 3500 supports Ethernet services and CES services.
Types of Ethernet services:

E-Line service

E-LAN service

E-Aggr service
This topic provides the Ethernet and CES service interfaces supported by the OptiX OSN
Table 3-2 lists the Ethernet service interfaces on the OptiX OSN 3500.
System

3-5

Table 3-2 Ethernet service interfaces on the OptiX OSN 3500
Type of
Interface
Description
FE electrical
interface
10/100BASE-TX
FE optical
interface
100BASE-FX
GE 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-ZX, 1000BASE-VX
10GE 10GBase-SR, 10GBase-SW, 10GBase-LR, 10GBase-LW, 10GBase-ER,
10GBase-EW, 10GBase-ZR, 10GBase-ZW

Table 3-3 lists the CES service interfaces on the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 3-3 CES service interfaces on the OptiX OSN 3500
Type of
Interface
Description
E1 CES
interface
75/120-ohm E1 electrical interface: DB44 connector
cSTM-1
interface
STM-1 optical interfaces: S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2

The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can access vary according to the type and
Table 3-4 lists the maximum capacity of different services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can
access. The maximum capacity refers to the maximum number of services when a single
subrack accesses only this specific type of service.
Table 3-4 Service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 (in packet mode)
Service Type Maximum Number of Services
Supported By a Single Subrack
Fast Ethernet (FE) services 128
Gigabit Ethernet (GE) services 80
10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GE) services 28
CES (E1) services 504
CES (channelized STM-1) services 64

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple synchronization technologies: traditional clock
synchronization, high precision time (IEEE 1588 V2) and clock synchronization, and
synchronous Ethernet.
In TDM mode, the equipment supports only the traditional clock synchronization.
In packet mode, the equipment uses a data board that works with the cross-connect and SCC
boards to implement synchronization technologies. The supported synchronization
technologies are the traditional clock synchronization, the high precision clock
synchronization, and the synchronous Ethernet.
3.1.3.1 Traditional Clock Synchronization
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides multiple traditional clock functions.
3.1.3.2 IEEE 1588 V2 Time and Clock Synchronization
To meet the requirement of synchronization between equipment, the OptiX OSN equipment
adopts the high precision time and clock synchronization technologies.
3.1.3.3 Synchronous Ethernet
The Ethernet physical layer frequency synchronization technology that is realized by using
data boards on the OptiX OSN 3500 is called the synchronous Ethernet.

SSM clock protocol

Tributary retiming

Two 75-ohm/120-ohm external clock output and input

External clock output shutdown

Line clock source

Tributary clock source

Three working modes are as follows:
Tracing mode
Holdover mode
Free-run mode
For details on the traditional clock synchronization, see e Feature Description.
3.1.3.2 IEEE 1588 V2 Time and Clock Synchronization
To meet the requirement of synchronization between equipment, the OptiX OSN equipment
adopts the high precision time and clock synchronization technologies.
High Precision Time
The high precision time is achieved based on the frequency synchronization.
Only on the packet modes, the equipment can support the high precision time function.
System

3-7

On the packet modes, with IEEE 1588 V2, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports the access and
transit of high precision time.

When the OptiX OSN 3500 is used to access high precision time signals, the Ethernet
data board accesses the external high precision time signals. Then, working with the
SCC board (N4GSCC/N6GSCC) and cross-connect board (N1PSXCS/N2PSXCSA), the
Ethernet line board transfers the accessed external time signals downward layer by layer
through the packet network. Finally, the time signals arrive at the equipment that requires
the precise time, such as 3G base station equipment.

When the OptiX OSN 3500 is used to transfer high precision time signals only, the
Ethernet line board on the local NE needs to access the high precision time signals from
another OptiX OSN equipment. Then, working with the SCC board (N4GSCC/N6GSCC)
and cross-connect board (N1PSXCS/N2PSXCSA), the Ethernet line board transfers the
time signals to the downstream. Finally, the time signals arrive at the equipment that
requires the precise time, such as 3G base station equipment.
In packet mode, the Ethernet boards that support the high precision time function are as
follows:

Cross-connect board: N1PSXCS and N2PSXCSA

Data processing board: N1PEG8, N1PEX2, N2PEX1, N1PEG16, and N1PEX1

Data interface board: N1PETF8 and N1PEFF8

SCC board: N4GSCC and N6GSCC

The interface boards, N1PETF8 and N1PEFF8 support the high precision time function only when
working with the processing boards N1PEG16 and N1PEG8.
For details on the high precision time, see Feature Description.
High Precision Clock
The high precision clock synchronization technology is a frequency synchronization
technology. The traditional frequency synchronization technology extracts clock signals from
the port of the line board, compares the clock signals, and chooses the best frequency
information that is sent to the downstream node; however, the high precision clock technology
uses the time stamp function to record several key time points, chooses the best frequency
signal through the internal algorithm, and sends the best frequency signal to the downstream
node.
In packet mode, the equipment can support the time and frequency synchronization functions
at the same time. The equipment cannot support the traditional clock synchronization
technology when it supports the high precision clock synchronization technology in packet
mode.
The boards that support the high precision clock synchronization technology are as follows:

Cross-connect board: N1PSXCS and N2PSXCSA

Data processing board: N1PEG8, N1PEX2, N2PEX1, N1PEG16, and N1PEX1

Data interface board: N1PETF8 and N1PEFF8

SCC board: N4GSCC and N6GSCC
3.1.3.3 Synchronous Ethernet
The Ethernet physical layer frequency synchronization technology that is realized by using
data boards on the OptiX OSN 3500 is called the synchronous Ethernet.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

The synchronous Ethernet technology forwards the clock signal at the Ethernet physical layer.
At the receive end, the equipment extracts the best clock signals from the physical layer and
uses it for the local frequency synchronization. At the same time, the best clock signals are
distributed through the physical layer and accessed to every set of equipment on the entire
Ethernet.

In the synchronous Ethernet clock path, the frequency synchronization of the synchronous
Ethernet is performed only when all the NEs in the path house the data boards that support the
synchronous Ethernet function and the synchronous Ethernet function of these data boards is
enabled on the NMS.
At the receive end, the equipment chooses the best frequency signals through the
cross-connect board and distributes these signals to the entire Ethernet.
For details on the synchronous Ethernet, see the Feature Description.
In packet mode, the equipment supports various equipment level protection schemes.
Table 3-5 lists the equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 3-5 Equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500
Service Type Protection Scheme
LAG Ethernet (packet mode)
MC-LAG

3.1.4.1 1+1 Protection of Packet Boards
In packet mode, packet boards provides 1+1 protection through LAGs.
3.1.4.2 MC-LAG Protection
On a Layer 2 network, the MC-LAG technology helps to provide RNC dual-homing.
3.1.4.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units
With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run in a
safe manner.
3.1.4.4 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit
With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner.
3.1.4.5 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit
The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU.
3.1.4.6 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply
System

3-9

The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this
protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner.
3.1.4.7 Intelligent Fans
Intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the temperature of the
equipment.
3.1.4.8 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions
The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and
overvoltage protection.
3.1.4.1 1+1 Protection of Packet Boards
In packet mode, packet boards provides 1+1 protection through LAGs.
In packet mode, the N1PEG16, N1PEX1, N1PEG8, N1PEX2, and N2PEX1 boards support
the LAG protection.
Table 3-6 lists the parameters of the LAG protection.
Table 3-6 Parameters for 1+1 LAG protection of Ethernet boards (in packet mode)
Parameter LAG
Switching condition (any of
the conditions triggers the
switching)

The links of the interconnected equipment are directly
connected to each other through the static LAG or
manual LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the
fiber is cut in both directions. Switching time is equal to
or less than 500 ms.

connected to each other through the static LAG or
manual LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the
fiber is cut in one direction. In addition, the ports of the
interconnected equipment are set to the auto-negotiation
mode. Switching time is equal to or less than 500 ms.

connected to each other through the static LAG, no
intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is cut in
both directions. Switching time is equal to or less than
3.5 s.
Revertive mode

Revertive (default)

Non-revertive
Load sharing mode

Load sharing

Load non-sharing
NOTE
If a LAG is manually aggregated and the ports work in full-duplex mode, successful switching cannot be
ensured for a fiber cut in one direction. In the other cases, the switching can be performed successfully
within a period of 3 to 6 seconds.
The system provides intra-board port LAG protection and inter-board LAG protection, which comply
with IEEE 802.3ad. The applicable ports include FE and GE ports.

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

In packet mode, LAG can realize intra-board link aggregation and inter-board link aggregation.
3.1.4.2 MC-LAG Protection
On a Layer 2 network, the MC-LAG technology helps to provide RNC dual-homing.
As shown in Figure 3-4, the FE service coming from the base station is first accessed to the
Layer 2 network through the access node and then transmitted to the RNC. MC-LAG provides
protection for the networking as follows: The RNC is connected to the two sets of the OptiX
OSN equipment at the convergence layer. In this manner, reliable transmission of
large-capacity 3G services from mobile base stations to the RNC/BSC is guaranteed.
Figure 3-4 Networking diagram of RNC dual-homing adopting the MC-LAG technology
NodeB
RNC
MC-LAG
Packet ring
L2
networking
FE

Table 3-7 provides the parameters of RNC dual-homing adopting the MC-LAG technology.
System

3-11

Table 3-7 Parameters of RNC dual-homing adopting the MC-LAG technology
Swit
chin
g
Type
Revert
ive
Mode
Swit
chin
g
Prot
ocol
Switchi
ng
Mode
Switc
hing
Durat
ion
Switching
Hold-Off
Time
Default
WTR Time
Switchi
ng
Conditi
on (Any
of the
Followi
ng
Conditi
ons
Triggers
the
Switchi
ng)
1+1
1:1
Reverti
ve
Non-re
vertive
APS
proto
col
Lockout
of
protectio
n
Forced
switching
Automati
c
switching
Manual
switching
Netwo
rk
side:
50 ms
User
side:
3s
0s to 10s 1 minute to
12 minutes
Network
side:

dServe
r

dLOC
V

dTTSI
_Mism
atch

dTTSI
_Mism
erge

dExces
s
User
side:

ETH_L
OS

LINK_
DOW
N
NOTE
When MC-LAG works together with DNI-APS, adopt the parameters of DNI-APS on the network side
and the parameters of MC-LAG on the user side.

safe manner.
For the OptiX OSN 3500, the cross-connect and timing units are integrated in the
cross-connect and timing board. The cross-connect and timing board adopts a 1+1 hot backup
mechanism so that the cross-connect and timing units are protected. Table 3-8 lists the 1+1 hot
backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 3-8 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units
Parameter Description
Slots for working and
protection boards
Slot 9 and slot 10
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:

The working board is offline.

The working board is cold reset.

The board is warm reset and the switching protocol is triggered.

The hardware of the working board fails.

A switching command is issued.
Revertive mode Non-revertive
After successful switching, the original protection board becomes
the working board. After the original working board is recovered,
the current working board continues to be the original protection
board.

For the OptiX OSN 3500, the GSCC board provides the system control and communication
(SCC) functions.
The active and standby GSCC boards form a 1+1 hot backup mechanism. When the active
GSCC is working, the standby GSCC is in the protection state.
Table 3-9 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit.
Table 3-9 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit
protection boards
Sot 18 and slot 17


The working board is under a hot reset.

The working board is under a cold reset.


Revertive mode Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original protection
board becomes the working board, and the original working board
becomes the protection board.

System

3-13

The OptiX OSN 3500 can access two -48 V DC power supplies by using two N1PIU,
N1PIUA, N1PIUB boards. These two power supplies provide a mutual backup for each other.
When either of them fails, the other power supply provides a backup to ensure normal
operation of the equipment.
If the voltage of the two external power supplies of the equipment is the same, the two PIU
boards of mutual backup separately share half of the current.
If the voltage offset value of the two external power supplies of the equipment is more than
0.7 V, all the current pass the PIU board of the external power supply that has high voltage,
and no current pass the PIU board of the external power supply that has low voltage. When
only one PIU board is working, the power supply of the subrack is not affected.

If different boards are configured, the total power consumption and current of the equipment are
different, and the current value of the PIU boards is also different. The current values of the PIU boards
are computed according to the actual configuration.
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides reliable power backup for the +3.3 V power supply of other
boards, including the SCC and service boards by using the power backup unit on the N1AUX
board. When the power supply of a board fails, the backup power supply immediately
provides backup to ensure the normal operation of the board.
equipment.
The OptiX OSN 3500 uses three intelligent fan modules to realize heat dissipation. The power
supplies of the three fan modules are of mutual backup.
The intelligent fans provide the functions of intelligent speed regulation and failure detection.
When one fan module becomes faulty, the other fan modules operate at the full speed. The
running status of the fans is indicated by the corresponding indicators on the front panel of the
fan module.
Power-Down Protection During Software Loading
The verification function is provided for applications and data. After software loading is
interrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any applications or data that
are not successfully or completely loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the loading to be
resumed, until the software is successfully and completely loaded.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power Supply
The power board provides a lightning protection component to effectively avoid the damage
that may be caused by transient high voltages such as lightning.
When a board is in undervoltage, the board automatically resets its CPU so that the software
can re-initialize the chip.
When a board is in undervoltage, the power system also automatically turns off the power
supply on the main loop so that the system is protected.
Board Temperature Detection
Temperature detection circuits are built in boards (for example, the cross-connect and timing
board) that generates a large amount of heat. When the board detects a high temperature, an
alarm is generated to prompt the maintenance personnel about cleaning the fans.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports various network level protection schemes.
Table 3-10 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 3-10 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500
Network Level Protection Scheme
MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1
Ethernet spanning tree protocol
(STP/RSTP/MSTP)
PW APS
DNI APS
Linear MSP of CES boards
Packet service mode
LPT

MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protection and PW APS is applicable to the access equipment, for providing
protection for the services between the access point and convergence point. The difference is as
follows: If no transit equipment exists between the access node and the convergence node, MPLS
tunnel 1+1/1:1 protection is applicable. That is, MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protection is applicable to
single-hop PWs. If there is transit equipment between the access node and the convergence node,
PW APS is applicable. That is, PW APS is applicable to multi-hop PWs. This is because the transit
equipment terminates the original tunnel label and then generates a new tunnel label.
The convergence layer supports DNI APS and MC-LAG. The difference is as follows: DNI APS is
used on the network-to-network (NNI) side, and MC-LAG is used on the user-to-network (UNI)
side.
3.1.5.1 MPLS Tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 Protection
The equipment supports the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection only on the packet mode. In
the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection, the protection path protects the service that is
transported in the working path. When the working path is faulty, the service is switched to
System

3-15

the protection path. The 1+1 protection adopts the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism,
and the 1:1 protection adopts the single fed and single receiving mechanism.
3.1.5.2 PW APS 1+1/1:1 Protection
PW APS is a type of network-level protection scheme. To be specific, when the working PW
fails, the protection PW protects services in the failed working PW. PW APS is available in
two types: PW APS 1+1 and PW APS 1:1.
3.1.5.3 DNI APS
When working with other protection schemes (such as SNCP, PW APS, and MC-LAG), DNI
APS provides protection for the services that travel across two packet rings, or two rings of
the TDM and packet modes, as well as for failed optical fibers and failed nodes.
3.1.5.4 Linear MSP of CES Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the CES function and therefore can directly transmit E1
services on the packet ring.
3.1.5.5 LPT
LPT can detect the faults that occur at the service access node or on the intermediate
transmission network, and then can instruct the equipment at both ends of the transmission
network to start the backup network immediately for communication. In this manner, LPT
ensures normal transmission of the important data.
3.1.5.6 Ethernet Spanning Tree Protection
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), which is
compatible with the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
Through the MSTP, a ring network can be pruned and changed to a tree network that does not
contain a loop, hence preventing the packets on a ring network from being increased and
preventing broadcast storm from being caused by endless circling.
3.1.5.1 MPLS Tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 Protection
The equipment supports the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection only on the packet mode. In
the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection, the protection path protects the service that is
transported in the working path. When the working path is faulty, the service is switched to
the protection path. The 1+1 protection adopts the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism,
and the 1:1 protection adopts the single fed and single receiving mechanism.
The APS protocol in MPLS tunnel protection is transmitted on the protection path. The
equipment at the two ends transmits the protocol state and switching state to each other. In
addition, the equipment at the two ends switches the services according to the protocol state
and switching state.
The MPLS protection complies with ITU-T G.8031.
MPLS Tunnel 1+1 Protection
Figure 3-5 shows the MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection supported by the equipment.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 3-5 MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection
Ethernet
board
Switching
Ethernet
board
Access
Ethernet
board
Switching
Ethernet
board
Subnetwork
Service detection point
Working path
Protection/Protocol path
Subnetwork
Access

The MPLS 1+1 protection adopts the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism for services.
When the working path is faulty, the receive end selects the service from the protection path.
In this way, the service switching is realized.

Detection method:
Physical layer check: At the physical layer, the loss of signal is detected in
microseconds.
Link layer check: The link layer check is performed to check the MPLS OAM. The
system provides seven check intervals, that is, 3.33ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, 1s, 10s, 1 m,
and 10 m. If the MPLS OAM check interval is 3.33 ms, it ensures that the automatic
MPLS switching time is less than 50 ms.

Switching process: The receive end selects the service channel according to the link
status.
MPLS Tunnel 1:1 Protection
Figure 3-6 shows the MPLS 1:1 protection supported by the equipment.
Figure 3-6 MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection
Ethernet
board
Switching
Ethernet
board
Ethernet
board
Switching
Ethernet
board
Access
Subnetwork
Working path
Protection/Protocol path
Subnetwork
Access

System

3-17

In the MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection, the accessed service is transported in the working path.
When the working path is faulty, the service is switched to the protection path. The single fed
and single receiving mechanism is used for the service. The APS protocol information is
transported through the protection path. The equipment at the two ends exchanges the
protocol state information and the switching state information. According to the protocol state
and switching state, the equipment at the two ends performs the service switching.

Detection method:
Physical layer check: At the physical layer, the loss of signal is detected in
microseconds.
Link layer check: The link layer check is performed through the MPLS OAM. If the
MPLS OAM check time is 3.3 ms, it ensures that the MPLS automatic switching time
is less than 50 ms.

Switching process: After a negotiation using the APS protocol, the transmit end switches
the service to the protection path, and the receive end selects the service from the
protection path.
Protection Parameters
Table 3-11 lists the parameters of the MPLS 1+1 and 1:1 protection.
Table 3-11 MPLS 1+1 and 1:1 protection parameters
Swit
chin
g
Type
Revert
ive
Mode
Swit
chin
g
Prot
ocol
Switchi
ng
Mode
Switc
hing
Time
Switching
Delay Time
Default
WTR
Time
Any of the
following
conditions
triggers the
switching:
1+1
single
-ende
d
switc
hing
Non-re
vertive
APS Locked
switching
Forced
switching
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
50
ms
0 to 100ms (0
by default)
-
1+1
dual-
ended
switc
hing
Non-re
vertive
APS Locked
switching
Forced
switching
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
50
ms
0 to 100ms (0
by default)
-

The board
has a
hardware
or
software
failure.

The board
is in a cold
reset.

A
switching
command
is
manually
issued.

Tunnel
faulty is
detected
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Swit
chin
g
Type
Revert
ive
Mode
Swit
chin
g
Prot
ocol
Switchi
ng
Mode
Switc
hing
Time
Switching
Delay Time
Default
WTR
Time
Any of the
following
conditions
triggers the
switching:
1+1
single
-ende
d
switc
hing
Reverti
ve
APS Locked
switching
Forced
switching
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
50
ms
0 to 100ms (0
by default)
5m
1+1
dual-
ended
switc
hing
Reverti
ve
APS Locked
switching
Forced
switching
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
50
ms
0 to 100ms (0
by default)
5m
1:1
dual-
ended
switc
hing
Non-re
vertive
APS Locked
switching
Forced
switching
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
50
ms
0 to 100ms (0
by default)
-
1:1
dual-
ended
switc
hing
Reverti
ve
APS Locked
switching
Forced
switching
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
50
ms
0 to 100ms (0
by default)
5m
by MPLS
OAM.

3.1.5.2 PW APS 1+1/1:1 Protection
PW APS is a type of network-level protection scheme. To be specific, when the working PW
fails, the protection PW protects services in the failed working PW. PW APS is available in
two types: PW APS 1+1 and PW APS 1:1.
System

3-19

PW APS 1+1 Protection
Generally, services are transmitted to the working PW and protection PW at the source end
and are received from the working PW at the sink end. When the working PW is faulty,
services are received from the protection PW. Figure 3-7 shows the typical networking of PW
APS 1+1 protection.
Figure 3-7 Typical networking of PW APS 1+1 protection
Accessing
Data board
Switching
Data board
Conver
gence
Data board
Switching
Data board
Subnet
Subnet
Working
channel
Protection channel/
protocol channel
NE1 NE2
Accessing services
at base stations

PW APS 1:1 Protection
Generally, services are transmitted to the working PW at the source end and are received from
the working PW at the sink end. When the working PW is faulty, services are transmitted to
the protection PW at the source end and are received form the protection PW at the sink end.
Figure 3-8 shows the typical networking of PW APS 1:1 protection.
Figure 3-8 Typical networking of PW APS 1:1 protection
Accessing
Data board
Switching
Data board
Converging
Data board
Switching
Data board
Subnet
Subnet
Service detection point Service detection point
Working
channel
Protection channel/
protocol channel
NE1 NE2
Assessing services
at base stations

Table 3-12 provides the parameters of PW APS.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 3-12 Parameters of PW APS
Swit
chin
g
Type
Revert
ive
Mode
Swit
chin
g
Prot
ocol
Switchi
ng
Mode
Switc
hing
Durat
ion
Switching
Hold-Off
Time
WTR
Time
Switching
Condition
(Any of the
Following
Conditions
Triggers
the
Switching)
1+1
1:1
Reverti
ve
Non-re
vertive
APS
proto
col
Locked
switching
Forced
switching
Automati
c
switching
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
50
ms
0s to 10s 1 minute
to 12
minutes
The board
has a
hardware or
software
failure.
A cold reset
occurs on
the board.
A switching
command is
manually
issued.
The PW
OAM
mechanism
detects a
PW failure.

For details on PW APS, see PW APS in the Feature Description.
3.1.5.3 DNI APS
When working with other protection schemes (such as SNCP, PW APS, and MC-LAG), DNI
APS provides protection for the services that travel across two packet rings, or two rings of
the TDM and packet modes, as well as for failed optical fibers and failed nodes.
For details on DNI APS, see MC PW APS in the Feature Description.
DNI APS in Packet Mode
Figure 3-9 shows a Layer 2 network, where the convergence node is configured with DNI
APS to protect NEs at the access layer.
System

3-21

Figure 3-9 Networking diagram of DNI APS in packet mode
NodeB
RNC
MC-LAG
Packet ring
L2
networking
FE

Table 3-13 provides the parameters when DNI APS works with MC-LAG in packet mode.
Table 3-13 Parameters of DNI APS in packet mode
Switc
hing
Type
Reverti
ve
Mode
Switc
hing
Protoc
ol
Switching
Mode
Switchi
ng
Durati
on
Switching
Hold-Off
Time
Switching
Condition
(Any of the
Following
Conditions
Triggers the
Switching)
1:1 Revertiv
e
Non-rev
ertive
APS
protoc
ol
Locked
switching
Forced
switching
Automatic
switching
Manual
switching
0s to
10s
1 minute to 12
minutes

The board
has a
hardware or
software
failure.

A cold reset
occurs on the
board.

A switching
command is
manually
issued.

Link error.
NOTE
When DNI APS works with MC-LAG, adopt the parameters of DNI APS on the network side and the
parameters of MC-LAG on the user side.

Dual-Mode DNI APS Working with Other APS Schemes
As shown in Figure 3-10, EoS signals from the base station are directly converted and
transmitted to the packet ring. DNI APS works the MAC broadcast technology to protect
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 3-10 Typical networking of dual-mode DNI APS working with other APS schemes
E1
BSC
DNI-APS
Packet ring
L2 networking
BTS
SDH ring
EOS

Table 3-14 provides the parameters of dual-mode DNI APS working with other APS schemes.
Table 3-14 Parameters of dual-mode DNI APS working with other APS schemes
Switc
hing
Type
Revertiv
e Mode
Switc
hing
Protoc
ol
Switch
ing
Mode
Switc
hing
Durat
ion
Swit
chin
g
Hold
-Off
Time
WT
R
Ti
me
Switching
Condition (Any of
the Following
Conditions Triggers
the Switching)
1+1
1:1
Revertive
Non-reve
rtive
APS
protoco
l
Locked
switchin
g
Forced
switchin
g
Automa
tic
switchin
g
Manual
switchin
g
Exercis
e
switchin
g
Packet
side:
50
ms
SDH
side:
50
ms
0s to
10s
1
min
ute
to
12
min
utes
Packet side:

The board has a
hardware or software
failure.

A cold reset occurs
on the board.

A switching
command is
manually issued.

The PW OAM
mechanism detects a
PW failure.
SDH side:

LOS/LOF/AIS/LOP/
UNEQ/EXC/LOM

3.1.5.4 Linear MSP of CES Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the CES function and therefore can directly transmit E1
Table 3-15 provides the parameters of linear MSP supported by CES boards.
System

3-23

Table 3-15 Parameters of linear MSP supported by CES boards
Protecti
on Type
Revertive
Mode
Switchi
ng
Protocol
Switching
Duration
WTR
Time
Switching
Condition (Any
of the Conditions
Triggers the
Switching)
1+1
single-en
ded
switching
Non-reverti
ve
Not
required
50 ms -
1+1
single-en
ded
switching
Revertive Not
required
50 ms 600s
1+1
dual-end
ed
switching
Non-reverti
ve
APS
protocol
50 ms -
1+1
dual-end
ed
switching
Revertive APS
protocol
50 ms 600s
1:N
dual-end
ed
switching
(N14)
Revertive APS
protocol
50 ms 600s

R_LOS

R_LOF

MS_AIS

B2_EXC

B2_SD (optional)

Forced switching

Manual switching

Exercise
switching

3.1.5.5 LPT
LPT can detect the faults that occur at the service access node or on the intermediate
transmission network, and then can instruct the equipment at both ends of the transmission
network to start the backup network immediately for communication. In this manner, LPT
ensures normal transmission of the important data.
In actual engineering application, data of users is accessed to the service network through the
access equipment so that the users can exchange their data.
Based on the networking mode, LPT can be classified into point-to-point LPT and
point-to-multipoint LPT.
For details on the LPT feature, see the Feature Description.
Point-to-Point LPT
Figure 3-11 shows the engineering application of point-to-point LPT. When the access link 1
becomes faulty, LPT helps to notify the opposite equipment RS-B of the fault information. In
this process, the link state is passed through. After disconnecting the link between NE2 and
RS-B, RS-B starts the backup network and sets up a new connection with RS-A.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 3-11 Point-to-point LPT
NE1
NE2
RS- A
Backup
Network
Access
Node Li nk 1
Servi ce
Network
Access
Node Li nk 2
RS- B

Table 3-16 provides the parameters of point-to-point LPT.
Table 3-16 Parameters of point-to-point LPT
Switching
Performance
Instance Switching Condition Switching Mode
3s 16 LinkDown
ETH_LOS
None
500 ms 16 Network side:

dServer

dLOCV

dTTSI_Mismatch

dTTSI_Mismerge

dExcess
User side:

ETH_LOS

LINK_DOWN
None

Point-to-Multipoint LPT
Figure 3-12 shows the engineering application of point-to-multipoint LPT. On the user side,
when the link between RS-A and NE1 becomes faulty, LPT helps to notify the opposite
equipment (NE2, NE3, and NE4) of the fault information. In this process, the link state is
passed through. After disconnecting the links between NE2, NE3, NE4, and RS-B, RS-B
starts the backup network and sets up a new connection with RS-A.
On the network side, two modes are available for NE1: strict mode and non-strict mode.
When LPT is set to the strict mode, the services on the working network are switched to the
System

3-25

backup network if the links between NE1 and NE2, NE1 and NE3, NE1 and NE4 are all
faulty. When LPT is set to the non-strict mode, the services on the working network are
switched to the backup network if the links between NE1 and NE2, or NE1 and NE3, or NE1
and NE4 is faulty, and the services on the working network are switched to the backup
network immediately.
Figure 3-12 Point-to-multipoint LPT
NE1
NE3
RS - A
Backup
network
Access link 1
Service
network
Access link 2
RS - B
NE2
NE4

Table 3-17 provides the parameters of point-to-multipoint LPT.
Table 3-17 Parameters of point-to-multipoint LPT
Switching
Performance
Instance Switching
Condition
Switching Mode
3s 16 LinkDown
ETH_LOS
Strict mode
Non-strict mode
500 ms 16 Network side:

dServer

dLOCV

dTTSI_Mismatch

dTTSI_Mismerge

dExcess
User side:

ETH_LOS

LINK_DOWN
Strict mode
Non-strict mode

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

3.1.5.6 Ethernet Spanning Tree Protection
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), which is
compatible with the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
Through the MSTP, a ring network can be pruned and changed to a tree network that does not
contain a loop, hence preventing the packets on a ring network from being increased and
preventing broadcast storm from being caused by endless circling.
The MSTP adopts the concepts of region and instance. The MSTP divides a switching
network into different regions as required. Multiple independent spanning trees are generated
in each region. Each spanning tree is referred to as a multiple spanning tree instance (MSTI),
and each region is referred to as an MST region. The MSTP determines the mapping relations
between VLANs and MSTIs by setting a VLAN mapping table (that is, a VLAN and MSTI
mapping relation table). Each instance is mapped to one VLAN or a group of VLANs.

Instance: Equipment that runs the MSTP may have multiple spanning trees at the same time. Each
spanning tree is referred to as a multiple spanning tree instance. In this way, these spanning trees can
be distinguished.
Region: A collection of a group of switching equipment that are of the same domain name,
modification level, and mapping VLAN.
Bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) that carry region and instance information are transmitted
among equipment. According to the BPDU information, the equipment determines whether it
belongs to a specific region. The RSTP based on multiple instances is used within a region,
and the common MSTP is used among different regions.
Figure 3-13 shows a switching network that has multiple VLANs.
Figure 3-13 Switching network with multiple VLANs
ROOT
ROOT
ROOT
10, 20, 30
10, 30 10, 30
20
10
30
10, 20
20, 30
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
VLAN 10
VLAN 20
VLAN 30

System

3-27

All the ports on the equipment in the right-lower corner may be in the discarding state due to
the VLAN irrelevancy of the RSTP. In addition, the communication is interrupted on the
terminals that are directly connected to the equipment.
After the MSTP starts running, each VLAN has an independent MST. See Figure 3-14
Figure 3-14 Network topology after the MSTP starts running
VLAN 10 VLAN 20
ROOT
ROOT
VLAN 30
ROOT NE1
NE2
NE3 NE4
NE5
NE1
NE2
NE3 NE4
NE5
NE1
NE2
NE3 NE4
NE5
VLAN 10
VLAN 20
VLAN 30

As each instance is mapped to one VLAN or a group of VLANs, the MSTP can forward data
based on VLAN packets and thus realizes the load balancing for VLAN data. In this case, a
perfect integration of the RSTP and VLAN is achieved.
For details, see Feature Description.
3.2 Basic Functions on TDM Mode
The equipment has many functions.
3.2.1 Capacity
The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity.
3.2.2 Service
The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and many other services.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

In TDM mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports only the traditional clock synchronization
technology.
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides several equipment level protection schemes.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several network level protection schemes.
3.2.1 Capacity
The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity.
3.2.1.1 TDM Cross-Connect Capacity
Different cross-connect boards have different cross-connect capacities.
3.2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity On The TDM Mode
When the cross-connect board is N1PSXCS or N2PSXCSA, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports
the slots blew.
3.2.1.1 TDM Cross-Connect Capacity
Different cross-connect boards have different cross-connect capacities.
The OptiX OSN 3500 uses the following cross-connect boards:

N1PSXCS, which is a dual-mode cross-connect and synchronous timing board

N2PSXCSA, which is a dual-mode cross-connect and synchronous timing board
Table 3-18 provides the cross-connect capacities of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 3-18 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500
Board Higher Order
Cross-Connec
t Capacity
Lower Order
Cross-Connect
Capacity
Access Capacity
of a Single
Subrack
Remarks
N1PSXCS 200 Gbit/s
(1280x1280
VC-4)
20 Gbit/s (128x128
VC-4s, which are
equivalent to
384x384 VC-3s or
8064x8064
VC-12s)
155 Gbit/s
(992x992 VC-4)
-
N2PSXCS
A
200 Gbit/s
(1280x1280
VC-4)
20 Gbit/s (128x128
VC-4s, which are
equivalent to
384x384 VC-3s or
8064x8064
VC-12s)
155 Gbit/s
(992x992 VC-4)
-

System

3-29

If a label that contains "Enhanced Subrack" is affixed to the equipment, it indicates that the subrack uses
the new backplane.
3.2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity On The TDM Mode
When the cross-connect board is N1PSXCS or N2PSXCSA, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports
the slots blew.
When the cross-connect board is N1PSXCS, as shown in Figure 3-15. When the
cross-connect board is N2PSXCSA, as shown in Figure 3-16.
Figure 3-15 Access capacity of each slot when the N1PSXCS board is used
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
2
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
Cable routing
FAN
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
FAN FAN
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
3
S
L
O
T
4
S
L
O
T
5
S
L
O
T
6
S
L
O
T
7
S
L
O
T
8
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S
L
O
T
1
3
S
L
O
T
1
4
S
L
O
T
1
5
S
L
O
T
1
6
S
L
O
T
1
S
L
O
T
1
7
S
L
O
T
1
8
N
1
P
S
X
C
S
2
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
G
S
C
C
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
2
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
2
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
N
1
P
S
X
C
S
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
o
r

G
S
C
C
5
G
b
i
t
/
s

Figure 3-16 Access capacity of slots when the N2PSXCSA is used
Cable routing
FAN FAN FAN
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
3
S
L
O
T
4
S
L
O
T
5
S
L
O
T
6
S
L
O
T
7
S
L
O
T
8
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S
L
O
T
1
3
S
L
O
T
1
4
S
L
O
T
1
5
S
L
O
T
1
6
S
L
O
T
1
S
L
O
T
1
7
S
L
O
T
1
8
N
2
P
S
X
C
S
A
G
S
C
C

o
r

5
G
b
i
t
/
s
G
S
C
C
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
2
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
2
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
2
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
2
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
1
0
G
b
i
t
/
s
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
5
G
b
i
t
/
s
N
2
P
S
X
C
S
A

3.2.2 Service
The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and many other services.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

The OptiX OSN 3500 can process following types of services: SDH, PDH, Ethernet, RPR,
ATM, DDN, and SAN services.
Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces, PDH service interfaces and many other
service interfaces.
The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can access varies according to the type and
The OptiX OSN 3500 can process following types of services: SDH, PDH, Ethernet, RPR,
ATM, DDN, and SAN services.
For details about supported service types, refer to Table 3-19.
Table 3-19 Service type supported by the OptiX OSN 3500
Service Type Description
SDH services

Standard SDH services: STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64

Standard SDH concatenated services:
VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c/VC-4-64c

Standard SDH virtual concatenation services: VC-4-Xv (X8),
VC-3-Xv (X24)

SDH services with FEC: 10.709 Gbit/s, 2.666 Gbit/s
PDH services

E1/T1 service

E3/T3 service

E4 service
NOTE
With the E13/M13 function, the equipment can perform multiplexing and
demultiplexing between E1/T1 signals and E3/T3 signals.
Ethernet services

Ethernet private line (EPL) service

Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service

Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service

Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service
RPR services

EVPL service

EVPLAN service
ATM services

Constant bit rate (CBR) service

Real-time variable bite rate (rt-VBR) service

Non real-time variable bite rate (nrt-VBR) service

Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service
DDN services

N x 64 kbit/s (N=1-31) service

Framed E1 service
System

3-31

Service Type Description
SAN services

Fiber channel (FC) service

Fiber connection (FICON) service

Enterprise systems connection (ESCON) service

Digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface (DVB-ASI)
service

Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces, PDH service interfaces and many other
service interfaces.
Table 3-20 lists the service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 3-20 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500
Interface Description
SDH service interface STM-1 electrical interfaces: SMB
connectors
STM-1 optical interfaces: I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1,
L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
STM-4 optical interfaces: I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1,
L-4.2, Ve-4.2
STM-16 optical interfaces: I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je,
U-16.2Je
STM-16 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-16.2c,
Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f
STM-64 optical interfaces: I-64.1, I-64.2,
S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b
STM-64 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-64.2c,
Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e
STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces that
comply with ITU-T G.692 can output fixed
wavelength from 191.1 THz to 196.0 THz,
and can be directly interconnected with the
WDM equipment.
PDH service interface 75/120-ohm E1 electrical interfaces: DB44
connectors
100-ohm T1 electrical interfaces: DB44
connectors
75-ohm E3, T3 and E4 electrical interfaces:
SMB connectors
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Interface Description
Ethernet service interface 10/100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX,
1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX,
1000BASE-ZX, 10GBASE-LW,
10GBASE-LR
DDN service interface RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24,
X.21 and Framed E1 interface
ATM service interface STM-1 optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1,
L-1.2, Ve-1.2
STM-4 optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1,
L-4.2, Ve-4.2
E3 interfaces: E3 services are accessed by
the N1PD3, N1PL3, or N1PL3A board.
IMA E1 interfaces: IMA E1 services are
accessed by the N1PQ1, N1PQM, or
N2PQ1 board.
Storage area network (SAN) service
interface
FC100, FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI
service optical interfaces

Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je, Ve-1.2, and Ve-4.2 are
optical technical specifications defined by Huawei.
The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can access varies according to the type and
Table 3-21lists the maximum capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 for accessing different services.
The maximum capacity refers to the maximum number of services that is supported, when
only one specific type of service is accessed.
Table 3-21 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 on the TDM mode
Supported by a Single Subrack
STM-64 standard or concatenated services 8
STM-64 (FEC) services 4
STM-16 (FEC) services 8
STM-1 standard services 204
STM-1 (electrical) services 132
System

3-33

Supported by a Single Subrack
E4 services 32
E3/T3 services 117
E1 services 504
T1 services 504
FE services 180
GE services 56
10GE services 16
STM-4 ATM services 15
STM-1 ATM services 60
N x 64 kbit/s services (N: 1-31) 64
Framed E1 services 64
ESCON services 44
FICON/FC100 services 22
FC200 services 8
DVB-ASI services 44

In TDM mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports only the traditional clock synchronization
technology.

SSM clock protocol

Tributary retiming

Two 75-ohm/120-ohm external clock output and input

External clock output shutdown

Line clock source

Tributary clock source

Three working modes are as follows:
Tracing mode
Holdover mode
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Free-run mode
For details on the traditional clock synchronization, see Feature Description.
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides several equipment level protection schemes.
Table 3-22 shows the equipment level protection provided by the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 3-22 Equipment level protection
Object Protected Protection Scheme
PDH TPS
DDN TPS
Ethernet processing unit (on the TDM
mode)
TPS, PPS, BPS, DLAG, and LAG
Ethernet processing unit (on the packet
mode)
LAG
ATM 1+1 hot backup
Cross-connect and timing unit 1+1 hot backup
SCC unit 1+1 hot backup
Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion
unite
Intra-board protection (dual-fed and
selective receiving) and inter-board
protection (1+1 hot backup)
Protection for the Microwave unit 1+1 HSB/FD/SD and N+1 hot backup
Power interface unit 1+1 hot backup, 1:N centralized backup
Intelligent Fans unit The power supply modules are of mutual
backup for the three fan modules.
Under Abnormal Conditions Power-down protection during software
loading, overvoltage or undervoltage
protection for power supply and board
temperature detection
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports coexistence of three TPS protection groups of different types.

3.2.4.1 TPS Protection
The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types.
3.2.4.2 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards
On the TDM mode, the 1+1 protection schemes supported by Ethernet boards include BPS,
PPS, LAG and DLAG. On the packet mode, the 1+1 protection scheme supported by Ethernet
boards is LAG.
System

3-35

3.2.4.3 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards
The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support board-level 1+1 protection.
3.2.4.4 Protection for the Microwave Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the microwave boards that support the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection and the N+1 (N3) protection.
3.2.4.5 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit
The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.
safe manner.
equipment.
3.2.4.1 TPS Protection
The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types.
Table 3-23 lists the supported TPS protection schemes and boards. Table 3-24 lists the TPS
protection parameters.
Table 3-23 TPS protection schemes and supported boards
Service
Type
Protection Scheme Supported Boards Revertive Mode
E1/T1 One 1:N protection(N
8)
N1PQM, N1PQ1,
N2PQ1
a

E3/T3/E4/ST
M-1
Two 1:N (N 3)
protections
N1PD3, N1PL3,
N2PQ3, N2PD3,
N2PL3, N1SPQ4,
N2SPQ4, N1SEP1
Revertive
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Service
Type
Protection Scheme Supported Boards Revertive Mode
Ethernet Two 1:1 protections N2EFS0, N4EFS0,
N5EFS0, N1EFS0A
DDN One 1:N protection (N
8)
N1DX1
a: The N1PQ1 and N2PQ1 boards do not support T1 services.

Table 3-24 TPS protection parameters
Priority 1-X: X is equal to the number of working boards. Priority 1 is the
highest priority.
Switching type Forced switching, manual switching, lockout of switching and
automatic switching.

The clock of the working board is lost.




Switching time 50 ms
Revertive mode Revertive
WTR time 300s to 720s. The WTR time of 600s is recommended.

3.2.4.2 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards
On the TDM mode, the 1+1 protection schemes supported by Ethernet boards include BPS,
PPS, LAG and DLAG. On the packet mode, the 1+1 protection scheme supported by Ethernet
boards is LAG.
BPS/PPS
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and N4EGS4 boards support the 1+1 BPS and PPS
protection.
Table 3-25 lists the 1+1 protection parameters.
System

3-37

Table 3-25 1+1 protection parameters of Ethernet boards
Parameter BPS, PPS
protection boards
The bandwidth of the protection board is not less than the
bandwidth of the working board.

The port status of the working board is Link Down.

The clock of the working board is lost.

The hardware of the working board is faulty.

The working board is off-line.

Revertive mode Non-revertive mode

When a protection group needs to perform the BPS or PPS protection switching, the following
conditions must be met.

The equipment interconnected with the protection group must have the same working
mode as the protection group.

The transmit end and the receive end should be connected directly through optical fibers
or network cables. No intermediate equipment should be present between the two ends.

The working mode should not be modified. Otherwise, the protection group becomes
abnormal.

The equipment cannot detect the modification of the working mode at the receive end of the
protection group.
LAG/DLAG
On the TDM mode, the N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4, and N4EGS4 boards support the LAG
and DLAG protection scheme. The N2EGS4A board supports the 1+1 BPS, LAG and DLAG
protection schemes. The N1EAS2 board supports the LAG and DLAG protection scheme.
Table 3-26 lists the related parameters for the LAG and DLAG protection.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 3-26 Parameters for 1+1 LAG and DLAG protection of Ethernet boards (on the TDM
mode)
Parameter LAG DLAG
Switching
condition
Any of the following conditions
triggers the switching:

The links of the interconnected
equipment are directly
connected to each other
through static LAG or manual
LAG, no intermediate
equipment exists, and the fiber
is cut in both directions.
Switching time 500 ms.

through static LAG or manual
LAG, no intermediate
equipment exists, and the fiber
is cut in one direction. In
addition, the ports of the
interconnected equipment are
set to the auto-negotiation
mode. Switching time 500
ms.

through static LAG, no
intermediate equipment exists,
and the fiber is cut in both
directions. Switching time
3.5 s.
Any of the following conditions
triggers the switching:

equipment are directly connected
to each other through static LAG,
no intermediate equipment exists,
directions. Switching time 500
ms.

and the fiber is cut in one
direction. In addition, the ports of
the interconnected equipment are
set to the auto-negotiation mode.
Switching time 500 ms.

directions. Switching time 3.5
s.

The clock of the working board is
lost.

The hardware of the working
board is faulty.

The working board is off-line.
Revertive mode

Revertive (default)

Non-revertive
Non-revertive
LAG Type

Static

Manual
Static
Load sharing
mode

Load sharing

Load non-sharing
Load non-sharing

On the packet mode, the N1PEG16 and N1PEX1 boards support the LAG protection.
Table 3-27 lists the related parameters of the LAG protection.
System

3-39

Table 3-27 Parameters for 1+1 LAG protection of Ethernet boards (on the packet mode)
Parameter LAG
Switching condition (Any of
the conditions triggers the
switching.)

connected to each other through static LAG or manual
LAG, no intermediate equipment exists, and the fiber is
cut in both directions. Switching time 500 ms.

cut in one direction. In addition, the ports of the
mode. Switching time 500 ms.

connected to each other through static LAG, no
both directions. Switching time 3.5 s.
Revertive mode

Revertive (default)

Non-revertive
LAG Type

Static

Manual
Load sharing mode

Load sharing

Load non-sharing
NOTE
In the case of a manually aggregated LAG and the full-duplex configured for the ports, a fiber cut in one
direction cannot ensure successful switching. In the other cases, the switching can be performed
successfully within a period of three to six seconds.
with the IEEE 802.3ad standard. The ports include FE and GE ports.

On the TDM mode, LAG can realize only intra-board link aggregation, and inter-board link aggregation
requires DLAG. On the packet mode, LAG can realize intra-board link aggregation and inter-board link
aggregation.
3.2.4.3 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards
The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support board-level 1+1 protection.
The N1IDQ1 and N1IDL4 boards support the DPS. When the DPS needs to be configured.
Table 3-28 lists the 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards.
Table 3-28 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards
protection boards
Configured as required.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)


A manual switching command is issued.



The power supply of the working board fails.

The clock of the working board fails.


3.2.4.4 Protection for the Microwave Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the microwave boards that support the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection and the N+1 (N3) protection.
Table 3-29 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection for the microwave boards
Switching condition (the switching
occurs if one condition is met)
The hardware of the IF board or the IF unit is faulty.
The hardware of the ODU is faulty.
POWER_FAIL
VOLT_LOS (IF board)
RADIO_TSL_HIGH
RADIO_TSL_LOW
RADIO_RSL_HIGH
IF_INPWR_ABN
CONFIG_NOSUPPORT
R_LOC
R_LOF
R_LOS
MW_LOF
MW_RDI
The board is offline.
WTR time 300-720 seconds (generally, set it to 600 seconds)

System

3-41

Table 3-30 N+1 protection for the microwave boards
Switching condition (the switching
occurs if one condition is met)
R_LOS
R_LOF
R_LOC
MS_AIS
B2_EXC
B2_SD(Optional condition)
MW_LOF
The board is offline.
WTR time 300-720 seconds (generally, set it to 600 seconds)

3.2.4.5 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit
The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.
In the OptiX OSN 3500, the arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit N1LWX has two
types: One is single fed and single receiving, and the other is dual fed and selective receiving.
A dual fed and selective receiving N1LWX board supports intra-board protection, and one
board of this type can realize optical channel protection. The single fed and single receiving
LWX boards support inter-board protection, that is, 1+1 inter-board hot backup protection.
Table 3-31 lists the 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of the N1LWX board.
Table 3-31 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX
protection boards
Configurable as required.



safe manner.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

For the OptiX OSN 3500, the cross-connect and timing units are integrated in the
cross-connect and timing board. The cross-connect and timing board adopts a 1+1 hot backup
mechanism so that the cross-connect and timing units are protected. Table 3-32 lists the 1+1
hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units.
Table 3-32 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units
protection boards
Slot 9 and slot 10



The board is warm reset and the switching protocol is triggered.


After successful switching, the original protection board becomes
the working board. After the original working board is recovered,
the current working board continues to be the original protection
board.

For the OptiX OSN 3500, the GSCC board provides the system control and communication
(SCC) functions.
The active and standby GSCC boards form a 1+1 hot backup mechanism. When the active
GSCC is working, the standby GSCC is in the protection state.
Table 3-33 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit.
Table 3-33 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit
protection boards
Sot 18 and slot 17


The working board is under a hot reset.



System

3-43

Revertive mode Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original protection
board becomes the working board, and the original working board
becomes the protection board.

The OptiX OSN 3500 can access two -48 V DC power supplies by using two N1PIU,
N1PIUA, N1PIUB boards. These two power supplies provide a mutual backup for each other.
When either of them fails, the other power supply provides a backup to ensure normal
operation of the equipment.
If the voltage of the two external power supplies of the equipment is the same, the two PIU
boards of mutual backup separately share half of the current.
If the voltage offset value of the two external power supplies of the equipment is more than
0.7 V, all the current pass the PIU board of the external power supply that has high voltage,
and no current pass the PIU board of the external power supply that has low voltage. When
only one PIU board is working, the power supply of the subrack is not affected.

If different boards are configured, the total power consumption and current of the equipment are
different, and the current value of the PIU boards is also different. The current values of the PIU boards
are computed according to the actual configuration.
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides reliable power backup for the +3.3 V power supply of other
boards, including the SCC and service boards by using the power backup unit on the N1AUX
board. When the power supply of a board fails, the backup power supply immediately
provides backup to ensure the normal operation of the board.
equipment.
The OptiX OSN 3500 uses three intelligent fan modules to realize heat dissipation. The power
supplies of the three fan modules are of mutual backup.
The intelligent fans provide the functions of intelligent speed regulation and failure detection.
When one fan module becomes faulty, the other fan modules operate at the full speed. The
running status of the fans is indicated by the corresponding indicators on the front panel of the
fan module.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Power-Down Protection During Software Loading
The verification function is provided for applications and data. After software loading is
interrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any applications or data that
are not successfully or completely loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the loading to be
resumed, until the software is successfully and completely loaded.
Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power Supply
The power board provides a lightning protection component to effectively avoid the damage
that may be caused by transient high voltages such as lightning.
When a board is in undervoltage, the board automatically resets its CPU so that the software
can re-initialize the chip.
When a board is in undervoltage, the power system also automatically turns off the power
supply on the main loop so that the system is protected.
Board Temperature Detection
Temperature detection circuits are built in boards (for example, the cross-connect and timing
board) that generates a large amount of heat. When the board detects a high temperature, an
alarm is generated to prompt the maintenance personnel about cleaning the fans.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several network level protection schemes.
Table 3-34 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 3-34 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500
Network Level Protection Protection Scheme
Linear MSP
MSP ring
Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), subnetwork
connection multi-protection (SNCMP) and subnetwork
connection tunnel protection (SNCTP)
Dual-node interconnection (DNI) protection
Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
SDH protection
Optical-path-shared MSP
Ethernet protection Resilient packet ring (RPR) protection
ATM protection VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection

3.2.5.1 Linear MSP
The linear MSP supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dual-ended
switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP.
System

3-45

3.2.5.2 MSP Ring
The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring.
3.2.5.3 SNCP
The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
3.2.5.4 DNI
The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of inter-ring
services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings, which are networked
by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different protection schemes. The DNI
provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node failure.
3.2.5.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection
When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or even
STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels.
These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. In the case
of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as the MSP, SNCP and
non-protection can be set accordingly.
3.2.5.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP
In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multiple
MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface.
3.2.5.7 RPR Protection
The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering.
3.2.5.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection
The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.
3.2.5.1 Linear MSP
The linear MSP supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dual-ended
switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP.
The linear MSP is mainly used in a chain network. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides 1+1 and
1:N (N14) protection schemes, and supports a maximum of 40 linear MSPs. In the 1:N
protection scheme, extra services are supported to be transmitted on the protection system.
The switching time of linear MSP is less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841.
3.2.5.2 MSP Ring
The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hybrid application of two-fiber and four-fiber MSP rings,
with the switching time less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841.
Table 3-35 lists the maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 3-35 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500
Protection Scheme Maximum Number of MSP Rings
Supported
STM-64 four-fiber MSP ring 2
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Protection Scheme Maximum Number of MSP Rings
Supported
STM-64 two-fiber MSP ring 4
STM-16 four-fiber MSP ring 11
STM-16 two-fiber MSP ring 12

The MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 has the following features.
Adjustable MS Bandwidth
The MS bandwidth refers to the number of VC-4s used by an MSP ring or chain.
In the case of the MSP, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports the bandwidth adjustment by VC-4
without interrupting services. For an STM-16 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth
ranges from one VC-4 to eight VC-4s. For an STM-64 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS
bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to 32 VC-4s.
Upgradeable MS Bandwidth
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports in-service upgrade of the MS bandwidth without interrupting
services. For example, an STM-4 MSP ring can be upgraded to an STM-16 MSP ring without
interrupting services.
Two Sets of K Bytes at the Multiplex Section
For STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces, the OptiX OSN 3500 is able to process two sets
of K bytes at the multiplex section. In this case, two MSP rings can be set up in one optical
interface.
MS Squelching
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the squelching of misconnected services at the VC-4 level.
In an MSP ring, each protection timeslot is shared by different spans or occupied by extra
traffic. When there is no extra traffic in the ring, and a multipoint failure causes a node to be
isolated from the ring, traffics that occupy the same timeslot may try to preempt this timeslot.
As a result, the misconnection of services occurs. When extra traffic is transmitted in the
protection path, the traffic on the working path may preempt the protection timeslot that is
being used by extra traffic, even if only one point fails in the ring. As a result, the
misconnection also occurs.
To prevent service misconnection, each OptiX OSN 3500 node sets up a detailed list of
connections. Each node knows the source and the sink of any AU-4. With the automatic
protection switching (APS) commands, each node can detect in advance the possibility of
misconnection. By inserting the AU-AIS alarm, each node then discards these services that
may be misconnected.
System

3-47

The equipment supports the function of querying the MSP squelching. After the MS protocol module
triggers the MS squelching function and delivers the squelching status information to a line board, the
cross-connect board initiates a command to query the current MS squelching status of the handshake
detection board. Then, the cross-connect board compares the squelching status with the relevant
information stored on the cross-connect board. If the squelching status is inconsistent with each other,
the cross-connect board issues a command to correct the MS squelching status.
3.2.5.3 SNCP
The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP of the VC-12, VC-3, VC-4,
and AU-3 services.
SNCP
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the end-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an
SNCP-protected trail. See Figure 3-17.
Figure 3-17 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail
NE1
NE4
NE3
NE2
NE5
NE8
NE7
NE6
The unprotected trail
NE1
NE4
NE3
NE2
NE5
NE8
NE7
NE6
The working trail
Convert to an SNCP-protected trail Convert to an unprotected trail
The protction trail

The SNCP function of the OptiX OSN 3500 is compliant with ITU-T G.841 and G.842.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports a maximum of 1184 SNCP protection pairs.
In the trail management window of the NMS, you can convert an exiting unprotected trail to
an SNCP-protected trail. In the opposite way, you can also convert an SNCP-protected trail to
an unprotected trail. In addition, the following trail-level operations are supported:

Manual switching to protection path

Manual switching to working path
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Forced switching to protection path

Forced switching to working path

Wait-to-restore (WTR) time setting

Revertive mode setting
SNCMP
The SNCMP is an N+1 (which means multiple protection paths protect a working path)
protection scheme. The SNCMP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCP is a 1+1
protection scheme.
The SNCMP of the OptiX OSN 3500 supports a maximum of 3+1 multichannel SNCP
schemes. In addition, it supports a maximum of 592 SNCMP protection groups.
The SNCMP provides multiple protection paths for a service. In this case, the service
protection is implemented by a mechanism of multiple fed at the source and selective
receiving at the sink. The SNCMP is supplementary to the SNCP.
Figure 3-18 illustrates the principle of multipath protection. The source broadcasts services to
multiple paths, and the sink determines which service to receive according to the service
priority and then the service quality. When services are correctly received on both the working
and protection paths, the sink selects the service from the working path.
Figure 3-18 Principle of multipath protection
Source Sink
Working
Protection 1
Protection 2
Protection 3
Intermediate
subnetworks
A B

In the SNCMP networking shown in Figure 3-19, two protection paths protect a working path,
and Protection 2 is a protection path that uses microwave as the transmission media. Under
normal conditions, NE3 receives the service from the working path.
System

3-49

Figure 3-19 SNCMP networking
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
NE 4
Working
Protection 1
Protection 2
Microware
Radio
Microware
Radio

When the transmission between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, as shown in Figure 3-20, NE3
receives the service from the higher priority protection path Protection 1.
Figure 3-20 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
NE 4
Working
Protection 1
Protection 2
Microware
Radio
Microware
Radio

When the transmissions between NE1 and NE2, and between NE1 and NE4, both become
faulty, as shown in Figure 3-21, NE3 receives the service from the second protection path
Protection 2.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 3-21 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
NE 4
Working
Protection 1
Protection 2
Microware
Radio
Microware
Radio

SNCTP
The SNCTP provides protection paths at the VC-4 level. When the working path is faulty, all
its services can be switched to the protection path.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports a maximum of 512 SNCTP groups.
The SNCTP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCTP checks the status of only the entire
VC-4 path, and such a check is irrelevant to the levels of services in the path. When the
working path is faulty, relevant higher order alarms are raised, and then all services in the
working path are switched to the protection path. If the fault is relevant only to lower order
services, lower order alarms are raised, and the switching does not occur.
3.2.5.4 DNI
The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of inter-ring
services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings, which are networked
by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different protection schemes. The DNI
provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node failure.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the DNI protection, which is compliant with the ITU-T G.842.
The DNI provides protection for services between the following rings:

Two SNCP rings

An SNCP ring and an MSP ring

Two MSP rings
Figure 3-22 illustrates a DNI protection of two SNCP rings.
System

3-51

Figure 3-22 DNI protection of two SNCP rings
SNCP Ring
1
SNCP Ring
2
NE E
NE D NE C
NE F
NE G
NE A
Selecting Point
Forward Working Routing
Reverse Working Routing

When any of the following faults occurs, the inter-ring services can be protected.

A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 1.

A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 2.

A fiber cut occurs on the two SNCP rings.

NE C (primary node) or NE D (secondary node) is faulty.

NE E (primary node) or NE F (secondary node) is faulty.

NE C and NE E are faulty.

NE D and NE F are faulty.
The primary node and the secondary node protect each other. When one node is faulty,
inter-ring services are not affected.
3.2.5.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection
When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or even
STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels.
These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. In the case
of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as the MSP, SNCP and
non-protection can be set accordingly.
Figure 3-23 shows the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 3-23 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
STM-16
SNCP
STM-16
MSP
STM-64
S
T
M
-
6
4

3.2.5.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP
In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multiple
MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface.
A prerequisite for this function is that the optical interface board must be able to process
multiple sets of independent K bytes. The N1SL64, N1SLD64, N2SL64, N1SLO16, N1SL16,
N2SL16, N3SL16, and N1SF16 boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support the configuration of
shared optical paths. An STM-64 or STM-16 optical interface supports a maximum of two
sets of K bytes. Up to two MSP rings can be created for an optical interface if the SL64 board
supports STM-64 optical interfaces. The two sets of K bytes are separately located in the first
and seventeenth VC-4s. Up to two MSP rings can be created for an optical interface if the
SF16 and SL16 boards support STM-16 optical interfaces. The two sets of K bytes are
separately located in the first and fifth VC-4s.
Figure 3-24 shows the networking of two-fiber optical-path-shared MSP supported by the
OptiX OSN 3500.
Figure 3-24 Optical-path-shared MSP
STM-4/16
Optical-path-
shared MSP ring
STM-16/64
STM-4/16
STM-4/16
STM-4/16 STM-4/16
STM-4/16
Optical-path-
shared MSP ring

System

3-53

For example, two lower-rate west line units share one higher-rate east line unit, as shown in
Figure 3-25.
Figure 3-25 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines
STM-16
STM-16
STM-64
MSP ring 1
MSP ring 2

The OptiX OSN 3500 also supports the line units at the same rate to form a shared protection
group in both directions, as shown in Figure 3-26. In this case, the west STM-16 line units can
only add part of their VC-4s into the MSP ring protection group.
Figure 3-26 One line shared by two lines at the same rate
STM-16
STM-16
STM-16
MSP ring 1
MSP ring 2

3.2.5.7 RPR Protection
The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering.
Figure 3-27 shows a bidirectional RPR that is of a reverse dual-ring structure. The outer ring
and the inner ring both transmit data packets and control packets. The control packets on the
inner ring carry the control information on the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer
ring carry the control information on the inner ring.
The RPR has the following advantage: On the RPR, every node assumes that the packets
added to the ring will finally reach their destination, regardless of which path is used. A node
can only perform three types of operations on the packets, that is, insertion (adding a new
packet onto the ring), forwarding (forwarding the packet), and stripping (dropping the packet
locally). Compared with a mesh network, an Ethernet ring considerably decreases the
communication traffic among nodes. This is because a mesh network determines the
forwarding port on the basis of every single packet.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 3-27 Example of bidirectional RPR
Node 1
Outer ring
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
Inner ring
RPR

In the case of a fiber cut, the RPR provides the wrapping and steering functions for packets.
The wrapping function connects the inner ring and the outer ring at the two nodes that are
adjacent to the fiber cut point. See Figure 3-28.
Figure 3-28 RPR wrapping protection
Node 1
Outer ring
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
Inner ring
RPR
Wapping

The steering function reversely transmits packets from the transmit node in the case of a fiber
cut. See Figure 3-29.
System

3-55

Figure 3-29 RPR steering protection
Outer ring
Inner ring
Node 1
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
RPR
Steering

In both protection schemes, the packets can reach their destination in a reverse direction, and
the service failure time is less than 50 ms. During the protection switching, the wrapping
function is usually performed first. After the new topology and the new service trail are
created, the steering function is then performed. Such a mechanism ensures that packets are
not lost during the protection switching, and that the protection switching time is decreased.
3.2.5.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection
The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.
Figure 3-30 shows the principle of VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection at the ATM layer. The
VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection scheme reserves the protection resources, and can be applied on
any physical topology. The reserved protection resources include routes and bandwidths.
Figure 3-30 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Working path
ATM
service
Protection path
ATM
service

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides protection for virtual paths (VPs) and virtual channels (VCs),
and protects ATM services through a dual fed and selective receiving mechanism. Two
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

connections (VP/VC), which represent the working path and the protection path, are set up at
the source node NE1 and the sink node NE3. In normal conditions, the receive end selects the
service from the working path. When the primary ring becomes faulty, the receive end detects
the failure and triggers the protection. In this way, the receive end selects the service from the
protection path, and thus the ATM service is protected.
3.3 Packet Features
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides certain boards that have packet features. The TDM mode can
be overlapped with the packet mode to transmit data on the two planes. Hence, the equipment
can realize the smooth evolution from the multiservice transport platform (MSTP) network to
the packet transmission network (PTN) network.
3.3.1 MPLS Overview
The OptiX OSN 3500 adopts the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) technology to
transmit Ethernet services on the packet mode. This topic describes the MPLS concepts and
the applications of the OptiX OSN 3500.
3.3.2 Service Description
The OptiX OSN 3500 in packet mode supports Ethernet services and CES services.
3.3.3 Introduction to Features
This topic describes the features and applications of the OptiX OSN 3500 in packet mode.
3.3.4 Protection
In packet mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple protection schemes, such as multiple
spanning tree protocol (MSTP), link aggregation, MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection, MPLS tunnel
1:1 protection, packet LPT, PW APS, MC-LAG, and DNI APS.
3.3.5 Board Functions
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the data boards listed later to meet the requirements of packet
features when the equipment uses the cross-connect boards that support the packet switching
function.
3.3.1 MPLS Overview
The OptiX OSN 3500 adopts the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) technology to
transmit Ethernet services on the packet mode. This topic describes the MPLS concepts and
the applications of the OptiX OSN 3500.
3.3.1.1 Background
The multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) was originally used to increase the forwarding
speed of a router. Currently, the MPLS are evolving to the backbone routing and the VPN
solution.
3.3.1.2 Basic MPLS Concepts
Several basic MPLS concepts facilitate the understanding of the MPLS technology. These
basic MPLS concepts include forwarding equivalence class (FEC), label switched path (LSP).
3.3.1.3 System Structure
The MPLS system manages packet services through the forwarding plane.
System

3-57

3.3.1.4 MPLS Capability of the Equipment
The OptiX OSN 3500 adopts the MPLS technology to greatly increase the packet forwarding
rate and provide seamless integration with the Ethernet Layer 2 network. In this manner, the
equipment provides better solutions for applications associated with the virtual private
network (VPN) and quality of service (QoS).
3.3.1.1 Background
The multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) was originally used to increase the forwarding
speed of a router. Currently, the MPLS are evolving to the backbone routing and the VPN
solution.
The MPLS is integrated with the Layer 3 routing function of the IP network and the highly
effective forwarding mechanism of the traditional Layer 2 network. Similar to the forwarding
scheme of the existing Layer 2 network, the forwarding plane is connection-oriented. Hence,
the MPLS can be seamlessly connected to Layer 2 networks such the ATM and Ethernet
networks. In addition, the MPLS provides better solutions for the virtual private network
(VPN) and quality of service (QoS). Hence, the MPLS becomes a criterion for expanding the
data network and increasing the network operability.
To better meet the requirements of the transport network for service quality, the
connectionless feature of the standard MPLS should be simplified, and the OAM and
protection capabilities should be enhanced. In compliance with the latest international
standards, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports a series of MPLS features for the transport network.
3.3.1.2 Basic MPLS Concepts
Several basic MPLS concepts facilitate the understanding of the MPLS technology. These
basic MPLS concepts include forwarding equivalence class (FEC), label switched path (LSP).
Forwarding Equivalence Class
As a classification forwarding technology, the MPLS considers the packets of the same
forwarding scheme as a class, which is called an FEC. In the MPLS network, the packets in
the same FEC are processed in the same way.
Label
A label is a short identifier of fixed length and is locally valid (only valid in the MPLS
domain). The label is used to identify the FEC that one packet belongs to. On certain
conditions, for example, when load sharing is required, several labels may correspond to one
FEC, but one label just indicates one FEC.
The packet headers carry labels and the labels do not contain any topology information.
Labels are locally valid. A label has four bytes, which are encapsulated in the way illustrated
in Figure 3-31.
Figure 3-31 Label encapsulation structure
Label Exp S TTL
0 19 22 23 31

A label has the following four sections.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Label: 20 bits. The label section indicates the label value and is used as the forwarding
pointer.

Exp: 3 bits. The Exp section is reserved for test and currently used for CoS.

S: 1 bit. The S section is an identifier at the bottom of a stack. The MPLS supports the
layered labels, or multiple labels. If S is 1, it indicates that the label is at the bottom.

TTL: 8 bits. The TTL section has the same indication as the time to live (TTL) of IP
packets.
As a connection identifier, the label is similar to the VPI/VCI for ATM. The labels are
encapsulated between the link layer and the network layer in an Ethernet frame. Figure 3-32
shows the encapsulation location of labels.
Figure 3-32 Encapsulation location of labels in Ethernet frames
Ethernet/PPP header Label Layer 3 data
Ethernet/SDH packet

LSP
In an MPLS network, the path involved in an FEC is called an LSP.
The LSP is a unidirectional path from the ingress to egress. Each node on an LSP is a label
switched router (LSR). According to the data transport direction, adjacent LSRs are upstream
LSR and downstream LSR.
The LSPs are classified into static LSPs and dynamic LSPs. The static LSPs are manually
configured by the administrator. The dynamic LSPs are created dynamically by the RSVP-TE
protocol.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports only the static LSP.
3.3.1.3 System Structure
The MPLS system manages packet services through the forwarding plane.
The forwarding plane is also called a data plane, which is connection-oriented and can use
Layer 2 networks such as Ethernet. The MPLS uses short labels of fixed length to encapsulate
packets. The forwarding plane then quickly forwards the encapsulated packets.
3.3.1.4 MPLS Capability of the Equipment
The OptiX OSN 3500 adopts the MPLS technology to greatly increase the packet forwarding
rate and provide seamless integration with the Ethernet Layer 2 network. In this manner, the
equipment provides better solutions for applications associated with the virtual private
network (VPN) and quality of service (QoS).
The MPLS features of the OptiX OSN 3500 are listed in Table 3-36, and the MPLS
performance specifications are listed in Table 3-37.
System

3-59

Table 3-36 MPLS features supported by the OptiX OSN 3500
Feature Description
Supports basic MPLS functions and MPLS forwarding services.
Adopts the LSP tunnel technology so that an MPLS network that accesses
multiple services can be provided.
Basic MPLS
functions
Supports the static tunnel.
Supports MPLS OAM, which complies with ITU-T Y.1711. MPLS OAM
Supports Ping and Traceroute commands for the MPLS tunnel, and uses
MPLS echo request and MPLS echo reply messages to check the
availability of the LSP.
MPLS
protection
Supports the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection schemes.
PW OAM Supports PW Traceroute and PW Ping.
PW APS Supports PW APS 1+1/1:1 protection.
Others Supports HQoS.

Table 3-37 MPLS performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500
Feature Description
Number of MPLS tunnels Supports 16K unidirectional/bidirectional MPLS
tunnels.
Number of PWs Supports 16K unidirectional/bidirectional PWs.

3.3.2 Service Description
The OptiX OSN 3500 in packet mode supports Ethernet services and CES services.
3.3.2.1 Service Models
The OptiX OSN equipment adopts different layered models on the UNI and NNI sides when
it is interconnected with different devices on the two sides.
3.3.2.2 Ethernet Services
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-point
packet Ethernet services, that is, E-Line services, E-LAN services, and E-Aggr services.
3.3.2.3 CES Services
The circuit emulation service (CES) helps to solve the problem of insufficient optical fiber
resources in the access ring and allows TDM services to be transparently transmitted across
the pure packet plane.
3.3.2.4 L3VPN Services
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports border gateway protocol (BGP)-based or MPLS-based layer3
virtual private network (L3VPN) services. The equipment provides a complete L3VPN
solution.
3.3.2.1 Service Models
The OptiX OSN equipment adopts different layered models on the UNI and NNI sides when
it is interconnected with different devices on the two sides.
The OptiX OSN equipment adopts the MPLS-based PWE3 model to process Ethernet
services and CES services.
The OptiX OSN equipment adopts the MPLS model to process L3VPN services.

The OptiX OSN equipment supports only static label allocation of PWE3.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports only static L3VPN networking.
Basic Concepts
The associated basic concepts are customer edge (CE), provider edge (PE), and provider (P),
as shown in Figure 3-33.
Figure 3-33 PWE3 networking diagram
CE
CE
PE
P P
PE
PE
CE
CE

CE: provides interfaces for direct connection to the service provider (SP) network. A CE
can be a router, an exchange, or a host. Generally, a CE need not support MPLS.

PE: refers to an edge device of the SP network, which is directly connected to a CE.

P: refers to a backbone router on the SP network, which is indirectly connected to a CE.
A P provides only the MPLS forwarding function.
MPLS-Based PWE3 Model
Figure 3-34 shows the MPLS-based PWE3 model adopted by the OptiX OSN equipment that
functions as a PE.
System

3-61

Figure 3-34 MPLS-based PWE3 model
E1/
cSTM-1
10GE GE FE
Ethernet TDM
Physical layer
Service
interface layer
Ethernet
switching
TDM
processing
Local service
processing layer
NNI UNI
TDM Ethernet
Forwarder
PWE3
PW label
Tunnel label
GE/
10GE
802.2
802.3
Ethernet
Emulation
service layer
PWE3
encapsulation layer
MPLS layer
Data link layer and
physical layer
Interconnected with CE
Transmitted to PSN

On the UNI side, a PE is interconnected with a CE and accesses services from users to the
PSN. The layers of the MPLS-based PWE3 model have the following functions on the UNI
side:

Physical layer
Provides the interfaces between the OptiX OSN equipment and transmission media (such
as electrical cables and optical fibers).
In the CE-PE direction, the physical layer processes the physical signals (optical or
electrical signals) from the CE, extracts information from the signals, and then sends
the information to the service interface layer.
In the PE-CE direction, the physical layer receives information from the service
interface layer, converts the information to signals that can be transmitted over the
transmission media, and then transmits the signals to the CE through physical
channels.

Service interface layer
In the CE->PE direction, the service interface layer receives information from the
physical layer, identifies service types, and then sends the services to the respective
parts of the local service processing layer.
In the PE->CE direction, the service interface layer receives service signals from the
local service processing layer, chooses proper physical channels, and then sends the
service signals to the physical layer.

Local service processing layer
The local service processing layer processes different services according to user
requirements.
On the NNI side, the OptiX OSN equipment is interconnected with the equipment on the PSN
and transmits user services on the PSN. The layers of the MPLS-based PWE3 model have the
following functions on the NNI side:

Emulation service layer
The emulation service layer corresponds to the payload to be encapsulated into PWs.
One emulation service corresponds to one PW. This is a logical layer and the OptiX OSN
equipment does not perform any operation at this layer.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

PWE3 encapsulation layer
The PWE3 encapsulation layer uses different encapsulation modes for different
emulation services. At this layer, emulation services are uniformly encapsulated into
PWE3 packets, or different emulation services are decapsulated from PWE3 packets.

MPLS layer
The MPLS layer includes two layers of MPLS labels.
The outer MPLS label is a tunnel label, which identifies a tunnel that traverses an
MPLS network between the two PE sites of a service. Such a tunnel carries PWs.
The inner MPLS label is a PW label, which identifies a PW in a tunnel.

Data link layer and physical layer
The data link layer and physical layer carry the MPLS layer and provide links for data
transmission at the MPLS layer. The OptiX OSN equipment supports Ethernet links
(GE/10GE interfaces) on the NNI side.
The forwarder between the UNI and NNI forwards the services that are locally processed on
the UNI side to the NNI side and forwards the emulation services on the NNI side to the UNI
side.

It is not recommended that the OptiX OSN equipment use Ethernet links connected to FE electrical
interfaces on the NNI side.
MPLS Model
Figure 3-35 shows the MPLS model adopted by the OptiX OSN equipment that functions as a
PE.
Figure 3-35 MPLS model
GE 10GE FE
E1/
cSTM-1
IP
VRF
VPN label
Tunnel label
GE/10GE
802.2
Ethernet
UNI NNI
Local service
processing layer
Service interface
layer
Physical layer
Interconnected with CE
MPLS layer
Data link layer and
physical layer
Transmitted to PSN
802.3

On the UNI side, a PE is interconnected with a CE and accesses L3VPN services from users
to the PSN. The layers of the MPLS model have the following functions on the UNI side:

Physical layer
The physical layer provides the interfaces between the OptiX OSN equipment and
transmission media (such as fibers and cables).
In the CE->PE direction, the physical layer processes the physical signals (optical or
electrical signals) from the CE, extracts information from the signals, and then sends
the information to the service interface layer.
System

3-63

In the PE->CE direction, the physical layer receives information from the service
interface layer, converts the information to signals that can be transmitted in the
transmission media, and then transmits the signals to the CE through physical
channels.

Service interface layer
In the CE->PE direction, the service interface layer receives information from the
physical layer, extracts IP packets, and then sends the packets to the VPN routing and
forwarding table (VRF) accordingly.
In the PE->CE direction, the service interface layer receives service signals from
VRFs, chooses proper physical channels, and then sends the service signals to the
physical layer.

Local service processing layer
At the local service processing layer, each L3VPN service is processed by a separate
VRF. A VRF performs the following functions:
Forwards the IP packets at each service port (including UNI ports and NNI ports)
accordingly.
Synchronizes the routes with those of a CE through running the same routing
protocol as that of the CE.
so that L3VPN services can be transmitted on the PSN. The layers of the MPLS model have
the following functions on the NNI side:

MPLS layer
The MPLS layer includes two layers of MPLS labels.
The inner MPLS label is a VPN label indicating the VPN that a service belongs to.
The outer MPLS label is a tunnel label, which identifies a tunnel that traverses an
MPLS network between the two PE sites of a service. Such a tunnel carries L3VPN
services.

Data link layer and physical layer
The data link layer and physical layer carry the MPLS layer and provide links for data
transmission at the MPLS layer. The OptiX OSN equipment supports the following type
of links on the NNI side:
Ethernet links (FE/GE/10GE interfaces)
Service Model of Ps
Figure 3-36 shows the service model adopted by the OptiX OSN equipment that functions as
a P.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 3-36 Service model of the OptiX OSN equipment
MPLS layer
Transmitted to
the PSN
Tunnel label Tunnel label
GE/
10GE
Ethernet
Data link layer and
physical layer
MPLS
layer
Transmitted
to the PSN
Data link layer
and
physical layer
Forwarder
UNI NNI
802.2
802.3
GE/
10GE
Ethernet
802.2
802.3

so that services can be transmitted on the PSN.
The OptiX OSN equipment provides only the MPLS forwarding function. That is, the
equipment forwards the MPLS packets according to the forwarding table of tunnel labels and
the MPLS labels.
3.3.2.2 Ethernet Services
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-point
packet Ethernet services, that is, E-Line services, E-LAN services, and E-Aggr services.
E-Line Service
Figure 3-37 illustrates the E-Line service provided by the OptiX OSN 3500.
Company A has two branches in City 1 and City 3. Company B has two branches in City 2
and City 3. Company C has two branches in City 1 and City 2. The branches of Companies A,
B, and C require data communication. The OptiX OSN 3500 can separately provide a private
line service for Companies A, B, and C to meet the communication requirement. In addition,
the service data is completely isolated.
System

3-65

Figure 3-37 E-Line service
Nationwide/Global
carrier Ethernet
Metro
carrier Ethernet
Metro
carrier Ethernet
Metro
carrier Ethernet
Company A
City 3 City 1
Company A
E-Line1
E-Line2
E-Line3
Company C Company B
Company C
Company B
City 2

E-LAN Service
Figure 3-38 illustrates the E-LAN service provided by the OptiX OSN 3500.
Company Z is headquartered in City 3. Branch A of the company is located in City 1 and City
2, and Branch B of the company is located in City 1, City 2, and City 3. Branch A and Branch
B do not communicate with each other, and the data of them should be separated from each
other. The headquarters, however, need to communicate with all the branches and need to
access the Internet.
The OptiX OSN 3500 can be used to provide the E-LAN service. Different VLAN tags are
used to identify service data from different branches. In this manner, the headquarters can
communicate with the branches and the data from different branches is isolated. In addition,
the VLAN is used to isolate the Internet data accessed by the headquarters from the internal
service data.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 3-38 E-LAN service
Nationwide/Global
carrier Ethernet
Metro
carrier Ethernet
Metro
carrier Ethernet
Metro
carrier Ethernet
Headquarter
Branch B
City 3
Branch A
City 1
Branch B
Branch A
City 2 VLAN1
VLAN2
Branch B Branch A
ISP
VLAN3

E-Aggr Service
As shown in Figure 3-39, a mobile carrier needs to build a 3G network to aggregate the
services of each NodeB and then transmit the aggregated service to the radio network
controller (RNC). In this case, the equipment processes the data between each NodeB and the
RNC as one service.
On the convergence node, the OptiX OSN 3500 specifies the total bandwidth, QoS, and other
parameters.
System

3-67

Figure 3-39 E-Aggr service
GE
FE
FE
FE
RNC
Node B
Node B
Node B

3.3.2.3 CES Services
The circuit emulation service (CES) helps to solve the problem of insufficient optical fiber
resources in the access ring and allows TDM services to be transparently transmitted across
the pure packet plane.
At the physical layer on the UNI side, the OptiX OSN 3500 is interconnected with a CE
through the following physical channels for accessing CES services:

Channelized STM-1

E1
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 3-40 Networking diagram of the CES
10GE Ring
GE
STM-1
BSC RNC
NMS
GE
G
E

R
i
n
g
E1
NodeB
FE
G
E

R
i
n
g
BTS
NodeB
FE
NodeB
FE
Packet ring
MSTP
equipment TDM ring
S
T
M
-
1
/
4

R
i
n
g
E1
BTS
Simulation
node 1
Simulation
node 2
Simulation
node 3

As shown in Figure 3-40, the OptiX OSN 3500 can gain access to CES services at emulation
node 1, emulation node 2, or emulation node 3.

At emulation node 1, the OptiX OSN 1500 transmits E1 services to the GE packet ring.

At emulation node 2, the OptiX OSN 3500 or OptiX OSN 7500 transmits E1 signals that
are received from the BTS through TDM STM-1/STM-4 ring to the 10GE packet ring.

At emulation node 3, the OptiX OSN 3500 or OptiX OSN 7500 converts E1 CESs on the
10GE packet ring into STM-1 signals and then sends them to the BSC.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports both structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over
packet switched network (CESoPSN) and structure-agnostic TDM over packet (SAToP).
In the case of CESoPSN, the features are as follows:

The equipment is aware of frame structures, frame alignment modes, and timeslots in
TDM circuits.

The equipment processes the overheads in and extracts the payloads from the TDM
frames. Then, the equipment loads timeslots to the packet payload in a specific sequence.
As a result, the services in each timeslot are fixed and visible in packets.
In the case of SAToP, the features are as follows:

The equipment is agnostic about the structures of the TDM signals. To be specific, the
equipment treats TDM signals as constant bit-rate (CBR) flows, and emulates all the
TDM signals in the same way.

The overheads and payloads in TDM signals are transparently transmitted.
System

3-69

3.3.2.4 L3VPN Services
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports border gateway protocol (BGP)-based or MPLS-based layer3
virtual private network (L3VPN) services. The equipment provides a complete L3VPN
solution.
Basic Concepts of the L3VPN
The BGP/MPLS L3VPN, based on the PE, is an L3VPN technology of the provider
provisioned VPN (PPVPN). It uses the BGP to issue VPN routes in the backbone network of
the service provider and uses the MPLS to forward VPN packets in the backbone network of
the service provider.
The BGP/MPLS L3VPN enables flexible networking and can be easily extended. In addition,
the BGP/MPLS L3VPN supports the MPLS QoS.
Application of the L3VPN
In the simplest intranet, all the users in a VPN form a closed user group. The users within the
group can transmit packets between each other; however, the users cannot communicate with
users outside the VPN. This networking mode is called an intranet VPN. The sites within a
VPN generally belong to the same organization.
In this networking mode, each VPN must be allocated a VPN target as the export target and
import target. In addition, the VPN target cannot be used by other VPNs.
Figure 3-41 Networking diagram of an intranet VPN
VPN1
VPN2
VPN2
VPN1
CE
CE
P PE PE
Site1
Site2
Site3
Site4
VPN1
Import 100:1
Export 100:1
VPN2
Import 200:1
Export 200:1
VPN2
Import 200:1
Export 200:1
VPN1
Import 100:1
Export 100:1

As shown in Figure 3-41, PEs allocate the VPN target of 100:1 to VPN1 and the target of
200:1 to VPN2. The two sites in VPN1 can access each other. The two sites in VPN2 can also
access each other. The sites in VPN1 and those in VPN2 cannot communicate.
3.3.3 Introduction to Features
This topic describes the features and applications of the OptiX OSN 3500 in packet mode.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

3.3.3.1 PWE3
As an end-to-end Layer 2 service bearer technology, pseudo wire edge to edge emulation
(PWE3) is a type of point-to-point L2VPN. It helps to integrate original access methods with
the existing IP backbone networks, so that repeated network construction can be avoided and
OPEX can be reduced.
3.3.3.2 MS PW
MS PW helps to provide an end-to-end virtual connection by establishing static PWs segment
by segment. The S-PE equipment, located at the tangent point of the access ring and the
convergence ring, swaps PW labels and aggregates PWs, so that the number of tunnels on the
convergence ring can be reduced.
3.3.3.3 VRRP
As an error tolerance protocol, VRRP allows several routing devices to form a virtual routing
device; therefore, when the next hop device of the host fails, services can be switched to
another device according to the election mechanism. In this manner, continuous and reliable
communication is ensured.
3.3.3.4 BFD
The BFD technology can realize rapid detection and protection for the IP network. The IP
RAN requires a protocol for rapid end-to-end detection and the BFD can perfectly meet this
requirement.
3.3.3.5 DHCP Relay
On the actual IP RAN, the number of BTSs and NodeBs is generally large. In this case, the
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) can be used to dynamically allocate the IP
addresses to reduce the workload and to improve the system reliability.
With the VLAN sub-interface technology, it is unnecessary for 3G base stations to support the
VLAN function during service transmission. The 3G base stations consider the transmission
equipment between the access node and the convergence node as a set of virtual equipment,
and each base station needs only to communicate with the virtual equipment. This simplifies
service configuration and improves service configuration and equipment maintenance
efficiency.
3.3.3.7 L3VPN
The IP RAN is a Layer 3 network, which is constructed by adding the L3VPN to the existing
L2VPN. The greatest advantage of the L3VPN is flexible networking, whereas the greatest
advantage of the L2PVN is tunnel-based transmission. Thus, a mixture of the two networking
technologies allows the service convergence and grooming at the core layer, and ensures
highly-reliable end-to-end transmission of services from the BTS or the NodeB.
3.3.3.8 MPLS OAM
The MPLS OAM technology provides a defect detection tool and a defect correction
mechanism for the MPLS network. You can perform the detection function of the forwarding
plane through the MPLS OAM and protection switching mechanism, and complete a
protection switching in 50 ms after a defect occurs. In this way, the impact caused by the
defect is minimized.
3.3.3.9 HQoS
System

3-71

As an edge DS node, the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment provides multi-layer QoS function
points to achieve the HQoS control function.
3.3.3.1 PWE3
As an end-to-end Layer 2 service bearer technology, pseudo wire edge to edge emulation
(PWE3) is a type of point-to-point L2VPN. It helps to integrate original access methods with
the existing IP backbone networks, so that repeated network construction can be avoided and
OPEX can be reduced.
PWE3 is classified into single-hop PWE3 and multi-hop PWE3.
Single-Hop PWE3
An ultimate PE refers to an edge equipment on a backbone network, which is directly
connected to the edge equipment of users. As shown in Figure 3-42, U-PE1 and U-PE2 are
U-PE equipment.
In the case of single-hop PWE3, a PW (namely, PW100) is directly established between
U-PEs, and PW label swapping is not required. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides end-to-end
service protection by adopting the MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protection scheme.
Figure 3-42 Networking diagram of single-hop PWE3
CE1 CE2
U-PE1
P
U-PE2
PW100
(NodeB)
(RNC)
(OptiX OSN) (OptiX OSN) (OptiX OSN)

In typical networking, a NodeB functions as CE1, an RNC functions as CE2, and OptiX OSN
equipment functions as U-PE1, P, or U-PE2.
Multi-Hop PWE3
As shown in Figure 3-43, S-PE swaps PWs within the backbone network and forwards PW
labels.
Unlike single-hop PWE3, in the case of multi-hop PWE3, multiple PWs (namely, PW100 and
PW200) exist between U-PE1 and U-PE2. PW label swapping is implemented at S-PE. That
is, S-PE terminates the original PW label and then generates a new PW label. The OptiX OSN
3500 provides end-to-end service protection by adopting the PW APS protection scheme,
rather than the MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protection scheme.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 3-43 Networking diagram of multi-hop PWE3
CE2 CE1
U-PE1 S-PE P U-PE2
PW100 PW200
(OptiX OSN) (OptiX OSN) (OptiX OSN) (OptiX OSN)
(NodeB) (RNC)

equipment functions as U-PE1, S-PE, P, and U-PE2.
3.3.3.2 MS PW
MS PW helps to provide an end-to-end virtual connection by establishing static PWs segment
by segment. The S-PE equipment, located at the tangent point of the access ring and the
convergence ring, swaps PW labels and aggregates PWs, so that the number of tunnels on the
convergence ring can be reduced.
As shown in Figure 3-44, S-PE1 and S-PE2 provides an MS PW.
An MS PW consists of multiple neighboring PW segments, and each PW segment can be
considered as a point-to-point PW.
Figure 3-44 MS PW networking diagram
CE1 PE1
S-PE1
CE2
(NodeB) (OptiX OSN)
MS-PW
PE2
PE3
(OptiX OSN) (OptiX OSN)
(OptiX OSN) (OptiX OSN)
(RNC)
S-PE2

equipment functions as PE1, S-PE1, S-PE2, PE2, or PE3.
For details on the MS PW feature, see Feature Description.
3.3.3.3 VRRP
As an error tolerance protocol, VRRP allows several routing devices to form a virtual routing
device; therefore, when the next hop device of the host fails, services can be switched to
another device according to the election mechanism. In this manner, continuous and reliable
communication is ensured.
System

3-73

As shown in Figure 3-45, the FE services coming from base stations are converged through
NEs, and these services are sent to the RNC/BSC after traveling through the Layer 2
networking and Layer 3 networking. VRRP provides protection for the networking as follows:
The RNC/BSC is connected to the two sets of the OptiX OSN equipment at the convergence
layer. VRRP1 provides protection for the links from base stations to the RNC/BSC, and
VRRP2 provides protection for links on the network. That is, on a complete 3G bearer
network, two VRRP groups are required. By adopting the VRRP technology, RNC
dual-homing guarantees reliable transmission of large-capacity 3G services from mobile base
stations to the RNC/BSC.
Figure 3-45 Networking diagram of RNC dual-homing adopting the VRRP technology
L2 networking
RNC/BSC
VRRP
1
VRRP
2
L3 networking
L2 bearer
network

Table 3-38 provides the parameters of RNC dual-homing adopting the VRRP technology.
Table 3-38 Parameters of RNC dual-homing adopting the VRRP technology
Traced
Object
VRRP
Priority
Switchi
ng
Protocol
Switching
Mode
Switching
Hold-Off
Time
Switching
Condition (Any of
the Following
Conditions
Triggers the
Switching)
BFD 1 to 254
Default:
100
VRRP
protocol
Preempt mode
Non-preempt
mode
Preempt
mode: 1s to
120s
Non-preem
pt mode: 0
ETH_LOS
LINK_DOWN
BFD_DOWN

The advantage gained from VRRP is higher reliability without requiring changes in
networking or configuration of dynamic routing or router discovery protocols on any host.
For details on the VRRP feature, see Feature Description.
3.3.3.4 BFD
The BFD technology can realize rapid detection and protection for the IP network. The IP
RAN requires a protocol for rapid end-to-end detection and the BFD can perfectly meet this
requirement.
As shown in Figure 3-46, BFD works with VRRP listening to check the status of links on the
IP RAN. If a link is faulty, BFD can respond to and handle the fault in a timely manner.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 3-46 Networking diagram of BFD (with the VRRP technology adopted)
L2 networking
RNC/BSC
VRRP
1
VRRP
2
L3 networking
L2 bearer
network

By mode, BFD is classified into the asynchronous mode and the query mode. By type, BFD is
classified into the single-hop type and the multi-hop type. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the
asynchronous mode and the single-hop type only.
For details, see Feature Description.
3.3.3.5 DHCP Relay
On the actual IP RAN, the number of BTSs and NodeBs is generally large. In this case, the
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) can be used to dynamically allocate the IP
addresses to reduce the workload and to improve the system reliability.
As shown in Figure 3-47, the DHCP server holds the IP address resources, whereas the DHCP
clients (the BTSs and NodeBs) obtain the IP addresses from the DHCP server. In the standard
DHCP protocol, only the IP addresses on the same network segment can be obtained.
Therefore, if the DHCP server is on network segment 2 and the DHCP clients are on network
segment 1, the DHCP relay is required to enable the base station on a different network
segment to obtain the IP address.
Figure 3-47 Networking diagram of DHCP relay
RNC/BSC
FE
GE Ring
10GE Ring
DHCP Server
DHCP Clients
L2VPN L3VPN
DHCP Relay
BTS
E1
SDH Ring
10GE Ring
FE
L2VPN
SDH Ring
SDH Ring
DCN Router
NMS
NodeB
NodeB

For details on the DHCP relay feature, see Feature Description.
With the VLAN sub-interface technology, it is unnecessary for 3G base stations to support the
VLAN function during service transmission. The 3G base stations consider the transmission
equipment between the access node and the convergence node as a set of virtual equipment,
and each base station needs only to communicate with the virtual equipment. This simplifies
service configuration and improves service configuration and equipment maintenance
efficiency.
System

3-75

As shown in Figure 3-48, a NodeB considers the NEs between the access node and the
convergence node as one NE, and all the NodeBs only need to communicate with the virtual
NE.
Figure 3-48 VLAN sub-interface networking diagram
RNC/BSC
Network segment 1
FE
GE ring
10GE ring
DHCP server
DHCP Clients
L2VPN L3VPN
Router forwarding across
network segments
Network segment 2
DHCP relay
BTS
NodeB
E1
SDH ring
10GE ring
FE
L2VPN
EOS
SDH ring
SDH ring
DCN router
NMS
VRRP 1
NE1 NE2
NE3 NE4
NE5 NE6
NE7 NE8
VRRP 2
NodeB

3.3.3.7 L3VPN
The IP RAN is a Layer 3 network, which is constructed by adding the L3VPN to the existing
L2VPN. The greatest advantage of the L3VPN is flexible networking, whereas the greatest
advantage of the L2PVN is tunnel-based transmission. Thus, a mixture of the two networking
technologies allows the service convergence and grooming at the core layer, and ensures
highly-reliable end-to-end transmission of services from the BTS or the NodeB.
As shown in Figure 3-49, the services from the BTS and NodeB are accessed by the OptiX
OSN 1500, and are then transmitted by the OptiX OSN 3500 or the OptiX OSN 7500 that are
located on a 10GE ring.
Figure 3-49 Networking diagram of L3VPN
RNC/BSC
Network segment 1
FE
GE ring
10GE ring
DHCP server
DHCP Clients
L2VPN L3VPN
Router forwarding across
network segments
Network segment 2
DHCP relay
BTS
NodeB
E1
SDH ring
10GE ring
FE
L2VPN
EOS
SDH ring
SDH ring
DCN router
NMS
VRRP 1
NE1 NE2
NE3 NE4
NE5 NE6
NE7 NE8
VRRP 2
NodeB

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports only the static L3VPN.
L3VPN supports equipment maintenance and management by using the ping function.
3.3.3.8 MPLS OAM
The MPLS OAM technology provides a defect detection tool and a defect correction
mechanism for the MPLS network. You can perform the detection function of the forwarding
plane through the MPLS OAM and protection switching mechanism, and complete a
protection switching in 50 ms after a defect occurs. In this way, the impact caused by the
defect is minimized.
The MPLS OAM complies ITU-T Y.1711.
For details, refer to Feature Description.
3.3.3.9 HQoS
As an edge DS node, the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment provides multi-layer QoS function
points to achieve the HQoS control function.
Compared with the traditional QoS, the HQoS has the following advantages:

The hierarchical scheduling mechanism can be based on the port, service, PW, or QinQ
link. Hence, the granularity of the QoS control is further refined.

The hierarchical flow control mechanism can be based on the port, service, PW, or QinQ
link. Hence, the QoS can be fully controlled.

The WFQ and WRED policies can be configured to increase the flexibility of the QoS
control.
3.3.4 Protection
In packet mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple protection schemes, such as multiple
spanning tree protocol (MSTP), link aggregation, MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection, MPLS tunnel
1:1 protection, packet LPT, PW APS, MC-LAG, and DNI APS.

MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection and MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection
In MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection and MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection, the protection path
protects the service that is transmitted in the working path. When the working path
becomes faulty, the service is switched to the protection path. The 1+1 protection
adopts the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism, and the 1:1 protection adopts
the single fed and single receiving mechanism.
For details on the MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection and MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection, see
3.1.5.1 MPLS Tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 Protection.

PW APS 1+1/1:1 protection
PW APS protects a working PW by using a protection PW. When the working PW
becomes faulty, services are switched to the protection PW for transmission. PW APS
is classified into two types, namely, PW APS 1+1 and PW APS 1:1.
For details on the PW APS protection, see Feature Description.

Link aggregation group
Ethernet link aggregation includes the link aggregation group (LAG).
For details on the Ethernet LAG protection, see Feature Description.
System

3-77

MC-LAG
Multi-chassis link aggregation group (MC-LAG) provides inter-NE link aggregation.
It is a supplementary protection scheme of LAG. On a 3G bearer network, MC-LAG
works with PW OAM, PW APS, DNI APS to provide equipment level protection
when the RNC is dually homed to two convergence nodes. In this manner, reliability
of the connections between the RNC and convergence nodes is improved. MC-LAG
can aggregate several links on different NEs into a LAG. When a link or an NE fails,
MC-LAG automatically switches the associated services to another available link IN
the same LAG.
For details on the MC-LAG protection, see Feature Description.

DNI APS
DNI APS, as a network protection scheme, provides protection for the services in
pure packet mode or services between the TDM/packet dual-mode nodes. DNI APS,
working with other protection schemes (such as SNCP, PW APS, and MC-LAG),
provides protection for the services that travel across two pure packet rings or two
rings in TDM mode and in packet mode, as well as for the failed fibers and failed
nodes.
For details on the DNI APS protection, see Feature Description.

Packet LPT
The packet link state pass through (LPT) is used to detect and report the faults that
occur at the service access node and on the intermediate transmission network. The
packet LPT instructs the equipment at two ends on the transmission network to start
the backup network at the earliest time for communication, therefore guaranteeing
normal transmission of the important data. The backup network can be created in
various manners. For example, the backup network can be a microwave network or
used a leased link. Alternatively, wireless or satellite communication can be set up
between access nodes.
For details on the packet LPT protection, see Feature Description.

MSTP
The MSTP is one type of spanning tree protocol. MSTP is compatible with STP and
RSTP, and fixes the defects of STP and RSTP.
For details on the MSTP feature, see 3.1.5.6 Ethernet Spanning Tree Protection.

VRRP
Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP), as an error tolerance protocol, forms a
virtual route by adding a group of gateway routers to a backup group. Therefore,
when a gateway router becomes faulty, it can be replaced with a standby router to
ensure system reliability.
For details on the VRRP feature, see Feature Description.
3.3.5 Board Functions
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the data boards listed later to meet the requirements of packet
features when the equipment uses the cross-connect boards that support the packet switching
function.
3.3.5.1 Ethernet Processing Boards
This topic provides the Ethernet processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
3.3.5.2 Dual-Mode Bridging Boards
This topic describes the dual-mode bridging boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

3.3.5.3 CES Service Processing Boards
This topic describes the CES service processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
3.3.5.1 Ethernet Processing Boards
This topic provides the Ethernet processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
#tc_osn_pd_0277/tc_osn_hd_1381_tab01 lists the functions and features of the PEX1 board.
Table 3-39 lists the functions and features of the PEX2 board.
Table 3-39 Functions and features of the PEX2
Function and
Feature
PEX2
Basic functions Provides two 10GE optical interfaces and can access and process
2x10 GE services. The optical interface supports the colored optical
interface.
Functions when
being used with the
access board
Does not support the access board, and two 10GE interfaces are
available on the front panel of the board.
Specifications of the
interface
Supports the 10GBASE-SR, 10GBASE-LR, 10GBASE-ER, and
10GBASE-ZR Ethernet optical interfaces. The optical interface uses
the LC connector and supports the transmission distances of 0.3 km,
2 km, 10 km, 40 km, and 80 km.
Characteristics of
the interface

Supports the full-duplex mode for the port.

Supports the setting of the MTU for the Ethernet port.

Supports the setting of the following parameters for the port: flow
control, number of received packets, number of transmitted
packets, loopback mode, state, and query of the type of optical
interface.

Supports the RMON performance measurement function.

Supports the setting and query of the optical power threshold.
Processing
capability
Processes 20 Gbit/s services in full-duplex mode.
Loopback function Supports inloops at the MAC layer of the Ethernet ports.
Format of service
frames

Supports the encapsulation in IEEE 802.3 format, Ethernet II
format, or IEEE 802.1q/p format.

Supports the Jumbo frame with a length not more than 9600
bytes.
Type of Ethernet
services

Supports point-to-point E-Line services.

Supports multipoint-to-multipoint E-LAN services.

Supports multipoint-to-point E-Aggr services.
System

3-79

Function and
Feature
PEX2
HQoS Provides the HQoS function, including the scheduling function at
multiple levels for the flow queue and port queue and the bandwidth
restricting function, and provides the corresponding statistical
information.
LAG Supports a maximum of 128 intra-board or inter-board LAGs. Each
LAG supports a maximum of 16 members.
Protection schemes

Supports MPLS tunnel APS.

Supports LAG protection.

Supports MPLS PW APS.

Supports MC-LAG protection.

Supports DNI APS.
Clock function

Supports two channels of synchronous Ethernet clocks and the
extraction of the clock from the physical layer of the port. The
quality of the clock meets the requirement of the clock source.

Supports two channels of IEEE 1588 V2 clocks.
Maintenance
features

Detects the fault at the physical layer of the board, the alarm
reporting that the connection at the network port is lost, the alarm
reporting that the interface fails, and the alarm reporting that the
bit errors at the interface cross the threshold.

Supports the hot-pluggable optical module and query of the
information about the optical module.

Supports the alarm detection function and reports various alarms
and performance events, which facilitates management and
maintenance of the equipment.
ETH-OAM function Supports the ETH-OAM function, which complies with IEEE
802.1ag, IEEE 802.3ah, and ITU-T Y.1731.
MPLS OAM Supports the MPLS tunnel OAM and PW OAM functions, with
MPLS OAM in compliance with ITU-T Y.1711.
MSTP Supports MSTP, which is compatible with the functions of STP and
RSTP.
LPT for packet
services
Supports P2P LPT and P2MP LPT for packet services.
IGMP snooping
function
Supports a maximum of 4k multicast groups. One multicast group
supports a maximum of 24k members.
Number of
supported E-Line
services

When working with the N4GSCC: 4k

Number of
supported E-LAN
services
1k
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Function and
Feature
PEX2
Number of
supported E-Aggr
services
4, each of which supports 127 leaf ports
Number of MPLS
tunnels
Number of unidirectional/bidirectional MPLS tunnels (with tunnels
shared):


Number of
bidirectional static
PWs
16k
Number of QinQ
links
1k
Number of static
MAC addresses in
E-LAN services
2k
Number of VLANs 4094
Number of VLAN
sub-interfaces

When working with the N4GSCC: 256

Number of MPLS
tunnel APS
protection groups


Number of MPLS
PW APS protection
groups
Supports a maximum of 1k MPLS PW APS protection groups, and
a PW protection group can bind a maximum of 512 members.
NOTE
MPLS PW APS and MPLS tunnel APS share the protection resources.
Number of MPLS
tunnels that support
OAM
2k
Number of MPLS
PWs that support
OAM
2k
NOTE
MPLS PW OAM and MPLS tunnel OAM share the resources.
Number of DNI
APS protection
groups
1k
Number of
MC-LAG protection
groups
64
Number of FIBs 4k
Number of VRF
instances
64
System

3-81

Function and
Feature
PEX2
Number of static IP
routes
8k
Number of DHCP
relays
A maximum of 16 hops of DHCP relays.
Response to ping Supports response to the IP ping command.
Number of VRRP
groups
256
Number of BFD
sessions
512
MS-PW function

Supports static switching of MS-PWs.

Supports continuity check for MS-PWs.

Table 3-40 lists the functions and features of the PEG8 board.
Table 3-40 Functions and features of the PEG8
Function and
Feature
PEG8
Basic functions

Provides eight GE interfaces and can access and process 8xGE
signals. The GE interface supports the colored optical interface.

Works with the interface board PETF8 or PEFF8. One PEG8
board can access the FE service of a maximum of two interface
boards.
interface
Supports the 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-VX, and
1000BASE-ZX optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC
connector and supports the transmission distances of 500 m, 10 km,
40 km, and 80 km.
Characteristics of
the interface

Supports the configuration of the full-duplex mode or
auto-negotiation mode for the port.


control function, number of received packets, number of
transmitted packets, loopback mode, state, and query of the type
of optical interface.


Processing
capability
Loopback function Supports inloops at the MAC layer of the Ethernet ports.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Function and
Feature
PEG8
Format of service
frames

Provides the Layer 2 forwarding function and supports the
encapsulation in IEEE 802.3 format, Ethernet II format, or IEEE
802.1q/p format.

bytes.
Type of Ethernet
services



HQoS Provides the HQoS function and supports the flow control function
that complies with IEEE 802.3x. The PEG8 provides the scheduling
function at multiple levels for the flow queue and port queue and
the bandwidth restricting function, and provides the corresponding
statistics information.
LAG Supports a maximum of 128 intra-board or inter-board LAGs. Each
LAG supports a maximum of 16 members.
Protection schemes

Supports MPLS tunnel APS.




Supports DNI APS.
Clock function

Provides eight GE optical interfaces that support the synchronous
Ethernet clock feature.

Supports eight channels of IEEE 1588 V2 clock signals.
Maintenance
features



and performance events, which facilitates management and
MPLS OAM Supports the MPLS tunnel OAM and PW OAM functions, with
MPLS OAM in compliance with ITU-T Y.1711.
MSTP Supports MSTP, which is compatible with the functions of STP and
RSTP.
LPT for packet
services
System

3-83

Function and
Feature
PEG8
IGMP snooping
function
The integrated equipment supports a maximum of 4k multicast
groups. One multicast group supports a maximum of 24k members.
Number of
supported E-Line
services


Number of
supported E-LAN
services
1k
Number of
supported E-Aggr
services
Number of MPLS
tunnels
Number of unidirectional/bidirectional MPLS tunnels (with tunnels
shared):


Number of
PWs
16k
Number of QinQ
links
1k
Number of static
MAC addresses in
E-LAN services
2k
Number of VLAN
sub-interfaces

When working with the N4GSCC: 256

Number of MPLS
tunnel APS
protection groups


Number of MPLS
PW APS protection
groups
Supports a maximum of 1k MPLS PW APS protection groups, and
a PW protection group can bind a maximum of 512 members.
NOTE
MPLS PW APS and MPLS tunnel APS share the protection resources.
Number of MPLS
OAM
2k
Number of MPLS
PWs that support
OAM
2k
NOTE
MPLS PW OAM and MPLS tunnel OAM share the resources.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Function and
Feature
PEG8
Number of DNI
APS protection
groups
1k
Number of
MC-LAG protection
groups
64
Number of FIBs 4k
Number of VRF
instances
64
Number of static IP
routes
8k
Number of DHCP
relays
A maximum of 16 hops of DHCP relays.
Response to ping Supports response to the IP ping command.
Number of VRRP
groups
256
Number of BFD
sessions
512
MS-PW function



Table 3-41 lists the functions and features of the PEG16 board.
Table 3-41 Functions and features of the PEG16
Function and
Feature
PEG16
Basic functions

Provides 16 GE interfaces and can access and process 16xGE
signals. The GE interface can be the colored optical interface.

Works with the interface board PETF8/PEFF8. One PEG16 board
can access the FE services of a maximum of two interface boards.
interface
Supports the 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-VX, and
1000BASE-ZX optical interfaces. The optical interface uses the LC
connector and supports the transmission distances of 500 m, 10 km,
40 km, and 80 km.
System

3-85

Function and
Feature
PEG16
Characteristics of
the interface

auto-negotiation mode for the port.


control function, number of received packets, number of
transmitted packets, loopback mode, state, and query of the type
of optical interface.


Processing
capability
Loopback function

Supports inloops at the PHY layer of the Ethernet port.

Supports inloops at the MAC layer of the Ethernet port.
Format of service
frames

Provides the Layer 2 forwarding function and supports the
encapsulation in IEEE 802.3 format, Ethernet II format, or IEEE
802.1q/p format.

bytes.
Type of Ethernet
services



HQoS function Provides the hierarchical QoS function and supports the flow
control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. The board
provides the scheduling function at multiple levels including the
flow queue and port queue, the bandwidth restricting function, and
the corresponding statistical information.
LAG The sum of the number of intra-board LAG groups and the number
of inter-board LAG groups must not exceed 128. Each LAG group
supports a maximum of 16 LAG members.
Protection schemes

Supports the MPLS tunnel APS.

Supports the LAG protection.
Clock function

Provides two GE optical interfaces (that is, the first two optical
interfaces) that support the synchronous Ethernet clock feature.

The first two optical interfaces support IEEE 1588 V2 clock
signals.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Function and
Feature
PEG16
Maintenance
features

indicating that the connection at the network port is lost, the alarm
indicating that the interface fails, and the alarm indicating that the

Supports the hot-swappable optical module and query of the

and performance events, which facilitates the management and
MPLS OAM
function
Supports the MPLS OAM function, which complies with ITU-T
Y.1711.
MSTP Supports the MSTP protocol, which is compatible with the STP
function and RSTP function.
LPT for packet
services
IGMP snooping
function
The integrated equipment supports 4k multicast groups. One
multicast group supports a maximum of 24k members.
Number of
supported E-Line
services


Number of
supported E-LAN
services
1k
Number of
supported E-Aggr
services
Number of MPLS
tunnels
Number of unidirectional/bidirectional MPLS tunnels (with the
tunnels shared):
4k
Number of
PWs
16k
Number of QinQ
links
1k
Number of static
MAC addresses in
E-LAN services
2k
System

3-87

Function and
Feature
PEG16
Number of MPLS
tunnel APS
protection groups


Number of MPLS
OAM
2k
MS-PW function



Table 3-42 lists the functions and features of the PETF8 board.
Table 3-42 Functions and features of the PETF8
Function and
Feature
PETF8
Basic functions Provides eight FE electrical interfaces, which are used to receive
and transmit 8xFE electrical signals.
interface
Uses the RJ-45 connector and meets the specifications of the
100BASE-TX physical layer provided in IEEE 802.3.
Characteristics of
the interface

auto-negotiation mode for the FE electrical port (in
auto-negotiation mode, only the 100 Mbit/s full-duplex working
mode is supported).


Loopback function


Supports outloops at the MAC layer of the Ethernet port.
Format of service
frames


bytes.
Type of Ethernet
services



HQoS function Provides the hierarchical QoS function. The board provides the
scheduling function at multiple levels including the flow queue and
port queue, the bandwidth restricting function, and the
corresponding statistical information.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Function and
Feature
PETF8
LAG The sum of the number of intra-board LAG groups and the number
of inter-board LAG groups must not exceed 16. Each LAG group
supports a maximum of 128 LAG members.
Clock function

Supports eight channels of synchronous Ethernet clocks.

Supports eight channels of IEEE 1588 V2 clocks.
Protection schemes

Supports the MPLS Tunnel APS.

Supports the LAG protection.

Supports the MPLS PW APS.

Supports the MC-LAG protection.

Supports the DNI APS protection.
Maintenance
features

indicating that the connection at the network port is lost, the alarm
indicating that the interface fails, and the alarm indicating that the

Supports the hot-swappable function.


Supports the function of monitoring the voltage.

Table 3-43 lists the functions and features of the PEFF8 board.
Table 3-43 Functions and features of the PEFF8
Function and
Feature
PEFF8
Basic functions Provides eight FE optical interfaces, which are used to receive and
transmit 8xFE optical signals.
interface
Supports the 100Base-FX Ethernet optical interfaces. The optical
interface uses the LC connector and supports the transmission
distances of 2 km, 15 km, 40 km, and 80 km.
Characteristics of
the interface

Supports two working modes of Ethernet interfaces, namely, full
duplex and auto-negotiation. The Ethernet interface can be
automatically negotiated into the 100M full duplex working mode
only.


Supports the setting of the following parameters for the port:
number of received packets, number of transmitted packets,
loopback mode, state, and query of the type of optical interface.

Supports the measurement based on the RMON function.

System

3-89

Function and
Feature
PEFF8
Loopback function


Supports outloops at the MAC layer of the Ethernet port.
Format of service
frames


Supports the jumbo frame with a length not more than 9600 bytes.
Type of Ethernet
services



HQoS Provides the HQoS function, including the scheduling function at
multiple levels for the flow queue and port queue and the bandwidth
restricting function, and provides the corresponding statistical
information.
LAG The number of intra-board/inter-board LAG groups must not exceed
128. Each LAG group supports a maximum of 16 LAG members.
Protection Scheme

Supports MPLS Tunnel APS




Supports DNI APS.
Clock function

Supports eight channels of synchronous Ethernet clocks and the
extraction of the clock from the physical layer of the port. The
quality of the clock meets the requirement of the clock source.

Supports eight channels of IEEE 1588 V2 clocks.
Maintenance
features

bit errors at the interface crosses the threshold.



3.3.5.2 Dual-Mode Bridging Boards
This topic describes the dual-mode bridging boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 3-44 lists the functions and features of the EDQ41 board.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 3-44 Functions and features of the EDQ41
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic functions Transmits and receives 4xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals.
interface

The STM-1 or STM-4 optical module can be used.

When the STM-1 optical module is used, the standard S-1.1,
L-1.1, and L-1.2 optical interfaces are supported. The optical
interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957.

When the STM-4 optical module is used, the standard S-4.1,
L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2 optical interfaces are supported. The
optical interfaces of the S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 types comply with
ITU-T G.957. The optical interface of the Ve-4.2 type complies
with the standards defined by Huawei.
Specifications of
optical modules

Supports the detection and query of the information about optical
modules.

Supports the usage and detection of SFP pluggable optical
modules, facilitating the maintenance of optical modules.

Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the
function of setting the on/off state of a laser.
Service processing Supports VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services when the STM-1 or STM-4
optical module is used.
Overhead processing

Processes the section overheads of STM-4/STM-1 signals.

Processes path overheads.

Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, J2, and C2 bytes.

Supports the ECC communication.
Loopback function

Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

Supports inloops and outloops at the VC-4 level.
Alarms and
performance events
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates
the management and maintenance of the equipment.
Protection scheme

Supports two-fiber ring MSP.

Supports four-fiber ring MSP.

Supports linear MSP.

Supports SNCP.

Supports SNCMP.

Supports SNCTP.

Supports fiber-shared virtual trail protection.

Supports optical-path-shared MSP. Each optical interface can
process four sets of K bytes. One EDQ41 can support a maximum
of four MSP rings.
System

3-91

Function and
Feature
Description
Maintenance
features

Supports the warm reset and cold reset. A warm reset does not
affect services.


3.3.5.3 CES Service Processing Boards
This topic describes the CES service processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
#tc_osn_pd_0279/tc_osn_hd_3097_tab01 lists the functions and features of the MP1 board.
#tc_osn_pd_0279/tc_osn_hd_3114_tab01 lists the functions and features of the MQ1 board.
Table 3-45 lists the functions and features of the CD1 board.
Table 3-45 Functions and features of the CQ1
Function and
Feature
CQ1
Basic functions Transmits and receives four-port channelized STM-1 optical signals.
ALS Supported
Loopback types of the port Inloop
Outloop
Functions of the
interface
Auto disabling of port loopback Supported
Supported CES services 252
Supported emulation mode CESoPSN
SAToP
Supports the timeslot compression function. In the case of the CES
service in CESoPSN mode, the CQ1 compresses idle timeslots to
improve the bandwidth utilization on the NNI side.
Supported clock mode Adaptive clock mode, retiming
clock mode, and loopback clock
mode.
The jitter buffer time of CES services can be set to a value in the range
of 0.125 ms to 16 ms with a step of 0.125 ms.
CES
The encapsulation buffer time of CES services can be set to a value in
the range of 0.125 ms to 5 ms with a step of 0.125 ms.
Bit error test
function
Supports the function of testing bit errors, and reports alarms in the
case of bit errors within a certain period.
LMSP Supports the LMSP 1+1 protection.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Function and
Feature
CQ1
SSM protocol Supported
PRBS Supported

Table 3-46 lists the functions and features of the D12 board.
Table 3-46 Functions and features of the MD12
Function and
Feature
MD12
Basic functions Transmits and receives 32xE1 signals, and works with the PEG8 to
process CES E1 services.
Bit error test
function
Number of CES
services
32
Emulation mode CESoPSN, SAToP
Timeslot
compression
function
In the case of the CES services in CESoPSN mode, the MD12
compresses idle timeslots to improve the bandwidth utilization on the
NNI side.
Clock mode Adaptive clock mode, retiming clock mode, and loopback clock mode.
Line code of E1
link
HDB3 code
Frame format of
E1 link
Unframed format, standard frame format, or E1 CRC-4 multiframe
format (default value)
Loopback mode Inloop, outloop, or non-loopback (default value)
Jitter buffer time
of CES services
Encapsulation
buffer time of
CES packets

Table 3-47 lists the functions and features of the D75 board.
System

3-93

Table 3-47 Functions and features of the MD75
Function and
Feature
MD75
Basic functions Transmits and receives 32xE1 signals, and works with the PEG8 to
process CES E1 services.
Bit error test
function
Number of CES
services
32
Emulation mode CESoPSN, SAToP
Timeslot
compression
function
In the case of the CES services in CESoPSN mode, the MD75
compresses idle timeslots to improve the bandwidth utilization on the
NNI side.
Clock mode Adaptive clock mode, retiming clock mode, and loopback clock mode.
Line code of E1
link
HDB3 code
Frame format of
E1 link
Unframed format, standard frame format, or E1 CRC-4 multiframe
format (default value)
Loopback mode Inloop, outloop, or non-loopback (default value)
Jitter buffer time
of CES services
Encapsulation
buffer time of
CES packets

System
Product Description 4 MSTP Data Features

4-1

4 MSTP Data Features
About This Chapter
The data features include Ethernet features, RPR features, ATM features, SAN features and
DDN features.
4.1 Ethernet Features
This topic describes the functions, application and protection of the Ethernet features of the
OptiX OSN 3500.
4.2 RPR Features
The RPR of the OptiX OSN 3500 is suitable for the ring topology. The RPR can quickly
recover Ethernet services from a fiber cut or a link failure.
4.3 ATM Features
This topic describes the functions, application and protection of the ATM features of the
OptiX OSN 3500.
4.4 DDN Features
This topic describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX OSN
3500.
4.5 SAN Features
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board,
N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and DVB-ASI services.
4.1 Ethernet Features
This topic describes the functions, application and protection of the Ethernet features of the
OptiX OSN 3500.
4.1.1 Functions of Transparent Transmission Boards
4.1.2 Functions of Switching Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides various types of Ethernet switching boards to realize different
Ethernet services.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

4.1.3 Application
The OptiX OSN 3500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission
platform.
4.1.4 Protection
OptiX OSN 3500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services.
4.1.1 Functions of Transparent Transmission Boards
Table 4-1 provides the functions and features of the EFT8.
Table 4-1 Functions and features of the EFT8
Function and
Feature
EFT8
Basic functions Transmits 8xFE or 16xFE services.
Functions when
being used with the
interface board

Accesses 8 Ethernet signals through the electrical interface
independently.

Accesses 16 Ethernet signals through the electrical interface when
the EFT8 is used with the ETF8.

Accesses 8 Ethernet optical signals and 8 Ethernet electrical
signals when the EFT8 is used with the EFF8.
optical interface

Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EFT8 is
used with the ETF8.

Supports 100BASE-FX/100BASE-TX signals when the EFT8 is
used with the EFF8. The optical interfaces comply with IEEE
802.3u.
Format of service
frames

Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q TAG formats.

Ports 14 and 912 support the frame with a length ranging from
64 bytes to 1535 bytes. Ports 58 and 1316 support the frame
with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. The board
supports the Jumbo frame with a length not more than 9600 bytes.
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
The maximum uplink bandwidth is 1.25 Gbit/s. The EFT8 can adapt
to the bandwidth of the slot.
System

4-3

Function and
Feature
EFT8
VCTRUNKs Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 16
Configuration principles are as follows:

A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of three VC-3s or a
maximum of 63 VC-12s.

A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-12 path or VC-3 path at
one time. A VCTRUNK should not be bound with VC-12 and
VC-3 paths at the same time.

Different VCTRUNKs can be bound with paths at different levels.

VCTRUNK 1VCTRUNK 8 can be bound with VC-3s 112 or
VC-12s 163.

VCTRUNK 9VCTRUNK 16 can be bound with VC-3s 1324 or
VC-12s 64126.

A VCTRUNK cannot be bound with VC-12s numbered 163 and
VC-3s numbered 1012 at the same time. In addition, a
VCTRUNK cannot be bound with VC-12s numbered 64126 and
VC-3s numbered 2224 at the same time.
Mapping
granularities
Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X63), and VC-3-Xv (X3)
granularities.
Encapsulation
format
Supports the HDLC, LAPS, and GFP-F protocols.
EPL services Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission.
MTU Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518
bytes to 1535 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of
the packets that enter or exit the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set
MTU.
MPLS Does not support the MPLS.
VLAN Supports VLAN transparent transmission.
Link aggregation
function
Does not support the link aggregation function.
ETH-OAM function Does not support the ETH-OAM function.
QoS function Does not support the QoS function.
LCAS function Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the
bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT function Supports the P2P LPT in GFP bearer mode.
Flow control
function
Supports the FE port-based flow control function that complies with
IEEE 802.3x.
High-precision time
(IEEE 1588 V2)
Does not support the high-precision time.
Test frames Receives and transmits GFP test frames.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Function and
Feature
EFT8
Port mirroring Does not support the port mirroring function.
Loopback function

Supports inloops at the PHY layer on Ethernet ports.

Supports inloops and outloops at the MAC layer on Ethernet
ports.

Protection schemes Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network
level:

LCAS

LPT
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Alarms and
performance events

Table 4-2 provides the functions and features of the EFT8A.
Table 4-2 Functions and features of the EFT8A
Function and
Feature
EFT8A
Basic functions Transparently transmits 8xFE services.
Functions when
being used with the
interface board
Accesses 8xFE signals by providing interfaces on the front panel.
optical interface

Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.

The optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u.
Format of service
frames

Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q TAG formats.

The first four ports support the frame with a length ranging from
64 bytes to 1535 bytes and the last four ports support the frame
with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes.

Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
622 Mbit/s
System

4-5

Function and
Feature
EFT8A

A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of three VC-3s or a
maximum of 63 VC-12s.

A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-12 path or VC-3 path at
one time. A VCTRUNK should not be bound with VC-12 and
VC-3 paths at the same time.

Different VCTRUNKs can be bound with paths at different levels.

A VCTRUNK cannot be bound with VC-12s numbered 163 and
VC-3s numbered 1012 at the same time.
Mapping
granularities
granularities.
Encapsulation
format
Supports the HDLC, LAPS, and GFP-F protocols.
MTU.
VLAN Supports VLAN transparent transmission.
Link aggregation
function
Flow control
function
Supports the FE interface-based flow control function that complies
with IEEE 802.3x.
High-precision time
(IEEE 1588 V2)
Test frames Receives and transmits GFP test frames.
Loopback function

Supports inloops at the PHY layer on Ethernet ports.

Supports inloops and outloops at the MAC layer on Ethernet
ports.

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Function and
Feature
EFT8A
level:

LCAS

LPT
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Alarms and
performance events

Table 4-3 provides the functions and features of the EGT2.
Table 4-3 Functions and features of the EGT2
Function and
Feature
EGT2
Basic functions Transparently transmits 2xGE services.
Functions when
being used with the
interface board
Accesses 2xGE signals by providing interfaces on the front panel.
optical interface

Supports the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical
interfaces. The optical interfaces support the auto-negotiation
function in compliance with IEEE 802.3z. The optical interfaces
use the SFP optical module and support hot swapping. When the
multi-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission
distance is 550 m. When the single-mode optical fiber is used, the
maximum transmission distance is 10 km. The optical modules
that can meet different requirements for the transmission distance
such as 40 km and 80 km can also be used.

The N2EGT2 also supports the 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet
electrical interface. The electrical interface supports the
auto-negotiation function. The negotiated rate can be 10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s. The N2EGT2 uses the SFP electrical
interface and supports hot swapping. The maximum transmission
distance is 100 m.
Format of service
frames

Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q TAG
formats.

Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600
bytes.

Maximum uplink
bandwidth
The maximum uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s. The EGT2 can adapt
to the bandwidth of the slot.
System

4-7

Function and
Feature
EGT2

A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4s or a
maximum of 24 VC-3s. A VCTRUNK can be bound with VC-4s
numbered 114 or VC-3s numbered 148.

The virtual concatenation modes of the two VCTRUNKs of the
board should be the same. That is, the two VCTRUNKs should
be of the VC-4 virtual concatenation or of the VC-3 virtual
concatenation.
Mapping
granularities
Supports VC-4, VC-3, VC3-Xv (X24), and VC4-Xv (X8)
granularities.
Encapsulation format Supports the HDLC, LAPS, and GFP-F protocols.
MTU.
VLAN Supports the VLAN transparent transmission.
Link aggregation
function
Flow control
function
Supports the GE port-based flow control function that complies
with IEEE 802.3x.
High-precision time
(IEEE 1588 V2)
Test frames Receives and transmits Ethernet test frames.
Port mirroring The N2EGT2 supports ingress mirroring.
Loopback function Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC
layer).
level:

LCAS

LPT
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Function and
Feature
EGT2
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Alarms and
performance events

4.1.2 Functions of Switching Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides various types of Ethernet switching boards to realize different
Ethernet services.
Table 4-4 provides the functions and features of the EFS0.
Table 4-4 Functions and features of the EFS0
Function and Feature EFS0
Basic functions Processes 8xFE services and supports the convergence of
60x10 Mbit/s or 6x100 Mbit/s services.
Functions when being
used with the interface
board

Accesses 8xFE signals through the electrical interface when
the EFS0 is used with the ETF8.

Accesses 8xFE signals through the optical interface when the
EFS0 is used with the EFF8.

Provides the TPS protection for the 8xFE signals through the
electrical interface when the EFS0 is used with the ETS8 and
TSB8.

The N5EFS0 can access 8xFE signals through the electrical
interface when it is used with the ETF8A.

The N5EFS0 can access 8xFE signals through the optical
interface when it is used with the EFF8A.
optical interface

Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EFS0 is
used with the ETF8.

Supports 100BASE-FX signals when the EFS0 is used with
the EFF8. The optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u.

The N5EFS0 supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals
when it is used with the ETF8A.

The N5EFS0 supports 100BASE-FX signals when it is used
with the EFF8A. The optical interfaces comply with IEEE
802.3u.
Format of service frames

Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1 q/p
formats.

Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to
9600 bytes.

System

4-9

Maximum uplink
bandwidth

The maximum uplink bandwidth of the N1EFS0 is 622
Mbit/s.

The maximum uplink bandwidth of the
N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 is 1.25 Gbit/s.

The EFS0 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.
VCTRUNKs The number of supported VCTRUNKs is as follows:

The number of VCTRUNKs supported by the N1EFS0 is 12.

The number of VCTRUNKs supported by the
N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 is 24.

VCTRUNK 1VCTRUNK 12 can be bound with VC-4s
numbered 14 only. VCTRUNK 13VCTRUNK 24 can be
bound with VC-4s numbered 58 only.

VC-4s numbered 4 and 8 support the binding of VC-3 and
VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3
paths only.

A VC-4 cannot be bound with VC-3 and VC-12 paths at the
same time.
Mapping granularities Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X63), and VC-3-Xv
(X12) granularities.
Encapsulation format Supports the GFP-F encapsulation.

The N1EFS0/N2EFS0 supports the GFP-F, LAPS, and
HDLC encapsulation.

The N4EFS0 and N5EFS0 support the GFP-F encapsulation
only.
EVPL services Supports PORT+VLAN-based EVPL services that use the
frame encapsulation formats of MartinioE and stack VLAN.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

EPLAN services

Supports the point-to-multipoint (P2MP) converging service
that is based on Layer 2.

Supports the Layer 2 forwarding function.

Supports switching on the client and SDH sides.

Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The
capacity of the MAC address table is 16K. The aging time of
the MAC address can be set and queried.

Supports the configuration of the static MAC route.

The N1EFS0/N2EFS0 does not support the query of the
dynamic MAC address. The N4EFS0/N5EFS0 supports the
query of the dynamic MAC address.

Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The
maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum
number of logical ports for each VB is 30.

Queries the number of actually learnt MAC addresses based
on VB+VLAN or VB+LP.

Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE
802.1d MAC bridge.
EVPLAN services

Supports EVPLAN virtual bridges.

Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.

Supports the setting of a maximum of 4096 VLAN services.

Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE
802.1q virtual bridge.
MTU Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from
1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the
length of the packets that exit the IP ports is restricted by the
pre-set MTU.
MPLS Supports the MPLS.
VLAN Supports 4k VLANs. The VLAN technology complies with
IEEE 802.1q/p.
Rapid spanning tree
protocol (RSTP)
Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP
that comply with IEEE 802.1w.
Link aggregation
function
The N1EFS0 does not support the link aggregation function.
The N2EFS0, N4EFS0, and N5EFS0 support manual link
aggregation.
Multicast function
(IGMP snooping)
Supports the multicast function.
System

4-11

ETH-OAM function

The N1EFS0 and N2EFS0 do not support the ETH-OAM
function.

The N4EFS0 and N5EFS0 support continuity check (CC) for
the multicast service, loopback (LB) test for the unicast
service, link trace (LT) test, loop detection (LD),
auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and link performance
detection. The ETH-OAM function complies with IEEE
802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah.
QoS function

Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s.
The N1EFS0 supports the service classification based on
PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN PRI.

The N2EFS0, N4EFS0, and N5EFS0 support the flow
classification based on PORT, PORT++VLAN ID, or
PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
LCAS function Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects
the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT function

The N1EFS0/N2EFS0 supports the point-to-point (P2P) LPT.

The N4EFS0/N5EFS0 supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.
Flow control function Supports the port-based flow control function that complies
with IEEE 802.3x.
High-precision time
(IEEE 1588 V2)
Loopback function

Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC
layer).

The N1EFS0, N2EFS0 and N4EFS0 support inloops and
outloops at the VC-3 level. The N5EFS0 does not support
inloops and outloops at the VC-3 level.
Protection schemes Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet
equipment level and network level:

The N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 supports TPS

STP/RSTP

LCAS

LPT

LAG
Ethernet performance
monitoring
Alarms and performance
events
Reports various alarms and performance events, which
facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.

Table 4-5 provides the functions and features of the EFS0A.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 4-5 Functions and features of the EFS0A
Function and
Feature
EFS0A
Basic functions Processes 16xFE services.
used with the
interface board

Accesses 16xFE signals through the electrical interface when the
EFS0A is used with the ETF8.

EFS0A is used with the EFF8.

Provides the TPS protection for the 16xFE signals through the
electrical interface when the EFS0A is used with the ETS8 and
TSB8.
optical interface

Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EFS0A is
used with the ETF8.

Supports 100BASE-FX signals when the EFS0A is used with the
EFF8. The optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u.
Format of service
frames

Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1 q/p formats.

bytes.

Maximum uplink
bandwidth
The maximum uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.
The EFS0A can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.

VC-4s numbered 4, 8, 12, and 16 support the binding of VC-3
and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3
paths only.

same time.
Mapping
granularities
granularities.
Encapsulation format Supports the GFP-F protocol.
EVPL services Supports PORT+VLAN-based EVPL services that use the frame
encapsulation formats of MartinioE and stack VLAN.
System

4-13

Function and
Feature
EFS0A
EPLAN services

Supports the P2MP converging service that is based on Layer 2.



capacity of the MAC address table is 16K. The aging time of the
MAC address can be set and queried.


The N1EFS0, N2EFS0, and N5EFS0 support the query of the
dynamic MAC address.

Support the query of the dynamic MAC address.

maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum
number of logical ports for each VB is 30.

Queries the number of actually learnt MAC addresses based on
VB+VLAN or VB+LP.

Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d
MAC bridge.
EVPLAN services




MTU.
VLAN Supports 4k VLANs. The VLAN technology complies with IEEE
802.1q/p.
RSTP Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP that
comply with IEEE 802.1w.
Link aggregation
function
Supports manual link aggregation.
Multicast function
(IGMP snooping)
ETH-OAM function Supports CC for the multicast service, LB test for the unicast
service, LT test, LD, auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and link
performance detection.
QoS function


Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN
ID, or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Function and
Feature
EFS0A
LPT function Supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.
Flow control function Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with
IEEE 802.3x.
High-precision time
(IEEE 1588 V2)
Port mirroring Supports ingress mirroring.
Loopback function Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC
layer).
level:

STP/RSTP

LCAS

LPT

LAG
monitoring
Alarms and
performance events

Table 4-6 provides the functions and features of the EFS4.
Table 4-6 Functions and features of the EFS4
Function and
Feature
EFS4
Basic functions Processes 4xFE services.
Functions when
being used with the
interface board
Accesses 4xFE signals by providing interfaces on the front panel.
Specifications of
the optical interface
Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals. The optical interfaces
comply with IEEE 802.3u.
Format of service
frames

Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1 q/p formats.
Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes
and supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.
System

4-15

Function and
Feature
EFS4
Maximum uplink
bandwidth

The maximum uplink bandwidth of the N1EFS4 is 622 Mbit/s.

The maximum uplink bandwidth of the N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 is
1.25 Gbit/s.

The EFS4 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.
VCTRUNKs

The number of VCTRUNKs supported by the N1EFS4 is 12.

The number of VCTRUNKs supported by the N2EFS4 and
N3EFS4 is 24.

VCTRUNK 1VCTRUNK 12 can be bound with VC-4s numbered
14 only. VCTRUNK 13VCTRUNK 24 can be bound with
VC-4s numbered 58 only.

VC-4s numbered 4 and 8 support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12
paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only.

A VC-4 cannot be bound with VC-3 and VC-12 paths at the same
time.
Mapping
granularities
granularities.
Encapsulation
format
Supports the GFP-F protocol.
EPLAN services






The N1EFS4 and N3EFS4 support the query of the dynamic MAC
address.

The N2EFS4 does not support the query of the dynamic MAC
address.

maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum number
of logical ports for each VB is 30.

Queries the number of actually learnt MAC addresses based on
VB+VLAN or VB+LP.

MAC bridge.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Function and
Feature
EFS4
EVPLAN services




Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q
virtual bridge.
bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the
packets that exit the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU.
802.1q/p.
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation.
Multicast function
(IGMP snooping)
ETH-OAM
function

The N1EFS4 does not support the ETH-OAM function.

The N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 support CC for the multicast service,
LB test for the unicast service, LT test, LD, auto-negotiation, fault
diagnosis, and link performance detection. The ETH-OAM
function complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah.
QoS function


The N1EFS4 supports the service classification based on PORT,
PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN PRI.

The N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 support the flow classification based on
PORT, PORT++VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
LPT function

The N1EFS4 supports the P2P LPT.

The N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 support the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.
Flow control
function
Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with
IEEE 802.3x.
High-precision
time (IEEE 1588
V2)
Loopback function Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC layer).
System

4-17

Function and
Feature
EFS4
level:

STP/RSTP

LCAS

LPT

LAG
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Alarms and
performance events
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the
management and maintenance of the equipment.

Table 4-7 provides the functions and features of the EGS2.
Table 4-7 Functions and features of the EGS2
Function and
Feature
EGS2
Basic functions Processes 2xGE services.
Functions when
being used with
the interface
board
Specifications of
the optical
interface

Supports the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical interfaces.
The optical interfaces support the auto-negotiation function in
compliance with IEEE 802.3z. The optical interfaces use the SFP
optical module and support hot swapping. When the multi-mode
optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance is 550 m.
When the single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum
transmission distance is 10 km. The optical modules that can meet
different requirements for the transmission distance such as 40 km
and 80 km can also be used.

The N3EGS2 also supports the 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet
electrical interface. The electrical interface supports the
auto-negotiation function. The negotiated rate can be 10 Mbit/s, 100
Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s. The N3EGS2 uses the SFP electrical
interface and supports hot swapping. The maximum transmission
distance is 100 m.
Format of service
frames

Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q/p formats.

bytes.

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Function and
Feature
EGS2
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
The maximum uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s. The EGS2 can adapt to
the bandwidth of the slot.

VCTRUNK 1VCTRUNK 12 can be bound with VC-4s numbered
14 only. VCTRUNK13VCTRUNK 24 can be bound with VC-4s
numbered 58 only. VCTRUNK 25VCTRUNK 36 can be bound
with VC-4s numbered 912 only. VCTRUNK 37VCTRUNK 48
can be bound with VC-4s numbered 1316 only.

VC-4s numbered 4, 8, 12, and 16 support the binding of VC-3 and
VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths
only.

A VC-4 cannot be bound with VC-3 and VC-12 paths at the same
time.
Mapping
granularities
Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC12-Xv (X63), and VC3-Xv (X12)
granularities.
Encapsulation
format
Supports the GFP-F protocol.
EPLAN services




Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity
of the MAC address table is 16K. The aging time of the MAC
address can be set and queried.


Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum
number of supported VBs is 2. The maximum number of logical
ports for each VB is 30.

MAC bridge.
EVPLAN
services




Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q
virtual bridge.
bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the
packets that exit the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU.
System

4-19

Function and
Feature
EGS2
802.1q/p.
Link aggregation
function
Multicast
function (IGMP
snooping)
ETH-OAM
function

The N2EGS2 does not support the ETH-OAM function.

The N3EGS2 supports CC for the multicast service, LB test for the
unicast service, LT test, LD, auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and
link performance detection. The ETH-OAM function complies with
IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah.
QoS function


Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID,
or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
LPT function

The N2EGS2 supports the P2P LPT.

The N3EGS2 supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.
Flow control
function
Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE
802.3x.
High-precision
time (IEEE 1588
V2)
Port mirroring The N3EGS2 supports ingress mirroring.
Loopback
function

Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC layer).

The N2EGS2 supports inloops and outloops at the VC-3 level, but
the N3EGS2 does not support inloops and outloops at the VC-3
level.
Protection
schemes
Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network
level:

STP/RSTP

LCAS

LPT

LAG
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Function and
Feature
EGS2
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Alarms and
performance
events
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the

Table 4-8 provides the functions and features of the EMS2.
Table 4-8 Functions and features of the EMS2
Function and
Feature
EMS2
Basic functions Accesses and processes 2xGE services.
Processes 16xFE services.
Support point-to-multipoint convergence services.
used with the
interface board

Accesses 16xFE signals through the electrical interface when the
EMS2 is used with the ETF8.

EMS2 is used with the EFF8.

Accesses 8xFE signals through the electrical interface and 8xFE
signals through the optical interface when the EMS2 is used with
the ETF8 and EFF8.
optical interface

distance is 550 m. When the single-mode optical fiber is used,
the maximum transmission distance is 10 km. The optical
modules that can meet different requirements for the
transmission distance such as 40 km and 80 km can also be used.

Supports the 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet electrical interface.
The electrical interface supports the auto-negotiation function.
The negotiated rate can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000
Mbit/s. The board uses the SFP electrical interface and supports
hot swapping. The maximum transmission distance is 100 m.

Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EMS2 is
used with the ETF8 and supports 100BASE-FX signals when the

System

4-21

Function and
Feature
EMS2
Format of service
frames

Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p formats.

bytes.

Maximum uplink
bandwidth
2.5 Gbit/s

VCTRUNK 1VCTRUNK 12 can be bound with VC-4s
numbered 14 only. VCTRUNK13VCTRUNK 24 can be
bound with VC-4s numbered 58 only. VCTRUNK
25VCTRUNK 36 can be bound with VC-4s numbered 912
only. VCTRUNK 37VCTRUNK 48 can be bound with VC-4s
numbered 1316 only.

VC-4s numbered 4, 8, 12, and 16 support the binding of VC-3
and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3
paths only.

same time.
Mapping granularities Supports the following virtual concatenation granularities: VC-12,
VC-3, VC-4, VC12-Xv (X63), VC3-Xv (X12), and VC-4-Xv
(X8).
Encapsulation format Supports the GFP-F protocol.
EPL services Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.
EVPL services The services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge are
referred to as EPLAN service.

Supports EVPL services based on PORT+VLAN.
Supports a maximum of 4000 services
that are accessed through IP ports.
that are accessed through
VCTRUNKs.
Supports a maximum of 8000 links.

Supports QinQ-based EVPL services.

Supports PORT-based service forwarding.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Function and
Feature
EMS2
EPLAN



Supports the blacklist that can contain 2K records and also the
static MAC address table that can contain 2K records. The sum
of the number of records in the blacklist and the number of
addresses in the static MAC address table must not exceed 2K.



maximum number of supported VBs is 2.

MAC bridge, IEEE 802.1q, and IEEE 802.1ad.
EVPLAN

Support EVPLAN virtual bridges.


Supports the configuration of up to 4096 VLAN services.

MTU.
MPLS Support the MPLS.
VLAN

Supports VLAN and QinQ, and supports the addition, deletion,
and exchanging of VLAN tags. The function complies with
IEEE 802.1q/p.

Supports 4096 S-VLANs (04095) and 4096 C-VLANs
(04095) in the case of QinQ services.

Supports 4095 VLANs (14095) in the case of EVPL services.
RSTP Supports the RSTP, which complies with IEEE 802.1w.
Link aggregation
function
Multicast function
(IGMP snooping)
service, LT test, LD, auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and link
performance detection. The ETH-OAM function complies with
IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah.
System

4-23

Function and
Feature
EMS2
QoS function


Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN,
PORT+SVLAN, and PORT+VLAN+PRI.
IEEE 802.3x.
High-precision time
(IEEE 1588 V2)
Test frames Supports test frames.
Port mirroring Supports ingress mirroring.
Loopback function Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (on the PHY layer).
level:

STP/RSTP

LCAS

LPT

LAG
monitoring
Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance at the PORT level
and the VCTRUNK level.
Alarms and
performance events

Table 4-9 provides the functions and features of the EMS4.
Table 4-9 Functions and features of the EMS4
Function and Feature EMS4
Basic functions Accesses and processes 4xGE services
Processes 16xFE services.
Supports point-to-multipoint convergence services.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

board

Accesses 16xFE signals through the electrical interface when
the EMS4 is used with the ETF8.


Accesses 8xFE signals through the electrical interface and
8xFE signals through the optical interface when the EMS4 is
used with the ETF8 and EFF8.
optical interface

function in compliance with IEEE 802.3z. The optical
interfaces use the SFP optical module and support hot
swapping. When the multi-mode optical fiber is used, the
maximum transmission distance is 550 m. When the
single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission
distance is 10 km. The optical modules that can meet different
requirements for the transmission distance such as 40 km and
80 km can also be used.

Supports the 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet electrical interface.
The electrical interface supports the auto-negotiation function.
The negotiated rate can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or. 1000
Mbit/s. The EMS4 uses the SFP electrical interface and
supports hot swapping. The maximum transmission distance
is 100 m.

Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EMS4 is
used with the ETF8 and supports 100BASE-FX signals when
the EMS4 is used with the EFF8.

Format of service
frames

Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p formats.

Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to
9216 bytes.

Maximum uplink
bandwidth
2.5 Gbit/s.
Number of supported
VCTRUNKs
64
Mapping granularities Supports the following virtual concatenation granularities:
VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC12-Xv (X64), VC3-Xv (X24), and
VC4-Xv (X8).
Encapsulation format Supports the GFP-F, LAPS, and HDLG protocols.
Supports 4000 bidirectional services.
System

4-25

EVPL services

Supports a maximum of 4000
services that are accessed through
IP ports.
Supports a maximum of 4000
services that are accessed through
VCTRUNKs.


EPLAN services



Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also
the static MAC address table that can contain 512 records.

capacity of the MAC address table is 128K. The aging time of
the MAC address can be set and queried.



Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE
802.1d MAC bridge.
EVPLAN services



802.1q virtual bridge and IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge.
MTU Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from
1518 bytes to 9216 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the
length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the
pre-set MTU.
VLAN

Supports VLAN and QinQ, and supports the addition,
deletion, and exchanging of VLAN tags. The function
complies with IEEE 802.1q/p.

Supports 4096 S-VLANs (04095) and 4096 C-VLANs
(04095) in the case of QinQ services.

Supports 4095 VLANs (14095) in the case of EVPL
services.
Multiple Spanning Tree
Protocol (MSTP)
Supports the MSTP.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Link aggregation
function
Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.
Inter-board link
aggregation
Supports inter-board link aggregation.
Multicast function
(IGMP snooping)
service, remote loopback, auto-negotiation, LD, fault diagnosis,
and link performance detection. The ETH-OAM function
complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah.
QoS function


Supports the flow classification based on PORT,
PORT+VLAN, or PORT+SVLAN.
LPT function

Supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.

Supports the setting of the LPT revertive mode. Based on the
revertive mode, the RNC shutdown mode can be set.
Flow control function Supports the port-based flow control function that complies
with IEEE 802.3x.
High-precision time
(IEEE 1588 V2)
Loopback function Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer).
network level:

BPS/PPS/DLAG

STP/RSTP

LCAS

LPT

LAG
monitoring
Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance at the PORT level
Alarms and
performance events
Reports various alarms and performance events, which
facilitates management and maintenance of the equipment.

Table 4-10 provides the functions and features of the EGS4.
System

4-27

Table 4-10 Functions and features of the EGS4
Function and
Feature
EGS4
Functions when
being used with the
interface board
optical interface


The N1EGS4 and N4EGS4 also support the 1000BASE-T RJ-45
Ethernet electrical interface. The electrical interface supports the
auto-negotiation function. The N1EGS4 supports the negotiated
rate of 1000 Mbit/s and the N4EGS4 supports the negotiated rate
of 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s. The N1EGS4 and
N4EGS4 use the SFP electrical interface and support hot
swapping. The maximum transmission distance is 100 m.
Format of service
frames

Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q/p formats.

bytes.

Maximum uplink
bandwidth
2.5 Gbit/s
Number of
supported
VCTRUNKs
64
Mapping
granularities
Supports the following virtual concatenation granularities: VC-12,
VC-3, VC-4, VC12-Xv (X64), VC3-Xv (X24), and VC4-Xv
(X8).
Encapsulation
format
Supports the GFP-F, LAPS, and HDLG protocols.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Function and
Feature
EGS4
EVPL services

that are accessed through IP ports.
that are accessed through VCTRUNKs.


EPLAN services





Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The EGS4
supports a maximum of two VBs.
EVPLAN services



802.1q virtual bridge and IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge.
the packets that enter the IP ports of the N1EGS4/N3EGS4 is
restricted by the pre-set MTU, and the length of the packets that
enter or exit the IP ports of the N4EGS4 is also restricted by the
pre-set MTU.
VLAN

Supports VLAN and QinQ, and supports the addition, deletion,
and exchanging of VLAN tags. The function complies with IEEE
802.1q/p.

Supports 4096 S-VLANs (04095) and 4096 C-VLANs (04095)
in the case of QinQ services.

Supports 4095 VLANs (14095) in the case of EVPL services.
MSTP The N1EGS4 Supports the MSTP.
Link aggregation
function
Inter-board link
aggregation
System

4-29

Function and
Feature
EGS4
Multicast function
(IGMP snooping)
ETH-OAM function

Supports CC for the multicast service, LB test for the unicast
service, and LD.

Supports the initiation of remote loopbacks, auto-negotiation,
status query in the case of a severe fault in the board, and link
performance detection functions, which comply with IEEE
802.3ah.

The N4EGS4 supports the LT test function.
QoS function

Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s. The N1EGS4
supports 512 rate modes, and the N3EGS4 and N4EGS4 support
60 rate modes.

The N3EGS4/N4EGS4 supports the flow classification based on
PORT, PORT+VLAN, or PORT+SVLAN.
LPT function Supports the P2P LPT and the P2MP LPT.
Flow control
function
IEEE 802.3x.
High-precision time
(IEEE 1588 V2)
Port mirroring The N4EGS4 supports ingress mirroring.

BPS/PPS/DLAG

STP/RSTP

LCAS

LPT

LAG
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance at the port level and
the VCTRUNK level.
Alarms and
performance events

Table 4-11 lists the functions and features of the EGS4A.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 4-11 Functions and features of the EGS4A
Function and
Feature
EGS4A
board
optical interface
use the ESFP optical module and support hot swapping. When
the multi-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission
Format of service
frames
Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q/d formats.
bytes, and supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9216
bytes.
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
2.5 Gbit/s
Number of supported
VCTRUNKs
32
Mapping granularities Supports the following virtual concatenation granularities:
VC3-Xv (X48) and VC4-Xv (X16).
Supports the following contiguous concatenation granularities:
VC4-4c and VC4-16c.
Encapsulation format Supports the GFP-F, LAPS, and HDLG protocols.
EPL Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.
EVPL Supports EVPL services based on PORT+VLAN.
EPLAN Supports the Layer 2 forwarding function.
Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The board
supports a maximum of 30 VBs. Each VB can be bound with 64
logical ports.
System

4-31

Function and
Feature
EGS4A
EVPLAN Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.
Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VLAN broadcast
table.
the packets that enter or exit the IP ports is restricted by the
pre-set MTU.
VLAN

Supports VLAN and QinQ. The function complies with IEEE
802.1q/d.

Supports 4096 VLANs.
RSTP Does not support the RSTP.
Link aggregation
function
Inter-board link
aggregation
Multicast function
(IGMP snooping)
ETH-OAM function

Supports CC for the multicast service, LB test for the unicast
service, and LT.

Supports the status query in the case of a severe fault in the
board, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah.
QoS function

Supports the setting of the following CAR parameters: CIR,
CBS, PIR, and PBS.

Supports the flow classification based on PORT,
PORT+VLAN, PORT+VLAN+PRI, PORT+S, or PORT+S+C.
LPT function Does not support the LPT.
IEEE 802.3x.
High-precision time
(IEEE 1588 V2)
Port mirroring Does not support port mirroring.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Function and
Feature
EGS4A

BPS/DLAG

LCAS

LAG
CoS Supports eight priorities.
monitoring
Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance at the port level
Alarms and
performance events

Table 4-12 provides the functions and features of the EAS2.
Table 4-12 Functions and features of the EAS2 board
Function and
Feature
EAS2
Basic functions Accesses 2x10 GE Ethernet services.
Functions when
being used with the
interface board
Provides interfaces on the front panel.
Specifications of
the optical interface
The optical interfaces are 10GBASE-LR and 10GBASE-LW
Ethernet optical interfaces, which comply with IEEE 802.3ae.
Format of service
frames

Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1qTAG formats.

bytes.

Maximum uplink
bandwidth
10 Gbit/s
The EAS2 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.
Number of
supported
VCTRUNKs
24
Mapping
granularities
Supports the following adjacent concatenation granularities:
VC4-Xv (X8), VC3-Xv (X24), and VC4-4c.
Encapsulation
format
Supports the GFP-F protocol, which meets ITU-T G.7041.
System

4-33

Function and
Feature
EAS2
EVPL services


Supports EVPL services based on VCTRUNK+VLAN.


EPLAN services


Supports the setting and query of the aging time of the MAC
address

Supports the configuration of static MAC routes.
EVPLAN services

Supports EVPLAN services that use the stack VLAN
encapsulation.

the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU.
VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ, which comply with IEEE 802.1q/p.
QoS function Supports the CAR.
The granularity is 64kbit/s.
Flow control
function
IEEE 802.3x.
Multicast function
(IGMP snooping)

Supports the enabling of the IGMP snooping protocol. Supports a
maximum of 512 multicast groups.

Supports the query of the enabling status of the IGMP snooping
protocol.

Supports the setting and query of the IGMP snooping protocol
parameters.

Supports a maximum of 512 static multicast groups.
RSTP Supports the broadcast packet suppression and RSTP, which comply
with IEEE 802.1w.
service, and LT test. The ETH-OAM function complies with IEEE
802.1ag.
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation for
Ethernet links and VCTRUNKs.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Function and
Feature
EAS2
Inter-board link
aggregation
Test frames Supports test frames in ETH and GFP bearer modes.
Loopback function Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY or MAC layer).
Protection schemes Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet service
layer:

STP/RSTP

LCAS

LPT

LAG

DLAG
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
(RMON)

Supports the Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.

Supports the query of the rate of a port.
Alarms and
performance events
Provides various alarm and performance events, which facilitates the

4.1.3 Application
The OptiX OSN 3500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission
platform.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following types of Ethernet services:

EPL Service

EVPL Service

EPLAN Service

EVPLAN Service
EPL Service
The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As
shown in Figure 4-1, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination
node through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also protected by the
SDH self-healing ring (SHR). This ensures the secure and reliable transmission of services.
System

4-35

Figure 4-1 EPL service based on port
VCTRUNK 1
PORT1
PORT2
VCTRUNK 1
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2
POTR1
A
NE 1 NE 2
B
PORT2
OptiX OSN
equipment
Enterprise
user
A
B

EVPL Service
The OptiX OSN 3500 adopts two ways to support EVPL services.

Port-shared EVPL services. The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share a
bandwidth.
As shown in Figure 4-2, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service according
to VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs from different departments of Company A.
The two traffics are transmitted in respective VCTRUNKs.
Figure 4-2 Port-shared EVPL services
Headquarters of
company A
OptiX OSN
equipment
Enterprise
user
NE 1 NE 2
PORT1
PORT2
VLAN100
PORT1
VLAN100
VLAN200
VLAN200
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
Department 1
Department 2

VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. OptiX OSN 3500 adopts three ways to realize
convergence and distribution of EVPL services.
EVPL services based on VLAN ID, as shown in Figure 4-3.
EVPL services based on MPLS, as shown in Figure 4-4.
EVPL services based on QinQ, as shown in Figure 4-5.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 4-3 EVPL service based on VLAN ID
Community
user
Cyber cafe
user
OptiX OSN
equipment
VCTRUNK
A
A'
NE 1 NE 2
B
VLAN100
VLAN200
VLAN100
VLAN200
1 PORT2
1
PORT
PORT
PORT2
B'

Figure 4-4 EVPL service based on MPLS
NE 1 NE 2
P PE
P PE
VCTRUNK1
PORT2
PORT1 PORT1
PORT2
`
Add label
Department B
Department
A
Branch 1
Company A
OptiX OSN
equipment
Strip label
Branch 2
Department B
Department A

Figure 4-5 EVPL service based on QinQ
NE 1 NE 2
VCTRUNK1
PORT2
PORT1 PORT1
PORT2
`
C-Aware S-Aware S-Aware C-Aware
Company A
OptiX OSN
equipment
Add label Strip label
Department
B
Department
A
Branch 1
Branch 2
Department
B
Department
A

System

4-37

EPLAN Service
Through the EPLAN service, NEs can communicate with each other and dynamically share a
bandwidth, the OptiX OSN 3500 adopts virtual bridge (VB) to support Layer 2 switching of
Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN service.
Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media access
control (MAC) address table. The system updates the table by self-learning. The data packets
are transmitted over the mapping VCTRUNK according to the destination MAC address, as
shown in Figure 4-6.
Figure 4-6 EPLAN service
NE 1
NE 2
NE3
1
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
PORT1
VCTRUNK1
PORT1
PORT1 VB
VB
VB
Port 1
Department 3 of
company A
Port 1
Department 1 of
company A
Access
point
Company A
OptiX OSN
equipment
Port 1
Department 2 of
company A

EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and the data packets in the same
VLAN are isolated from each other. When the data services with the same VLAN ID are
accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the EVPLAN service can
meet the service requirements.
As shown in Figure 4-7, the Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 adopt
VB+S-VLAN filter table to support the EVPLAN services.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 4-7 EVPLAN service
NE 1
NE 2
NE3
PORT1
PORT2
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
LSP
LSP PORT1
PORT2
V
C
T
R
U
N
K
1
P
O
R
T
1
P
O
R
T
2
V
C
T
R
U
N
K
2
S-Aware S-Aware
S-Aware
C-Aware
S-Aware
C-Aware
VB
VB
VB
Port 1
Department 3
of company B
Department 3
of company A
Port 2
Port 1
Port 1
Port 2
Department 2
of company B
Department 2
of company A Department 1
of company B
Department 1
of company A
Acess
point
Company A Company B
OptiX OSN
equipment
Port 2
C-Aware

4.1.4 Protection
OptiX OSN 3500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services.
The optical transmission layer supports MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
The protection schemes supported at the Ethernet service layer are as follows:

LCAS
The LCAS enables the configuration of system capacity, the increase and decrease of
the concatenated VC quantity, the dynamic change of bearer bandwidth (services are
not damaged during the dynamic change) and protects and restores failed members.

STP/RSTP
The Ethernet boards support the spanning tree protocol (STP) and the rapid spanning
tree protocol (RSTP). When the STP or the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the
network topology to prevent a broadcast storm. The STP or the RSTP realizes link
protection by restructuring the topology.

Tributary protection switching (TPS)
The TPS provides equipment level protection for tributary services. When a protected
board becomes faulty, its services are switched to the protection board. This ensures a
reliable operation of the equipment.
For details, refer to 3.2.4.1 TPS Protection.

Board protection switching (BPS)
The BPS is a board-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a
standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or
System

4-39

detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches all the services
from the active board to the standby board to realize the service protection.

Port protection switching (PPS)
The PPS is a port-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a
standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or
detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches the services of one
or more affected ports to the standby boards. In this case, a protection switching for
the entire board is not necessary.

Link aggregation group (LAG)
A link aggregation group (LAG) bundles multiple links that are connected to the
same equipment, to increase the bandwidth and improve the link reliability. An LAG
can be regarded as one link.

DLAG
The DLAG requires two boards. One board is the working board and the other is the
protection board. During switching, only the affected ports are switched and the other
ports are not switched. The equipment configured with the DLAG should be
connected to the equipment where the LACP is running. When any intermediate node
is between two equipment sets where the DLAG is configured, the intermediated
node should support the transparent transmission of the protocol packets. The DLAG
can be of modes: revertive or non-revertive.

LPT
The link state pass through (LPT) is a link-based protection scheme. In a network,
when the active and standby ports between routers belong to different links, the LPT
function is available for protection. When the working link becomes faulty, the LPT
function shuts down the local port so that the opposite router knows that the working
link is abnormal. As a result, services are switched from the active port to the standby
port. Thus, these services are protected.
The DLAG can be of modes: Strict or Non-strict.
At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected by the MSP, SNCP,
SNCMP and SNCTP schemes. For details, refer to 3.2.5.2 MSP Ring and 3.2.5.3 SNCP.
4.2 RPR Features
The RPR of the OptiX OSN 3500 is suitable for the ring topology. The RPR can quickly
recover Ethernet services from a fiber cut or a link failure.
The main features of the RPR are as follows:

Provide the topology auto-discovery function to reflect the network status in real time.

Support fairness algorithm by configurable weight and support five service levels.

Support a maximum of 255 nodes in the ring network and support stripping at the
destination node.

Solve the fairness and congestion control problems.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Provide RPR protection.
The RPR defined by IEEE 802.17 uses a dual-ring topology in which the two rings are in
reverse directions, as shown in Figure 4-8. The outer ring and the inner ring transmit data
packets and control packets. Hence, this increases the bandwidth utilization. The control
packets on the inner ring carry the control information on the outer ring, and the control
packets on the outer ring carry the control information on the inner ring. The two rings protect
each other.
Figure 4-8 RPR ring
Outer ring control
Node 1
Node 4
Node 3
Node 2 2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Inner ring data
Outer ring data
Inner ring control

4.2.1 Functions
The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatial
reuse and fairness algorithm.
4.2.2 Application
The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services.
4.2.3 Protection
The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected by various protection schemes.
4.2.1 Functions
The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatial
reuse and fairness algorithm.
Basic Functions
The EMR0 and EGR2 boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support the RPR features defined by
IEEE 802.17. Table 4-13 lists the basic functions of the RPR boards.
System

4-41

Table 4-13 Function list of RPR boards
Function N2EMR0 N2EGR2
Interface 1 GE and 12 FE 2 GE
Service frame format Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
16 VC-4 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Mapping granularity VC-3: VC-3-xv (X2); VC-4: VC-4-xv (X8)
EVPL Supported
EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported
Stack VLAN Supported
VLAN Supports 4096 VLAN tags, and the adding, deleting, and
exchange of VLAN tags; compliant with IEEE 802.1q.
Spanning tree Supports RSTP and STP
IGMP Snooping Supported
RPR protection Supports the steering, wrapping, wrapping+steering protection
schemes, with the protection switching time being less than 50
ms.
Encapsulation GFP-F, compliant with ITU-T G.7041.
LAPS, compliant with ITU-T X.86.
LCAS Supported, compliant with ITU-T G.7042
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
Flow control Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.3X
QoS traffic classification The N2EMR0 and N2EGR2 boards support traffic
classification based on port, port+VLAN ID or port+VLAN
ID+VLAN PRI.
Intra-board link
aggregation
Supported
Weighted fairness
algorithm
Supported
Topology auto-discovery Supported
Maximum number of
nodes
255
Service class Five classes: A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR and C

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Service Class
The user data has three classes, which are A, B and C. On an RPR ring, Class A is further
divided into the A0 and A1 subclasses. Class B is also divided into the B_CIR (committed
information rate) and B_EIR (excess information rate) subclasses.
Table 4-14 lists the differences among these classes.
Table 4-14 RPR service class
Class Subclass Bandwidth Jitter Fairness
Algorithm
Application
A0 Pre-allocated,
irreclaimable
Low Irrelevant Real-time
services
A
A1 Pre-allocated,
reclaimable
Low Irrelevant Real-time
services
B_CIR Pre-allocated,
reclaimable
Medium Irrelevant Near real-time
services
B
B_EIR Preemptible, not
pre-allocated
High Relevant Near real-time
services
C C Preemptible, not
pre-allocated
High Relevant Best effort
transmission

Topology Auto-Discovery
The topology auto-discovery protocol provides an accurate and reliable method to quickly
discover the topologies and their changes, for all the nodes in a ring network. Hence, the
topology auto-discovery realizes the plug and play feature for the RPR.
To increase or decrease the total bandwidth of an RPR, you can use the LCAS function, which
realizes the dynamic increase and decrease of bandwidth without affecting the existing
services.
Spatial Reuse
On an RPR, the stripping of unicast frames at the destination node realizes the spatial reuse
for ring bandwidth. As shown in Figure 4-9, the bandwidth of a single ring is 1.25 Gbit/s.
Traffic 1 sent from Node 1 to Node 4 is stripped from the ring at the destination Node 4, and
thus the bandwidth behind Node 4 is left unused. In this case, Node 4 is able to send traffic to
Node 3 at a 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. In this way, the bandwidth utilization is improved.
System

4-43

Figure 4-9 Spatial reuse
Node 1
Bandwidth of single ring is
1.25Gbit/s
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Traffic 1
1.25 Gbit/s
Traffic 2
1.25 Gbit/s

Fairness Algorithm
The outer ring and the inner ring of an RPR support independent weighted fairness algorithm.
The fairness algorithm ensures the fair access of lower-class B_EIR and C services. The
weight in the fairness algorithm is configurable so that different nodes can have different
access rates. Weights need to be set for a node on the outer ring and the inner ring separately.
In the case of preemptible bandwidth, these two weights decide the bandwidth at which the
node transmits lower-class services on the inner ring and the outer ring.
As shown in Figure 4-10, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1. On the outer
ring, assume that the preemptible bandwidth that is available for lower-class services is 1.2
Gbit/s. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 400 Mbit/s each for the lower-class
services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.
Figure 4-11 shows a fairness algorithm with different weights, that is, the weights of Nodes 2,
3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1, 3 and 2 respectively. In this case, the fairness algorithm
allocates 200 Mbit/s, 600 Mbit/s, and 400 Mbit/s bandwidths for the lower-class services
transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 4-10 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1
Node 1
Node 2
Node 5
Node 6
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
1
2
2
3
Traffic Bandwidth
400 Mbit/s
400 Mbit/s
400 Mbit/s
1
Node3
Node4
Node Weight
Node2 1
1
1
Node 3
3

Figure 4-11 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different
Node 1
Node 2
Node 5
Node 6
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
1
2
Node 3
3
Node3
Node4
Node
Weight
Node2
1
3
2
2
3
Traffic
Bandwidth
400 Mbit/s
600 Mbit/s
200 Mbit/s
1

4.2.2 Application
The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services.
EVPL Service
The EVPL service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and
encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the MPLS MartinioE format.
System

4-45

Figure 4-12 illustrates the accessing, forwarding and stripping of a unidirectional EVPL
service. Node 2 adds the tunnel and VC labels into the packet, and sends the packet onto the
RPR. Node 3 forwards the packet to the destination Node 4, which then strips the packet.
Figure 4-13 illustrates the EVPL service convergence, in which the traffic classification is
based on port+VLAN so that multiple services can be converged at the GE port of Node 1.
Figure 4-12 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping
Node 1
Node 3
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Action
Tunnel
VC
Destination
Insertion
100
100
Node 4
LSP
Action
Tunnel
VC
Stripping
100
100
Action Forwarding
Node 4
FE/GE FE/GE
Node 2

Figure 4-13 EVPL service convergence
Node 1
Node 3
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
FE
FE
GE
Node 2 Node 4
Traffic Tunnel Destination
Port1+VLAN 2
VC
200 Node 2 200
Port1+VLAN 3 300 Node 3 300
Port1+VLAN 4 400 Node 4 400
FE
VLAN 2
VLAN 3
VLAN 4
VLAN 4
VLAN 3
VLAN 2

EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and
encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the stack VLAN format. The EVPLAN service is
realized by creating virtual bridges (VBs) in the board. The VB supports the self-learning of
source MAC addresses and the configuration of static MAC routes.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 4-14 shows an example of the EVPLAN service. Port rpr1 is where the packets are
accessed onto the RPR. By address self-learning, the VB of each node determines the
forwarding port and the destination node of the packets. At Node 1, if the destination MAC
address of the packets is A1, the packets are forwarded through Port 1. If the destination
address is A2, the packets are forwarded through Port 2. If the destination address is B1, B2 or
C1, the packets are forwarded onto the RPR through Port rpr1, added with a stack VLAN tag
whose value is 100. Node 2 forwards packets in the same way.
Figure 4-14 RPR EVPLAN service
A2
Node 1
Node 3
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 2 Node 4
MAC stack VLAN Port
A1 none
A2 none port 2
B1 100 rpr1
Port 1
B2 100 rpr1
C1 100 rpr1
Port 2
Port 1
Port 2
Port 1
A1
B1
B2
C1
port 1
MAC forwarding table of node 1
MAC forwarding table of node 2
A2
MAC stack VLAN Port
A1 100
A2 100 rpr1
B1 none port 1
B2 none port 2
C1 100 rpr1
rpr1

4.2.3 Protection
The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected by various protection schemes.
The protection schemes of the RPR services include:

Wrapping, steering and wrapping+steering
When a failure is detected on the ring, the wrapping function performs an automatic
loopback at the nodes that are adjacent to the failure point, to connect the inner ring
and the outer ring. The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantages
of this protection scheme are enhanced protection speed and minimal loss of data,
and the disadvantage is the waste of bandwidth.
In the steering protection, switching is not performed at the failure point. Instead, the
source node sends the traffic to the destination node through a new route that is
generated by the topology auto-discovery protocol. If the number of nodes on the ring
is less than 16, the steering protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The
advantage of this protection scheme is that it does not waste bandwidth. The
disadvantage is that, when the network scale is large, the protection switching speed
is low, and some data is discarded before a new route is generated.
In the wrapping+steering protection, when a failure is detected on the ring, the ring
first performs a wrapping switching to ensure the switching speed and decrease the
packet loss. After the topology auto-discovery protocol generates a new ring topology,
the ring performs the steering protection so that the traffic is sent to the destination
through the best route. This reduces the waste of bandwidth.
System

4-47


LCAS
The LCAS function adds and reduces the bandwidth dynamically, and protects the
bandwidth.

RSTP
The RPR boards support the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The RSTP realizes
link protection by restructuring the topology. When the RSTP is started, it logically
modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm.
MSP, SNCP, SNCMP And SNCTP
At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected when the MSP, SNCP,
SNCMP, or SNCTP scheme is used.
For details, refer to 3.2.5.1 Linear MSP, 3.2.5.2 MSP Ring and 3.2.5.3 SNCP.
4.3 ATM Features
This topic describes the functions, application and protection of the ATM features of the
OptiX OSN 3500.
4.3.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4,
ADQ1, IDL4 and IDQ1.
4.3.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.
4.3.3 Protection
The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected at several layers.
4.3.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4,
ADQ1, IDL4 and IDQ1.
An ADL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an ADQ1 board can
access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the
N1PL3/N1PL3A/N1PD3 board, the ADL4 or ADQ1 board can access and process E3 ATM
services.
An IDL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an IDQ1 board can
access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the E1 processing board,
the IDL4 or IDQ1 board can access and process IMA services.
Table 4-15 lists the functions of the ADL4 and ADQ1 boards.
Table 4-16 lists the functions of the IDL4 and IDQ1 boards.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 4-15 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1
Function ADL4 ADQ1
Front panel interface 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1
Optical interface
specification
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and
Ve-4.2
Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and
Ve-1.2
Connector type LC
Optical module type SFP
E3 ATM interface Accesses 12 x E3 services by using the N1PD3 or N1PL3 or
N1PL3A board.
IMA Not supported
Maximum uplink bandwidth 8 VC-4, or 12 VC-3 + 4 VC-4
ATM switching capability 1.2 Gbit/s
Mapping mode VC-3; VC-4: VC-4-xv (x4)
Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR
Number of ATM
connections
2048
Traffic type and QoS IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0
Supported ATM multicast
connections
Spatial multicast and logical multicast
ATM protection Mode
(ITU-T I.630)
1+1, 1:1
ATM protection operation
mode (ITU-T I.630)
Unidirectional, bidirectional
ATM protection level
(ITU-T I.630)
VP-Ring, VC-Ring
OAM function (ITU-T
I.610)
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal), RDI (Remote Defect
Indication), LB (Loopback), CC (Continuity Check)

Table 4-16 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1
Function IDL4 IDQ1
Front panel interface 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1
Optical interface
specification
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and
Ve-4.2
Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and
Ve-1.2
Connector type LC
Optical module type SFP
System

4-49

Function IDL4 IDQ1
E3 ATM interface Not supported
IMA (compliant with ATM
Forum IMA 1.1 standards)
Accesses and processes IMA services when working with
the E1 processing board N1PQ1 or N1PQM or N2PQ1.
Supports a maximum of 63 IMA E1 services.
Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 IMA groups to
the ATM port.
Each IMA group supports 1-32 E1 services. Supports the
mapping of a maximum of 16 E1 links (which are not in any
IMA group) to the ATM port.
Supports a maximum of 226 ms of IMA multipath delay.
Maximum uplink bandwidth 8 VC-4, or 63 VC-12 + 7 VC-4
ATM switching capability 1 Gbit/s
Mapping mode VC-12; VC-4: VC-4-xv (X4)
Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR
Number of ATM
connections
2048
Traffic type and QoS IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0
Supported ATM multicast
connections
Spatial multicast and logical multicast
ATM protection Mode
(ITU-T I.630)
1+1, 1:1
ATM protection operation
mode (ITU-T I.630)
Unidirectional, bidirectional
ATM protection level
(ITU-T I.630)
VP-Ring, VC-Ring
OAM function (ITU-T
I.610)
AIS, RDI, LB, CC
Board level 1+1 protection Supported, with switching time less than 1s

4.3.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.
Supported Services and Traffic Types
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR services, but does not
support ABR services.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

The CBR services apply to voice services, and video services and circuit emulation
services of a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed transmission bandwidth
and latency.

The rt-VBR services apply to audio and video services of a variable bit rate.

The nrt-VBR services are mainly used for data transmission.

The UBR services are generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer.
In terms of the supported services and traffic types, the OptiX OSN 3500 meets IETF
RFC2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNI 3.1 Recommendations. See Table 4-17.
Table 4-17 ATM service types and traffic types
No. Traffic Type Service
Type
Parameter
1 atmNoTrafficDescriptor UBR None
UBR.1 Clp01Pcr 2 atmNoClpNoScr
CBR Clp01Pcr
3 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
4 atmClpTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
5 atmNoClpScr nrt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs
6 atmClpNoTaggingScr nrt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
7 atmClpTaggingScr nrt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
8 atmClpTransparentNoScr CBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
9 atmClpTransparentScr rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
10 atmNoClpTaggingNoScr UBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
UBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt 11 atmNoClpNoScrCdvt
CBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
12 atmNoClpScrCdvt rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
13 atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
14 atmClpTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt

Application of Bandwidth Exclusive ATM Services
When the bandwidth is not shared, ATM services are processed by the ATM service
processing board, at the ATM layer of only the source and sink NEs. On intermediate NEs,
only SDH timeslot pass-through is performed, without ATM layer processing. In this case,
each ATM service exclusively occupies a VC-3 or VC-4 path. At the central node, the ATM
services are converged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output.
As shown in Figure 4-15, the 34 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE3 exclusively occupy a
VC-3 bandwidth each. The 155 Mbit/s ATM service of NE2 exclusively occupies a VC-4
System

4-51

bandwidth, and only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at NE3. After the three
services reach the central station NE4, they are converged by the ATM board and are output
through the 622 Mbit/s optical interface on the front panel.
Figure 4-15 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services
2.5 Gbit/s SDH
Ring
NE 2 NE 4
NE 1
NE 3
34M ATM
34M ATM
Traffic
155M ATM
622M ATM
Service
Convergence
DSLAM
DSLAM
Router
DSLAM
Traffic
Traffic
Traffic

Application of Bandwidth Shared ATM Services
The VR-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical multiplexing for
ATM services. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC (VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv)
path and are processed at the ATM layer of all NEs.
As shown in Figure 4-16, NE1 accesses E3 ATM traffic from the tributary board and sends it
to the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1 or 1:1). Then, after
the traffic is encapsulated into VC-4-xv, it is sent to the line by the cross-connect board. NE2
accesses STM-1 ATM traffic from the optical interface, and then performs the ATM switching
and protection configuration. At the same time, the ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped at NE2
for ATM layer processing. Then, the locally accessed traffic and the traffic from the upstream
are encapsulated into the same VC-4-xv and sent to the downstream NE. The processing at
NE3 and NE4 is similar. One VP-Ring/VC-Ring has a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 4-16 VP-Ring/VC-Ring
VC4-Xv
VP/VC-Ring
NE 2
NE 4
NE 1
NE 3
34M ATM
Traffic
34M ATM
Traffic
155M ATM
Traffic
622M ATM
Traffic
The ATM traffic fromNE1 is dropped to
the NE2,and then sent to VP/VC-Ring
after converged with local service.
DSLAM
DSLAM
Router
DSLAM

Application of IMA Services
The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to demultiplex an ATM
integrated cell flow into several lower rate links. At the other end, the lower rate links are
multiplexed to recover the original integrated cell flow.
The IMA technology is applicable when ATM cells are transmitted through an interface of the
E1 rate or other rates. The IMA technology only provides a path, and does not process service
types and ATM cells. The signals at the ATM layer and a higher layer are transparently
transmitted.
Figure 4-17 illustrates the IMA service networking.
Figure 4-17 IMA service networking
STM-16 two-fiber
bidirectional MSP
ring
T2000
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
25km
35km
30km
40km
RNC
NodeB 1
NodeB 3
NodeB 2
NodeB 4

System

4-53

4.3.3 Protection
The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected at several layers.
The protections that are available are as follows:

ATM layer protections
The ATM layer protections are classified in different ways. You can select a
combination of the following protection types as required, for example, 1+1
bidirectional non-revertive protection.

Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP
The ATM service is also protected by the self-healing network at the optical
transmission layer, where the protection schemes include MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and
SNCTP. You can set the hold-off time for the ATM protection switching. In this way,
when network impairment occurs, the MSP, SNCP , SNCMP or SNCTP at the optical
transmission layer performs the switching first, thus achieving the protection of the
working ATM service (in this case, the protection switching at the ATM layer is not
performed).
For details, refer to 3.2.5.1 Linear MSP, 3.2.5.2 MSP Ring and 3.2.5.3 SNCP.

1+1 board level protection for IMA boards
The IDQ1 and IDL4 boards support the 1+1 board level protection.
4.4 DDN Features
This topic describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX OSN
3500.
4.4.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 3500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface
board to access and process DDN services.
4.4.2 Application
When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 3500,
the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.
4.4.3 Protection
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides TPS protection for DDN services.
4.4.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 3500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface
board to access and process DDN services.
Table 4-18 lists the functions and features of the DDN.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 4-18 Functions and features of DDN
Board Feature Description
Processing
capability
Processes eight N x 64 kbit/s and eight framed E1 services, and
cross-connects 48 x 64 kbit/s and 63 x 64 kbit/s signals at the
system side.
Bandwidth at SDH
side
48 x E1,and 63 x E1.
Interface
specifications
N x 64 bit/s interface: RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24 and
X.21.Framed E1 interface: CRC4 and non-CRC4.
Interface impedance 75 ohms or 120 ohms.
Connector type The connectors are on the DM12 board. The DB28 connector is
used for N x 64 bit/s signals, and the DB44 connector is used for
framed E1 signals.
Protection Supports 1:N(N8) TPS protection with the switching time being
less than 50 ms.
Loopback Supports inloop and outloop for all the ports.
PRBS self-test Supported.
Alarm and
performance
A large number of alarms and performance events are provided to
facilitate the equipment management and maintenance.

4.4.2 Application
When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 3500,
the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.
The N1DX1 and the N1DXA boards are mainly used for the following functions, so various
services such as RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21 and framed E1 can be accessed
to a transmission network.

Point-to-point transmission for video conferences and routers

Point-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers

Multipoint-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers

Access and convergence of multipoint routers
The N1DX1 and N1DXA boards are applicable to DDN private networks for small-sized and
medium-sized enterprises, government agencies, and banking and security service halls.
System

4-55

Figure 4-18 DDN networking and application
Enterprise user OptiX NE
4 x 64k
NG-SDH
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
Frame E1
Frame E1
4 x 64k Headquarters
of company A
Headquarters
of company B
Branch of
company A
Branch of
company B

As shown in Figure 4-18, point-to-point transmission of Nx64 kbit/s services can be
performed between the headquarters and branches of Company A, and point-to-point
transmission of framed E1 services can be performed between the headquarters and branches
of Company B. The Nx64 kbit/s services of Company A and framed E1 services of Company
B can also be transmitted in hybrid mode over the NG-SDH network.
For details, see the Planning Guide.
4.4.3 Protection
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides TPS protection for DDN services.
In TPS protection, when any working board is faulty or not in position, the DDN services are
switched to the protection board. This ensures the reliable operation of the equipment.
For details, refer to 3.2.4.1 TPS Protection.
4.5 SAN Features
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board,
N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and DVB-ASI services.
The detailed description of the N1MST4 board is as follows:

The N1MST4 board provides four independent multiservice access ports. All the port
connectors are of the LC (SFP) type.

Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x FC (FC100/FICON and FC200)
services, with the total bandwidth of not more than 2.5 Gbit/s. The board also supports
the full-rate transmission of FC services, which means that one FC200 (2125 Mbit/s)
service or two FC100 services are supported.

The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the SDH side.
FC100 (1062.5 Mbit/s )supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports 1500 km.

The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the client side.
FC100 supports 40 km, and FC200 supports 20 km.

Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x ESCON (200 Mbit/s)or 4 x
DVB-ASI (270 Mbit/s) services.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

All services are encapsulated in the GFP-T format, which is compliant with ITU-T
G.7041. All services are mapped into VC-4 or VC-4-xc (x=4, 8, or 16).
For details, refer to Functions and Features in Hardware Description.
System
Product Description 5 ASON Features

5-1

5 ASON Features
About This Chapter
The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei. The
OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, the traditional
network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product series support the
ASON features.
5.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies
The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the control
links and TE links.
5.2 End-to-End Service Configuration
The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient.
5.3 Routing Computation Policies
The ASON supports the routing computation policies based on the factors, such as bandwidth,
distance, hop count, and customized link cost. The user can select different routing
computation policies based on the service.
5.4 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration
The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and network
security.
5.5 ASON Clock Tracing
ASON NEs support both the traditional clock tracing mode and the ASON clock tracing mode.
In an ASON domain, some or all ASON NEs can be set with the ASON clock tracing mode.
In this way, these ASON NEs form an ASON clock subnet.
5.6 SLA
The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.
5.7 Diamond Services
Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources in the
network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are
applicable to voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking, security and aviation.
5.8 Gold Services
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with diamond
services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization.
5.9 Silver Services
Silver services, the revertive time is hundreds of milliseconds to several seconds. The silver
level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement.
5.10 Copper Services
The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt
services in holidays, are configured as copper services.
5.11 Iron Services
The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured as iron
services. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the services can be
configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources.
5.12 Tunnels
Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as ASON
server trails.
5.13 OVPN
In the case of an optical virtual private network (OVPN), multiple operators share one ASON.
When multiple operators share one ASON, different TE link resources are allocated to each
operator. In this case, an operator can use and manage its own TE link resources and ASON
services only. The operators are called OVPN customers.
5.14 UNI Services
A UNI service is an ASON service that is created automatically after the customer equipment
initiates a request to the ASON equipment and the signaling is received. UNI services can be
classified into Ethernet UNI services and SDH UNI services.
5.15 Service Association
The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different
points into the ASON network.
5.16 Service Optimization
After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and
thus requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP,
switching the optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and
optimize the service without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be
restricted during the service optimization.
5.17 Service Migration
OptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON services
and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would not
interrupt the services.
5.18 Reverting Services to Original Routes
After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes.
You can revert all service to the original routes.
5.19 Preset Restoring Trail
System

5-3

Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. To
this end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This
function helps increase the controllability of service routing. The preset restoring trail
information is stored only on the control plane and does not require the actual resources.
5.20 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail
For a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of rerouting, the
silver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a restoration trail is called a
shared mesh restoration trail.
5.21 Shared Risk Link Group
In the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one
cable.
5.22 Amalgamation of ASON and LCAS
The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.
5.23 Merging an ASON Network with a Traditional SDH Network
An ASON network can be used with an SDH network to form a hybrid network. In this case,
an end-to-end service can be managed and created in a centralized manner.
5.24 Built-in WDM Technology
The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission of
several wavelengths in one fiber.
5.25 Microwave Technology
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the built-in microwave boards of intermediate frequency. It
can work with the outdoor unit (ODU) of the OptiX RTN 600 to achieve wireless service
transmission.
5.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies
The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the control
links and TE links.
5.1.1 Auto-Discovery of ASON NEs
In the ASON network, the OSPF protocol discovers ASON NEs automatically by sending the
protocol packets.
5.1.2 Auto-Discovery of Control Links
The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol.
5.1.3 Auto-Discovery of TE Links
The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.
5.1.1 Auto-Discovery of ASON NEs
In the ASON network, the OSPF protocol discovers ASON NEs automatically by sending the
protocol packets.
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

After discovering the neighbor NEs, the OSPF protocol floods the information about the
neighbor NEs to other NEs. In the end, every ASON NE in the domain has the information
about all ASON NEs in the entire network.

When an ASON NE is added to an ASON network, other NEs are able to automatically
discover the new NE by using the OSPF protocol.

When an ASON NE is removed from an ASON network (for example, power off the NE,
remove the SCC board, or shut down the physical channel), other NEs are able to
automatically detect the missing of this NE.
5.1.2 Auto-Discovery of Control Links
The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol.
When the fiber connection is complete in an ASON network, each ASON NE uses the OSPF
protocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about its own control
links to the entire network. See Figure 5-1. As a result, each NE obtains the information of the
control links in the entire network and also obtains the information about the network-wide
control topology. The following figure shows the details. Each ASON NE then computes the
shortest route to any ASON NE and writes these routes into the route forwarding table, which
is used for the signaling RSVP to transmit and receive packets.
Figure 5-1 Auto-discovery of control links
ASON Domain

When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete, ASON NEs automatically
discover the network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the
management system for real-time display. See Figure 5-2.
System

5-5

Figure 5-2 Management of control topology
R1
R2
R3
R4
: ASON NE
: User equipment

5.1.3 Auto-Discovery of TE Links
The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.
After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP, the TE
link verification can be started. Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the entire network
through OSPF-TE. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links, that is, the network-wide
resource topology, which provides the service topology information for computing routes.
ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time, including the deletion
and addition of links, and the change in the link parameters, and then reports the change to
T2000, which performs a real-time refresh.
As shown in Figure 5-3, if one TE link is cut, the NM updates the resource topology displayed
on the NM in real time.
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 5-3 TE link auto-discovery
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4

5.2 End-to-End Service Configuration
The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient.
The ASON supports both SDH permanent connections and end-to-end ASON services. To
configure an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node, sink node, bandwidth
requirement, and protection level. Service routing and cross-connection at intermediate nodes
are all automatically completed by the network. You can also set explicit node, excluded node,
explicit link and excluded link to constrain the service routing.
Compared with the service configuration of SDH networks, it fully utilizes the routing and
signaling functions of the ASON NEs and thus it is convenient to configure services.
For example, consider the configuration of a 155 Mbit/s ASON service between A and I in
Figure 5-4. The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures
cross-connection at nodes A, D, E and I. Although there is more than one route from A to I,
the network calculates the best route according to the configured algorithm. It is assumed that
A-D-E-I is the best route.
The service is created as follows:

Choose the bandwidth granularity.

Choose the server level.

Choose the source node.

Choose the sink node.

Create the service.
System

5-7

Figure 5-4 End-to-end service configuration
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I

5.3 Routing Computation Policies
The ASON supports the routing computation policies based on the factors, such as bandwidth,
distance, hop count, and customized link cost. The user can select different routing
computation policies based on the service.
The ASON supports the following routing computation policies.

If the OptiX GCP is of a version later than V100R007C02, the user can adopt the "Custom Cost" to
define the cost of each link according to the quality and condition of the fibers in use. If the user expects
certain links to be used more often, these links can be set with smaller customized cost. "Custom Cost"
is set to 0 by default, with a range of 0 to 100.

Most balanced bandwidth

Shortest distance

Smallest hop count

Smallest customized link cost

Combination of the preceding four policies
If the weight of a factor is set to 0, this factor is not considered during the routing computation.
After the user sets the weight for each factor, the system adds different weights for each factor
so that they can be used for the routing computation.
5.4 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration
The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and network
security.
As a main networking mode of ASON, mesh features high flexibility and scalability.
Compared with the traditional SDH networking mode, the mesh networking does not need to
reserve 50% bandwidth. Thus, it can save bandwidth resources to satisfy increasingly large
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

bandwidth demand. In addition, this networking mode also provides more than one recovery
route for each services so it can best utilize the network resources and enhance the network
security.
As shown in Figure 5-5, when the C-G link fails, to restore the service, the network calculates
another route from D to H and creates a new LSP to transmit the service.
Figure 5-5 Trail restoration
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I

5.5 ASON Clock Tracing
ASON NEs support both the traditional clock tracing mode and the ASON clock tracing mode.
In an ASON domain, some or all ASON NEs can be set with the ASON clock tracing mode.
In this way, these ASON NEs form an ASON clock subnet.
In an ASON clock subnet, each ASON NE automatically traces the best clock source. The
clock is then automatically traced and switched. In this way, clock interlock is avoided. In
addition, the clock configuration is simplified. For an ASON domain with many ASON NEs,
several ASON clock subnets should be created if more than 20 ASON NEs are on the clock
tracing link in a clock subnet. Each ASON clock subnet generates its own clock tracing
relation to trace the primary source in the local subnet. In each ASON clock subnet, the
change of primary source and link does not affect the clock tracing relation in other ASON
clock subnets. Generally, one ASON clock subnet is created in one ASON domain.
Advantages of the ASON Clock Tracing
The ASON clock tracing has the following advantages.

Simple configuration: For one ASON clock subnet, only the primary clock need be
created to realize auto-tracing and auto-switching of the clock.
System

5-9

Auto-tracing and auto-switching: In an ASON clock subnet, the clock has the
auto-tracing and auto-switching features.

The ASON tracing avoids the clock interlock.
Clock Protection Protocol
To realize the ASON clock tracing, all ASON NEs within the ASON clock subnet must start
the standard SSM protocol.
Primary Reference Clock Source
Within the ASON clock subnet, the ASON software automatically sets the clock tracing
relation. At the edge of an ASON clock subnet, the external clock source, or internal clock
source of edge NEs should be manually set as the primary reference clock source for the
ASON clock subnet. The following clock sources can be set as the primary clock reference
source.

Line clock source

External clock source

Internal clock source of edge NEs
For one ASON clock subnet, several primary reference clock sources can be set. The ASON
clock subnet, however, traces only one of these primary reference clock sources. The other
clock sources back up the traced clock source. When the selected primary reference clock
source fails, the entire subnet automatically traces another backup primary reference clock
source. In this way, a new clock tracing tree is established. A priority should be set for the
primary reference clock source.
As shown in Figure 5-6, in an ASON clock subnet, primary and secondary clock sources are
configured at NE A and NE B respectively. Other ASON NEs in the ASON clock subnet
automatically create clock tracing trees by computation. In this way, the entire subnet traces
the primary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous. When the primary BITS fails,
each ASON NE creates the clock tracing tree by re-computation. In this way, the entire subnet
traces the secondary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous.
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 5-6 ASON clock subnet
Primary base
clock source Standby base
clock source
A
BITS
BITS
B
:ASON NE
: BITS

Interfacing Mode
By default, the ASON software automatically creates the clock tracing tree according to the
network topology. In this way, each ASON NE then can automatically trace an available clock
source. If necessary, set the interfacing mode of some optical interfaces to the clock quality
not detected mode to adjust the clock tracing tree. In this way, these optical interfaces are
excluded from the options of the clock tracing sources for ASON NEs.
Regeneration Source
A regeneration source is a device used to regenerate clock signals. If an NE is configured with
such a device, the system tracing clock of the NE is strengthened and the quality of the
out-link clock is increased. During the computation for creating the clock tracing tree, the
clock signals strengthened by the regeneration source are selected with priority.
For configuration of the regeneration source, 2M input and output interfaces are used. An NE
receives the upstream clock signals and outputs them to the regeneration device. The
regenerated clock signals then return to the NE through the 2M input interface. The clock then
works as the system tracing clock for the NE. In this way, clock signals are strengthened and
the line clock signals output from the NE are also strengthened.
Clock Tracing Relation in the ASON Clock Subnet
The clock tracing relation in the ASON clock subnet is as follows:

The ASON clock subnet take priority to trace the primary source of the highest clock
quality.

If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality, the ASON clock
subnet traces the primary reference clock source of the highest priority.
System

5-11

If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality and priority, the
ASON clock subnet traces the clock source in the trail with the least hops to generate
multiple clock tracing trees. In this way, too long clock tracing trail is avoided.

If all the primary reference clock sources are invalid, the ASON clock subnet traces the
internal clock source with the smallest node ID. Thus, clocks in the entire network are
synchronized.
Hybrid Network of the ASON Clock Subnet and Traditional Clock Subnet
If the traditional clock subnet works in the SSM disabled mode, you should configure the
quality and priority of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet.
If the traditional clock network works in the standard SSM mode, you should configure only
the priority of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet.
If the traditional clock subnet works in the extended SSM mode, you should only modify the
subnet to the standard SSM mode, and then form a hybrid network with the ASON clock
subnet.
Modifying the Traditional ASON Subnet to the ASON Clock Subnet
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the SSM disabled
mode, you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the quality and priority of the
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the standard SSM
mode, you should directly create the ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the extended SSM
mode, you should modify the extended SSM mode to the standard SSM mode. Then you
should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the primary reference
clock source.
5.6 SLA
The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.
The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the service
protection, as listed in Table 5-1. The rerouting time depends on the equipment type, the
number of interrupted services, the network resources, the network settings, and other factors.
Hence, the following data is for reference only.
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 5-1 Service level
Service Diamond
service
Gold service Silver
service
Copper
service
Iron service
Protection
and
Restoratio
n Scheme
Supports the
protection and
restoration.
Permanent
protection is
provided only
if the network
bandwidth is
available. For
the
non-rerouting
diamond
service, the
interrupted
service cannot
be restored
even when the
bandwidth is
available.
Supports the
protection and
restoration.
The event is
protection in
most cases,
but is
restoration
sometimes.
Supports
the
restoratio
n. The
trail is
computed
in real
time. The
protection
trail need
not be set
in
advance.
Does not
support
the
protectio
n. The
interrupte
d service
cannot be
restored.
Supports the
preemption.
After the trail is
preempted, the
service is
interrupted until
the preemption
is released.
Implement
ation
Means
SNCP and
rerouting
MSP and
rerouting
rerouting Non-prot
ection
Non-protection
Switching
and
Rerouting
Time

Switching
time < 50ms

The rerouting
time ranges
from
hundreds of
milliseconds
to several
seconds.

Switching
time < 50ms

The
rerouting
time ranges
from
hundreds of
milliseconds
to several
seconds.
The
rerouting
time
ranges
from
hundreds
of
milliseco
nds to
several
seconds.
- -
Bandwidth
utilization
Low Medium High Very high Very high
Cost Very high High Medium Low Very low
Applicable
service
type
Private lines
for banks,
securities, and
important
government
departments,
voice services
PSTN, GSM
voice services
(in the case of
a ring
network)
IP data
private
lines for
common
customers
,
communit
y
broadban
d services
Temporar
y service
requirem
ents
Temporary
service
requirements
System

5-13

Table 5-2 lists details of the TE links used by ASON services.
Table 5-2 TE links used by ASON services
Service Level Working
Resource of TE
Link
Protection
Resource of TE
Link
Non-Protection
Resource of TE
Link
Service
creation
Not used Not used Used
Service
rerouting
Not used Used when the
resource is not
enough
Used with the priority
Diam
ond
servic
e
Service
optimization
Service
creation
Used with the
priority
resource is not enough
Service
rerouting
Used with the
priority
Used when the
resource is not
enough
Used when the
Gold
servic
e
Service
optimization
Used with the
priority
Service
creation
Service
rerouting
resource is not
enough
Used with the priority
Silver
servic
e
Service
optimization
Service
creation
Not used Not used Used Copp
er
servic
e
Service
optimization
Service
creation
Not used Used with the
priority
Used when the
Iron
servic
e
Service
optimization
Not used Used with the
priority
Used when the

5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

5.7 Diamond Services
Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources in the
network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are
applicable to voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking, security and aviation.
A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink node. It is
also called a 1+1 service. For a diamond service, there are two different LSPs available
between the source node and the sink node. The two LSPs should be as separate as possible.
One is the working LSP and the other is the protection LSP. The same service is transmitted to
the working LSP and the protection LSP at the same time. If the working LSP is normal, the
sink node receives the service from the working LSP; otherwise, from the protection LSP.
Figure 5-7 shows a diamond service.
Figure 5-7 Diamond Services
:ASON NE
:User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Protection LSP
Working LSP

There are three types of diamond services.

Permanent 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered once an LSP fails.

Rerouting 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered only when both LSPs fail.

Non-rerouting diamond service: rerouting is never triggered.
Table 5-3 lists the attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond service.
Table 5-4 lists the attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
Table 5-5 lists the attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
System

5-15

Table 5-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services
Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements for
creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the
source node and the sink node.
Protection and
restoration

If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always available
for a permanent 1+1 diamond service. One is the active LSP
and the other is the standby LSP.

If the resources are not sufficient, one LSP can still be reserved
for a permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure the service
survivability.
Rerouting

Supports rerouting lockout.

Supports rerouting priority.

Supports four rerouting policies:
Use existing trails whenever possible
Do not use existing trails whenever
possible
No rerouting constraint
Use simulated section restoration
Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and
Scheduled revertive.

After the automatically revertive diamond service is rerouted,
the service is automatically reverted to the original path if the
fault in the original path is rectified.

After the scheduled revertive diamond service is rerouted, the
user can set the service to be reverted to the original path at a
specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on
the NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified.

After the non-revertive diamond service is rerouted, the service
is not reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.
Preset restoration trail Supports the preset restoration trail.
Service migration

Supports migration between diamond services and permanent
SNCP connections.

Supports migration between diamond services and gold
services.

Supports migration between diamond services and silver
services.

Supports migration between diamond services and copper
services.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
Service association Does not support service association.
ASON server trail Support diamond ASON server trails.
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Alarms to trigger
rerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,
AU_AIS, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)

Table 5-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements
for creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source
node and the sink node
Protection and
restoration

When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is
not triggered.

When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSP
for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.

When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is triggered
to create a new LSP to restore services.
Rerouting



Use existing trails whenever possible
Do not use existing trails whenever
possible
Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and Scheduled
revertive.

After the automatically revertive diamond service is rerouted, the
service is automatically reverted to the original path if the fault in the
original path is rectified.

After the scheduled revertive diamond service is rerouted, the user
can set the service to be reverted to the original path at a specific
future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on the NMS if the

After the non-revertive diamond service is rerouted, the service is not
reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.
Preset
restoration trail
Supports the preset restoration trail.
Service
migration

Supports migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP
connections.

Supports migration between diamond services and gold services.

Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.

Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.
System

5-17

Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
Service
switching
Supports manual switching.
Service
optimization
Supports service optimization.
Service
association
Does not support service association.
ASON server
trail
Support diamond ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger
rerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS,
B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)

Table 5-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Attribute Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Requirements
for creation
node and the sink node
Protection and
restoration

When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSP
for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.

When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is
not triggered.

When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is not
triggered.
Service
migration

Supports migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP
connections.

Supports migration between diamond services and gold services.

Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.

Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.
Service
switching
Supports manual switching.
Service
optimization
Service
association
Does not support service association.
ASON server
trail
Support diamond ASON server trails.

5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

5.8 Gold Services
Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with diamond
services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization.
A gold service needs only one LSP. This LSP must use working resource of TE links or
non-protection resource of TE links. When a fiber on the path of a gold service is cut, the
ASON triggers MSP switching to protect the service at first. If the multiplex section
protection fails, the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service.
As shown in Figure 5-8, a gold service can be configured from A to I.
Figure 5-8 Gold services
R1
R2
R3
R4
:ASON NE
:User equipment
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
MSP
MSP
MSP
I

Table 5-6 lists the attributes of gold services.
Table 5-6 Attributes of gold services
Attribute Gold Service
Requirements for
creation
Sufficient working resources or non-protection resources are
available between the source node and the sink node.
System

5-19

Multiplex section
protection

Supports using the working resources of a 1:1 linear
multiplex section protection chain to create gold services.

Supports using the working resources of a 1+1 linear

Supports using the working resources of a 1:N linear

Supports using the working resources of a two-fiber
bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold
services.

Supports using the working resources of a four-fiber
bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold
services.
Protection and restoration When a fiber is cut for the first time, MS switching is
performed to protect services. When MS switching fails,
rerouting is then triggered to restore services.
Rerouting



Use existing trails whenever
possible
Do not use existing trails
whenever possible

After the automatically revertive gold service is rerouted, the
service is automatically reverted to the original path if the

After the scheduled revertive gold service is rerouted, the

After the non-revertive gold service is rerouted, the service is
not reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.
Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
Service migration

Supports migration between permanent connections and gold
services.

Supports migration between gold services and diamond
services.

Supports migration between gold services and silver services.

Supports migration between gold services and copper
services.
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
ASON server trail Supports gold ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger
rerouting
AU_AIS, AU_LOP, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)

5.9 Silver Services
Silver services, the revertive time is hundreds of milliseconds to several seconds. The silver
level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement.
Silver services are also called rerouting services. When an LSP failure, the ASON triggers
rerouting to restore the service. If there are not enough resources, service may be interrupted.
As shown in Figure 5-9, A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. If the fiber between B and G is cut,
the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the cut fiber.
Hence, services are protected.
Figure 5-9 A silver service
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
E
LSP after rerouting
Original LSP

Table 5-7 lists the attributes of silver services.
System

5-21

Table 5-7 Attributes of silver services
Attribute Silver Services
Requirements for creation Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the
source node and the sink node.
Service restoration When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to create a
new LSP to restore services.
Rerouting



Use existing trails whenever
possible
Do not use existing trails
whenever possible

After the automatically revertive silver service is rerouted,
the service is automatically reverted to the original path if
the fault in the original path is rectified.

After the scheduled revertive silver service is rerouted, the

After the non-revertive silver service is rerouted, the service
is not reverted to the original route after the fault is
rectified.
Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
Shared mesh restoration
trail
Supports setting the shared mesh restoration trial for revertive
silver trials.
Service migration

Supports migration between permanent connections and
silver services.

Supports migration between diamond services and silver
services.

Supports migration between gold services and silver
services.

Supports migration between silver services and copper
services.
Service optimization


If a revertive silver service reroutes, it cannot be optimized
before reverting to its original route.
Service association Supports service association.
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Attribute Silver Services
ASON server trail Supports silver ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger
rerouting
AU_AIS, AU_LOP, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)

5.10 Copper Services
The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt
services in holidays, are configured as copper services.
Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do not
reroute and are interrupted. Table 5-8 lists the attributes of copper services.
Table 5-8 Attributes of copper services
Attribute Silver Service
Requirements for
creation
node and the sink node.
Service restoration Does not support rerouting.
Service migration

Supports migration between copper services and traditional
services.

Supports migration between copper services and diamond services.

Supports migration between copper services and gold services.

Supports migration between copper services and silver services.
Service
optimization
Service association Supports service association.
ASON server trail Supports ASON server trails.

5.11 Iron Services
The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured as iron
services. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the services can be
configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources.
An iron service is also called a preemptable service. Iron services apply non-protection
resources or protection resources of the TE link to create LSPs. When an LSP fails, services
are interrupted and rerouting is not triggered.

When the iron service uses the protection resources of the TE link, if the MS switching
occurs, the iron service is preempted and the service is interrupted. After the MS is
System

5-23

recovered, the iron service is restored. The interruption, preemption and restoration of
the iron service are all reported to the T2000.

When the iron service uses the non-protection resources, if the network resources are
insufficient, the iron service may be preempted by the rerouted silver service or diamond
service. Thus, the service is interrupted.
Table 5-9 lists the attributes of iron service.
Table 5-9 Attributes of iron services
Attribute Iron Service
Requirements
for creation
Sufficient protection resources or non-protection resources are available
between the source node and the sink node.
Multiplex
section
protection
To create iron services, the following resources can be used:

Protection resources of 1:1 linear MSP

Protection resources of 1:N linear MSP

Protection resources of two-fiber bidirectional MSP

Protection resources of four-fiber bidirectional MSP
Service
restoration
Does not support rerouting.
Service
migration
Supports migration between iron services and extra permanent
connections.
Service
optimization

5.12 Tunnels
Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as ASON
server trails.
When lower order services are to be created, first create a VC-4 tunnel. The protection level
for the tunnel can be diamond, gold, silver or copper. Then, use the management system to
complete the configuration of the lower order service. See Figure 5-10.
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 5-10 Tunnel
R1
R2
R3
R4
VC4 tunnel
VC12 service
: ASON NE
: User equipment
ASON domain

The configuration of a tunnel is different from that of the above-mentioned service types. Its
cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board can only be configured manually.
As shown in Figure 5-11, there is a tunnel between NE1 and NE2 which can be a diamond
ASON server trail, a gold ASON server trail, silver ASON server trail or copper ASON server
trail. During service creation, the ASON automatically chooses the line boards of NE1 and
NE2 and the timeslots of the line boards.
After creating tunnels, you must manually create and delete the lower order cross-connection
from the tributary board to the line board. During rerouting or optimization of the tunnels,
however, the cross-connections at the source and sink nodes automatically switch to the new
ports.

In addition, the end-to-end tunnel and lower order service can be created.
Figure 5-11 Lower cross-connection
VC12
NE1 NE2
VC12 ASON server trail
VC4
VC12
Cross-
connection
Line unit Tributary unit

System

5-25

Table 5-10 lists the attributes of tunnels.
Table 5-10 Attributes of tunnels
Attribute Diamond
Tunnel
Gold Tunnel Silver Tunnel Copper
Tunnel
Requireme
nts for
creation
Same as diamond
services
Same as gold
services
Same as silver
services
Same as copper
services
Service
restoration
Same as diamond
services
Same as gold
services
Same as silver
services
Does not
support
rerouting
Rerouting

Supports
rerouting
lockout.

Supports
rerouting
priority.

Supports
rerouting
lockout.

Supports
rerouting
priority.

Supports
rerouting
lockout.

Supports
rerouting
priority.
Does not
support
rerouting
Revertive Supported Supported Supported Not supported
Pre-config
uration of
restoring
route
Supported Supported Supported Not supported
Service
association
Not supported Not supported Supported Supported
Service
migration

Supports migration between tunnel services and permanent connections.

Supports migration between diamond tunnels and gold tunnels.

Supports migration between diamond tunnels and silver tunnels.

Supports migration between diamond tunnels and copper tunnels.

Supports migration between silver tunnels and copper tunnels.

Supports migration between gold tunnels and silver tunnels.

Supports migration between gold tunnels and copper tunnels.
Service
optimizatio
n
Tunnel
level
VC-4

5.13 OVPN
In the case of an optical virtual private network (OVPN), multiple operators share one ASON.
When multiple operators share one ASON, different TE link resources are allocated to each
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

operator. In this case, an operator can use and manage its own TE link resources and ASON
services only. The operators are called OVPN customers.
As shown in Figure 5-12, certain timeslot resources are separately allocated to OVPN
customers 1 and 2. The network management (NM) users of OVPN customers 1 and 2 are
separately created on the NMS. Then, OVPN customers 1 and 2 can log in to the NMS
through their respective clients and NM users. OVPN customers 1 and 2 can separately
manage and maintain their timeslot resources and ASON services.
Multiple NM users can be created for one OVPN customer. One NM user can manage
multiple OVPN customers.
Figure 5-12 Networking diagram of an OVPN
U2000Server
U2000Client
OVPN
Customer 1
U2000Client
OVPN
Customer 2
: Timeslot resource of OVPN customer 1
: Timeslot resource of OVPN customer 2
U2000Client
NM User Admin

Enabling the OVPN Function
To perform the OVPN function, you must ensure that all the ASON NEs in the ASON domain
enable the OVPN function. In addition, the OVPN License can be started on the NMS side.

If the user disables the OVPN License, all the color information about the links and services is cleared.
System

5-27

Partioning the TE Link Resources
The TE link resources are divided into three types: shared resources, unshared resources, and
OVPN customer resources, as shown in Figure 5-13.
Figure 5-13 Partitioning the TE link resources
VC-4
timeslot
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Shared
resources
Unshared
resources
Resources of OVPN
customers
TE links
VC-4
timeslot

Table 5-11 shows the principle for the NM user to use the resources. The NM users are
classified into the following three types:

NM user (admin): By default, admin is the superuser. The NM user uniquely has the
right to manage the OVPN customers, to partition the OVPN resources, and to use all the
TE link resources.

OVPN NM user: The OVPN NM user can use the OVPN customer resources (colored)
and shared resources that are partitioned by the NM user admin.

NM user without the authorities of OVPN customers: This NM user can use the shared
resources only.
Table 5-11 Principle for an NM user to use resources
User Level Shared Resource OVPN User
Resource
Unshared
Resource
admin Available Available Available
OVPN NM user Available Available Unavailable
NM user without the
authorities of OVPN
customers
Available Unavailable Unavailable

To allocate the TE links on the MSP ring for OVPN customers, ensure that the timeslots are consistent
with each other in each segment.
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

OVPN Services
Table 5-12 lists the OVPN service attributes.
Table 5-12 OVPN service attributes
Attribute OVPN Service
Creating a
service

When creating a service, the NM user admin can use the shared
resources and OVPN user resources. Each OVPN service can use
only the timeslot resources of the same color.

An OVPN customer can create a service on the resources only
allocated to the OVPN customer.
Rerouting When the OVPN service is rerouted, it can use the resources allocated
to the OVPN customer first. If the OVPN customer resources are not
available, the OVPN service can use the shared resources.
Presetting the
restoration trail
A restoration trail can be preset. An OVPN customer can use the
allocated resources only.
Shared Mesh
restoration trail
A shared Mesh restoration trail can be preset. An OVPN customer can
use the allocated resources only.
Service
switching
OVPN services and traditional services can be mutually switched from
each other.

To switch an SDH service to an ASON service, you need to switch
the static SDH resources to the ASON resources.

After an ASON service is degraded to an SDH service, the original
ASON service switch to the static SDH resources.
Service
optimization
An ASON service of an OVPN user can be optimized on the resources
only allocated to the OVPN customer.

5.14 UNI Services
A UNI service is an ASON service that is created automatically after the customer equipment
initiates a request to the ASON equipment and the signaling is received. UNI services can be
classified into Ethernet UNI services and SDH UNI services.
Ethernet UNI Services
Ethernet UNI services are created in the ASON network after the customer equipment initiates
a service request to the ASON network by transmitting GMPLS signalling. Ethernet UNI
services are used to transmit GE signals, as shown in Figure 5-14. The service requests are
classified into OIF UNI service requests and GMPLS UNI service requests.
In the case of OIF UNI service requests, the message contains the information such as source
TNA address, sink TNA address, logical port number, service rate, and service level. In the
ASON network, a node first translates the source and sink TNA addresses into the source and
sink node IDs. Then, the node computes multiple service paths according to the service rate.
Finally, the node creates the relevant server-layer path according to the service level.
System

5-29

In the case of GMPLS UNI service requests, the message contains the information such as
source IP address, sink IP address, service rate, service priority, and access policy. In the
ASON network, a node first translates the source and sink IP addresses into the node IDs of
the two access nodes in the transport network. Then, the node computes multiple server-layer
paths according to the service rate. Finally, the node creates the relevant server-layer path
according to the service level.
Ethernet UNI services are available at four types: diamond, gold, silver, and copper.
Figure 5-14 Ethernet UNI services
R1 R2
: ASON NE
: Customer equipment
ASON
Ethernet UNI
service
GE Interface
Ethernet
board
GE
GE Interface

SDH UNI Services
SDH UNI services are created in the ASON network after the customer equipment initiates a
service request to the ASON network by transmitting GMPLS signalling. SDH UNI services
are used to transmit POS signals (including SDH concatenation signals), as shown in Figure
5-15. The service requests are classified into OIF UNI service requests and GMPLS UNI
service requests.
In the case of OIF UNI service requests, the message contains the information such as source
TNA address, sink TNA address, logical port number, service rate, and service level. In the
ASON network, a node first translates the source and sink TNA addresses into the source and
sink node IDs. Then, the node computes multiple server-layer (concatenation) service paths
according to the service rate. Finally, the node creates the relevant server-layer service
according to the service level.
In the case of GMPLS UNI service requests, the message contains the information such as
source IP address, sink IP address, service rate, service priority, and access policy. In the
ASON network, a node first translates the source and sink IP addresses into the node IDs of
the two access nodes in the transport network. Then, the node computes multiple server-layer
(concatenation) service paths according to the service rate. Finally, the node creates the
relevant server-layer service according to the service level.
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

SDH UNI services are available at four types: diamond, gold, silver, and copper.
Figure 5-15 SDH UNI services
R1 R2
: ASON NE
: Customer equipment
ASON
SDH UNI
Service
SDH Interface
Optical
interface
board
SDH Interface

5.15 Service Association
The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different
points into the ASON network.
Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes. During
the rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the route of the
associated service. Service association is mainly used for services (dual-source) accessed
from two points.
As shown in Figure 5-16, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the fiber
between B and G is cut, the rerouting of the A-B-G-H LSP avoids the D-E-I LSP.
System

5-31

Figure 5-16 Service association
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
1+1 protection
1+1 protection

When the resources are not sufficient, the associated trails sharing function is automatically
used for the associated service and thus improves the survivability of the service. When this
function is used for the associated service, the association of the services cannot be cancelled.
Hence, you need to optimize the route for the service before cancelling the association.
Table 5-13 lists the attributes of service association.
Table 5-13 Attributes of service association
Attribute Service Association
Service creation Supports the creation of associated services on the same ingress node
or different ingress nodes.
Service
optimization
Supports optimization of associated services.
Rerouting When one service reroutes, it avoids the route of the associated
service.
Service type

Supports the association of two silver services.

Supports association of two copper services.

Supports the association of a silver service and a copper service.

Supports the association of two silver tunnels.

Supports the association of two copper tunnels.

Supports the association of a silver tunnel and a copper tunnel.

5.16 Service Optimization
After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and
thus requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP,
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

switching the optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and
optimize the service without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be
restricted during the service optimization.
LSP optimization has the following features.

Only manual optimization is supported.

The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service.

During optimization, rerouting, downgrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are not
allowed.

During creation, rerouting, downgrading/upgrading, starting or deleting operations,
optimization is not allowed.

The following service types support optimization: diamond, gold, silver, copper, iron and
tunnel services.
5.17 Service Migration
OptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON services
and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would not
interrupt the services.
Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent Connections
Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:

Migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections

Migration between gold services and permanent connections

Migration between silver services and permanent connections

Migration between copper services and permanent connections

Migration between iron services and permanent connections

Migration between tunnel services and server trail.
Service Migration between ASON Trails
Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:

Migration between a diamond, a gold, silver, copper service

Migration between a diamond, a gold, silver, copper tunnels
5.18 Reverting Services to Original Routes
After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes.
You can revert all service to the original routes.
Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON service.
If the original route recovers after rerouting of the ASON services, the services can be
adjusted to the original route manually.
System

5-33

5.19 Preset Restoring Trail
Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. To
this end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This
function helps increase the controllability of service routing. The preset restoring trail
information is stored only on the control plane and does not require the actual resources.
The OptiX GCP supports setting a preset restoring trail for a diamond/silver/gold ASON trail.
When the ASON trail reroutes, the service is restored to the preset restoring trail firstly.
5.20 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail
For a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of rerouting, the
silver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a restoration trail is called a
shared mesh restoration trail.
When a service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail reroutes, the service uses the
resources on this trail with priority. If all resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are
usable, these resources are used for service restoration. If only partial resources on the shared
mesh restoration trail are usable, these resources are used with priority for computation of a
restoration trail. The other resources may be faulty or used by other services that share the
trail.
As shown in Figure 5-17, the shared mesh restoration trail for two revertive silver services
share the TE link and timeslots between G and H. When the revertive silver service 1 (A-B-C)
reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail 1 (A-G-H-C). When
the revertive silver service 2 (D-E-F) reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh
restoration trail 2 (D-G-H-F). If both silver services reroute, only one of them can reroute to
the shared mesh restoration trail, for the two restoration trails share the TE link and timeslots
between G and H.
Figure 5-17 Shared mesh restoration trail
Revertive silver service 1
Share MESH
restoration trail 1
A B C
G
D E
F
H
Revertive silver service 2
Share MESH
restoration trail 2

5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Features of the Shared Mesh Restoration Trail
The shared mesh restoration trail has the following features.

Only the revertive silver service can be configured with the shared mesh restoration trail.

A shared mesh restoration trail cannot be set to concatenation services at different levels.

For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, the revertive
attribute cannot be changed.

The resources on a shared mesh restoration trail can only be the unprotected resources of
TE links.

For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, do not set the
preset restoration trail.
Differences Between Shared Mesh Restoration Trail and Preset Restoration Trail
The shared mesh restoration trail and the preset restoration trail have the following
differences.

For a preset restoration trail, only route information of the trail is recorded and no
resources are actually reserved. In this way, the resources for a preset restoration trail
may be used by other services. When the service reroutes, the preset restoration trail
cannot be used.

For a shared mesh restoration trail, resources are actually reserved. The reserved
resources cannot be used by other services. In this way, services can be restored with the
best effort. In addition, to increase the resource utilization, the shared mesh restoration
trails for different services can share some resources.
5.21 Shared Risk Link Group
In the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one
cable.
The SRLG is the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the same risks,
that is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service should not be
rerouted to another link that has the same risk.
Hence, the SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk in the network
so as to avoid that the LSP after rerouting of the ASON services and the faulty link share the
same risk and to shorten the service restoration time during ASON service rerouting. You can
change the SRLG attribute on the TE link Management window.
5.22 Amalgamation of ASON and LCAS
The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.
LCAS
LCAS is Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. With LCAS enabled, the bandwidth of
VCTRUNK can be adjusted dynamically without affecting services. As shown in Figure 5-18,
VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s, with two transmitted over path 1 and two over path 2.
System

5-35

If the VC4 in path 1 fails, the two VC4s in path 2 will transmit all Ethernet service without
affecting the service of VCTRUNK1. You can add VC4 on either path if necessary.
Figure 5-18 LCAS (different path)
Router B Router A
NE1 NE2
VCTRUNK1
Path 1
Path 2

If these VC4s are transmitted over a path, adding/deleting VC4 will not affect the service. As
shown in Figure 5-19, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s. If the first VC4 fails, the
Ethernet service remains unaffected.
Figure 5-19 LCAS (same path)
Router B Router A
NE1 NE2
VCTRUNK1

ASON Trail Group
An ASON trail group associates all member trails for the same LCAS service within one LSP
group. These member trails then can be added, deleted or modified. To provide virtual
services with the error tolerance ability, these member trails must be as separate as possible.
Each ASON trail group is identified by an ID. The ASON NE allocates an ID to each ASON
trail group. The member trails within an ASON trail share the same source and sink. The trails
must also be as separated as possible.
The ASON supports the distance offset check function of an ASON trail group. Due to
distance offset, the delay of ASON trails that bear data services is within the specified range
for data boards. Otherwise, the data services are interrupted, and no alarms are generated.
When adding the ASON trails that are bound on the basis of the LCAS to an ASON trail
group, the ASON software automatically checks whether the services in the ASON group
meet the distance offset requirements.
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

5.23 Merging an ASON Network with a Traditional SDH
Network
An ASON network can be used with an SDH network to form a hybrid network. In this case,
an end-to-end service can be managed and created in a centralized manner.

The protection in the ASON domain is realized through the association.
A Traditional SDH Network Connected to an ASON Network in 1+1 or 1:1 MSP
Mode
A traditional SDH network is connected to an ASON network in 1+1 or 1:1 MSP mode. The
connection between the SDH network and the ASON network is protected in linear MSP
mode. The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. In addition,
the ASON network can access a diamond service, a gold service, or a silver service, as shown
in Figure 5-20.
Figure 5-20 A traditional SDH network connected to an ASON network in 1+1 or 1:1 MSP mode
1+1 or 1:1 MSP
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
ASON
MSP Ring

A Traditional SDH Network Connected to an ASON Network in SNCP Mode
A traditional SDH network is connected to an ASON network in SNCP mode. In this case, a
service can be protected in SNCP mode. The SDH network adopts the traditional SNCP mode.
The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. As shown in Figure
5-21, the service can also be protected if two fiber cuts occur.

The ASON services at all levels support the access of the intelligent SNCP.
System

5-37

Figure 5-21 A traditional SDH network connected to an ASON network in SNCP mode
SNCP Access
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
ASON
Dual-fed
selective
receiving
SNCP
SDH SDH
SNCP Access
Dual-fed
selective
receiving
SNCP

VC-4 Services Between SDH NEs That Cross the ASON Network
As shown in Figure 5-22, a VC-4 service is created between SDH NEs 5 and 6 and crosses the
ASON network. The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. The
SDH network is not protected.
Figure 5-22 VC-4 services between SDH NEs that cross the ASON network
NE1
NE2 NE3
NE4
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
NE6
NE5
VC-4
VC-4

VC-12 Services Between SDH NEs That Cross the ASON Network
As shown in Figure 5-23, a VC-12 service is created between SDH NEs 5 and 6 and crosses
the ASON network. The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode.
The SDH network is not protected.
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 5-23 VC-12 services between SDH NEs that cross the ASON network
VC-12
VC-12
NE1
NE2 NE3
NE4
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
NE6
NE5

1+1 VC-4 Services Between Traditional NEs That Cross the ASON Network
As shown in Figure 5-24, a 1+1 VC-4 service is created between SDH NEs 5 and 6 and
crosses the ASON network. The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or
restoration mode. The SDH network adopts the SNCP protection mode.
Figure 5-24 1+1 VC-4 services between SDH NEs that cross the ASON network
VC-4
VC-4
NE1
NE2 NE3
NE4
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
NE6
NE5

System

5-39

1+1 VC-12 Services Between SDH NEs That Cross the ASON Network
As shown in Figure 5-25, a 1+1 VC-12 service is created between SDH NEs 5 and 6 and
crosses the ASON network. The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or
restoration mode. The SDH network adopts the SNCP protection mode.
Figure 5-25 1+1 VC-12 services between SDH NEs that cross the ASON network
VC-12
VC-12
NE1
NE2 NE3
NE4
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
NE6
NE5

VC-4 Services Between ASON NEs and Traditional NEs
As shown in Figure 5-26, a VC-4 service is created between traditional NE5 and ASON NE1.
The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. The SDH network is
not protected.
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 5-26 VC-4 services between ASON NEs and SDH NEs
VC-4
VC-4
NE1
NE2 NE3
NE4
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
NE6
NE5

VC-12 Services Between ASON NEs and SDH NEs
As shown in Figure 5-27, a VC-12 service is created between SDH NE5 and ASON NE1. The
ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. The SDH network is not
protected.
Figure 5-27 VC-12 services between ASON NEs and SDH NEs
VC-12
VC-12
NE1
NE2 NE3
NE4
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
NE6
NE5

System

5-41

1+1 VC-4 Services Between ASON NEs and SDH NEs
As shown in Figure 5-28, a 1+1 VC-4 service is created between SDH NE5 and ASON NE1.
The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. The SDH network
adopts the SNCP protection mode.
Figure 5-28 1+1 VC-4 services between ASON NEs and SDH NEs
VC-4
VC-4
NE1
NE2 NE3
NE4
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
NE6
NE5

1+1 VC-12 Services Between ASON NEs and SDH NEs
As shown in Figure 5-29, a 1+1 VC-12 service is created between SDH NE5 and ASON NE1.
The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. The SDH network
adopts the SNCP protection mode.
5 ASON Features
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Figure 5-29 1+1 VC-12 services between ASON NEs and SDH NEs
VC-12
VC-12
NE1
NE2 NE3
NE4
: ASON NE
: SDH NE
NE6
NE5

5.24 Built-in WDM Technology
The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission of
several wavelengths in one fiber.
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a built-in WDM technology. The functions of the equipment
are as follows:

Any four adjacent standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 can be
added or dropped.

The optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) or the optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)
station that adds or drops four wavelengths is supported. Concatenation is supported, and
thus multiple waves can be added or dropped.

The conversion between client-side signal wavelengths and ITU-T G.692 compliant
standard wavelengths is supported. During the conversion, all the signals are
transparently transmitted.

Intermediate ports are provided for expansion. When intermediate ports are cascaded
with other OADM boards, the expansion of add/drop channels is realized.

The 3R (regeneration, retiming and reshaping) functions are provided for client-side
uplink and downlink signals (at a rate of 34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s). In the case of these
client-side signals, clock recovery is available, and the signal rate can be monitored.

Dual fed and selective receiving boards support intra-board protection. One board of this
type can be used to realize the optical channel protection, with the protection switching
time less than 50 ms.

Single fed and single receiving boards support inter-board protection. A 1+1 inter-board
standby scheme is supported, with the protection switching time less than 50 ms.
System

5-43

Supports standard CWDM wavelengths, which can be multiplexed or demultiplexed.

Supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmit signals over a
long distance.

Supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function.
5.25 Microwave Technology
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the built-in microwave boards of intermediate frequency. It
can work with the outdoor unit (ODU) of the OptiX RTN 600 to achieve wireless service
transmission.
In the case of the OptiX OSN 3500, the service signals are transmitted on the basis of the
microwave transmission flow shown in Figure 5-30.
Figure 5-30 Processing flow of the service signals
Cross -
connect
board
Microwave
IF board
ODU
RF signal IF signal
Baseband
signal
Antenna
Baseband
signal
Service
interface
board
PDH/SDH/Ethernet

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following microwave functions:

Software programmed radio (SPR) function. The microwave capacity and modulation
mode can be set through software.

Microwave frames based on TU and STM-1. The air interface is used for the product to
interconnect with the other OptiX OSN products that adopt the microwave frames based
on TU and STM-1 or to interconnect with the OptiX RTN 600.

1+1 protection and N+1 protection.

Automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function.

The OptiX OSN equipment does not support the 256 QAM modulation scheme or 56 MHz channel
spacing.
The number of IFSD1 boards that can be configured for different types of the equipment is
different. Hence, the number of microwave directions supported by different types of the
equipment is also different.
Table 5-14 lists the maximum number of IF boards and the maximum number of microwave
directions supported by different types of the equipment.
Table 5-14 Microwave capacity of the equipment
Equipment Type
Maximum Number of
Configured IF Boards
Maximum Supported
Microwave Capacity
(Channel)
OptiX OSN 3500 10 20
a

System
Product Description 6 Products and Application Scenarios

6-1

6 Products and Application Scenarios
About This Chapter
6.1 Networking Topologies
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the topologies such as chain, ring, tangent rings, intersecting
rings, ring with chain, dual node interconnection (DNI), hub, and mesh at the
STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64 level.The basic networking topologies are applicable to the
packet mode, TDM mode, and hybrid mode.
6.2 Typical Networking of the Pure packet mode
When the OptiX OSN 3500 functions as the packet equipment, the OptiX OSN 1500/7500
can be used as the packet equipment to work with the OptiX OSN 3500. In this manner, a
complete packet end-to-end solution is obtained.
6.3 Typical Dual-Mode Networking
The packet features of the OptiX OSN 3500 enables the equipment to overlap the Ethernet
service network based on the packet mode on the TDM network.
6.4 Hybrid Networking with Other Huawei Equipment
By adopting the dual-core structure, the OptiX OSN 3500 can work in pure packet mode or
pure TDM mode.
6.1 Networking Topologies
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the topologies such as chain, ring, tangent rings, intersecting
rings, ring with chain, dual node interconnection (DNI), hub, and mesh at the
STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64 level.The basic networking topologies are applicable to the
packet mode, TDM mode, and hybrid mode.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the separate and hybrid configuration of the following types of
NEs:

Terminal multiplexer (TM)

Add/drop multiplexer (ADM)

Multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM)
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

The OptiX OSN 3500 can be interconnected with Huawei OSN, DWDM, and Metro
equipment series, to provide a complete transmission network solution.

When the equipment is interconnected, make sure that the K bytes to be received and transmitted are on
the same path at both ends.

The OptiX OSN 3500 can be used with another OptiX OSN equipment to provide a
complete solution. This solution covers all the layers including the backbone layer, the
convergence layer, and the access layer.

Through an SDH interface or a GE interface, the OptiX OSN 3500 can be interconnected
with the WDM equipment.

Through an SDH, PDH, Ethernet, ATM, or DDN interface, the OptiX OSN 3500 can be
interconnected with the OptiX Metro equipment.
6.2 Typical Networking of the Pure packet mode
When the OptiX OSN 3500 functions as the packet equipment, the OptiX OSN 1500/7500
can be used as the packet equipment to work with the OptiX OSN 3500. In this manner, a
complete packet end-to-end solution is obtained.
Figure 6-1shows the typical networking diagram of the packet mode.
Figure 6-1 Typical networking diagram of the packet mode
FE
FE
GE
RNC RNC
GE
10GE ring
GE ring
NodeB
OptiX OSN 1500
OptiX OSN 3500/7500
Packet ring
TDM ring
NodeB

As shown in Figure 6-1, the OptiX OSN 1500 or the OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000) is
generally used on the GE ring at the access layer. The OptiX OSN 3500/7500 is
generally used on the 10GE ring at the convergence layer.

The FE service received by the 3G base station (NodeB) is accessed by the OptiX OSN
1500 into the GE packet ring. Then, the FE service is transmitted to the OptiX OSN
3500/7500 on the 10GE ring, and finally to the RNC. In this manner, the FE service is
transmitted from the 3G base station to the RNC, which is called end-to-end
transmission.
System

6-3

6.3 Typical Dual-Mode Networking
The packet features of the OptiX OSN 3500 enables the equipment to overlap the Ethernet
service network based on the packet mode on the TDM network.
Access Layer Overlaid with the GE Ring, Convergence/Core Layer Overlaid with
the 10GE Ring
The OptiX OSN 3500 can be used to transmit Ethernet services on the packet mode
overlaying on the TDM network.
Figure 6-2 shows that the packet service and SDH service exist on the same network. The
packet service is transmitted on the packet ring, and the SDH service is transmitted on the
TDM ring. There is no interference between the two types of services.
After the IP-based telecommunication is realized, the OptiX OSN 3500 can be smoothly
upgraded to the pure packet mode. Hence, the increasing requirements for packet services can
be satisfied.
Figure 6-2 The access layer overlaid with the GE ring and the convergence/core layer overlaid
with the 10GE ring
GE board
SDH board
SDH board
SDH board
E1
E1
FE
FE
GE
STM-1
BTS
Node
BTS
BSC RNC RNC BSC
GE
STM-1
TDM cross-
connect board
Packet cross-
connect board
STM-1/4 Ring
STM- 16/64Ring
10GE Ring
SDH board
10GE board
GE board
GE Ring
10GE board
Packet ring
TDM ring
TDM plane
Packet plane

In the preceding typical networking diagram, the OptiX OSN 1500 or the OptiX
155/622H(Metro 1000) is generally used at the access layer, and the OptiX OSN
3500/7500 is generally used at the convergence/core layer.

The services from the base station can be directly accessed through the FE
optical/electrical interface on the R1EF4F board into the OptiX OSN 1500.

At the access layer, SDH services are transmitted on the STM-1/STM-4 ring and packet
services are transmitted on the GE ring. At the backbone/convergence layer, SDH
services are transmitted on the STM-16/STM-64 ring and packet services are transmitted
on the 10GE ring.

SDH services are transmitted on the TDM mode and packet services are transmitted on
the packet mode.

In the overlay networking of the TDM mode and packet mode, the OptiX OSN
equipment on the TDM mode uses the end-to-end TDM service protection, and the
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

OptiX OSN equipment on the packet mode uses the end-to-end LSP/PW protection that
realizes protection switching under 50 ms.
Using the EoS Service Dividing Board to Overlay the Convergence/Core Layer
with the 10GE Ring
The OptiX OSN 3500 can use the EoS service dividing board to directly access Ethernet
services through the TDM ring at the access layer. Figure 6-3 shows how this function is
realized.
As the packet service increases, the EoS service dividing board provides a solution for the
expansion of the SDH network and improves the utilization of the equipment at the access
layer.
Figure 6-3 Using the EoS service dividing board to overlay the convergence/core layer with the
10GE ring
E1
E1
FE
FE
BTS
NodeB
BTS
STM-1/4 ring
GE
STM-1
BSC RNC RNC BSC
GE STM-1
TDM Cross-
connection
Packet cross-
connection
STM-16/
STM-64ring
10GE ring
Packet ring
TDM ring
TDM cross-connection
Packet cross-connection
EOS service
dividing board
SDH line board
10GE Ethernet board
NodeB

In the preceding typical networking diagram, the OptiX OSN 1500 or the OptiX
155/622H(Metro 1000) is generally used at the access layer, and the OptiX OSN
3500/7500 is generally used at the convergence/core layer.

As shown in Figure 6-3, only the TDM mode is available at the STM-1/STM-4 access
layer. The OptiX OSN 1500 transmits the E1 and FE services that are accessed by the
base station to the OptiX OSN 3500.

At the backbone/convergence layer, the 10GE packet ring and the STM-16/STM-64
TDM ring are available. The OptiX OSN 3500/7500 uses the EoS service dividing board
(N1EOQ41 or N1EOL16) to transmit two types of services on the TDM mode and
packet mode separately at the backbone/convergence layer. That is, E1 services are
transmitted on the STM-16/STM-64 ring at the backbone/convergence layer, and FE
services are transmitted on the 10GE ring at the backbone/convergence layer. The
purpose is to realize the end-to-end transmission of E1 services to the BSC and the
end-to-end transmission of FE services to the RNC.
System

6-5

6.4 Hybrid Networking with Other Huawei Equipment
By adopting the dual-core structure, the OptiX OSN 3500 can work in pure packet mode or
pure TDM mode.
6.4.1 Hybrid Networking with the PTN Equipment
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports hybrid networking with the PTN equipment, therefore
implementing end-to-end management.
6.4.2 Hybrid Networking with the RTN Equipment
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports hybrid networking with the RTN equipment, therefore
6.4.1 Hybrid Networking with the PTN Equipment
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports hybrid networking with the PTN equipment, therefore
As shown in Figure 6-4, the hybrid networking allows more flexible reform of the existing
network and optimal utilization of the network resources.
Figure 6-4 Hybrid networking with Huawei MSTP and PTN equipment
E1
GE
STM-1
BTS
BSC
RNC
RNC
BSC
GE
STM-1
STM-1/4 ring
STM-16/64ring
10GE ring
Packet ring
TDM ring
TDM plane
Packet plane
BTS
E1
GE ring
MSTP equipment
PTN equipment
FE
NodeB
FE
FE
SDHline board
10GEEthernet board
NMS
NodeB
NodeB

In the preceding typical networking, the OptiX OSN 1500 or OptiX 155/622H(Metro
1000) or the OptiX PTN 910/950/1900 is used at the access layer.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

At the backbone/convergence layer, the OptiX OSN 3500/7500 or the OptiX PTN 3900
is used.

See Figure 6-4. In packet mode, the equipment at the access layer, such as the OptiX
OSN 1500 or the OptiX PTN equipment, accesses the FE services from the 3G base
stations, and transmits the FE services to the GE packet ring , then to the 10GE
convergence/backbone ring, and finally to the RNC. In this manner, the FE services from
the base stations are transmitted to the RNC in an end-to-end manner.

See Figure 6-4. In TDM mode, the equipment at the access layer, such as the OptiX OSN
1500 or the OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000), accesses the E1 services from the BTS to the
STM-1/STM-4 ring consisting of the MSTP equipment and then transmits the service to
the STM-16/STM-64 ring consisting of the OptiX OSN equipment
(convergence/backbone layer) and finally to the BSC. In this manner, the E1 services
from the BTS are transmitted to the BSC in an end-to-end manner.

In the hybrid networking of the OptiX OSN 3500, the MSTP equipment, and the PTN
equipment, a unified NMS is used.
6.4.2 Hybrid Networking with the RTN Equipment
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports hybrid networking with the RTN equipment, therefore
As shown in Figure 6-5, hybrid networking allows more flexible reform of the existing
network and optimal utilization of the network resources.
Figure 6-5 Hybrid networking with Huawei MSTP and RTN equipment
BTS
BTS
BTS
E
1
E
1
F
E
F
E
F
E
RNC
STM-1
BSC
GE
STM-1/4
ring
STM-4/16
ring
STM-16/64
ring
STM-16/64
ring
10GE ring
10GE ring
GE ring
GE ring
NMS
Packet ring
TDM ring
Radio ring
MSTP equipment at
the access layer
MSTP equipment at
the convergence
layer
MSTP equipment at
the backbone layer
RTN equipment at
the access layer
NodeB
NodeB
NodeB

In the preceding typical networking, the OptiX OSN 1500 or OptiX RTN equipment is
used at the access layer.
System

6-7

The OptiX OSN 3500/7500 is often used at the convergence/backbone layer.

See Figure 6-5. In packet mode, the equipment at the access layer, such as the OptiX
OSN 1500 or the OptiX RTN equipment, accesses the FE services from the 3G base
stations, and transmits the FE services to the GE packet ring , then to the 10GE
convergence/backbone ring, and finally to the RNC. In this manner, the FE services from
the base stations are transmitted to the RNC in an end-to-end manner.

See Figure 6-5. In TDM mode, the equipment at the access layer, such as the OptiX OSN
1500 accesses the E1 services from the BTS to the STM-1/STM-4 ring consisting of the
MSTP equipment and then transmits the service to the STM-16/STM-64 ring consisting
of the OptiX OSN equipment (convergence/backbone layer) and finally to the BSC. In
this manner, the E1 services from the BTS are transmitted to the BSC in an end-to-end
manner.

In the hybrid networking of the OptiX OSN 3500, the MSTP equipment, and the RTN
equipment, a unified NMS is used.
System
Product Description 7 OAM

7-1

7 OAM
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides enhanced maintenance and management functions.
7.1 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces
The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.
7.2 DCN Management Scheme
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports two DCN modes: outband data communication network (DCN)
and inband DCN.
7.3 Network Management
The OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the transmission network management system
(hereinafter referred to as the NMS) through the ETH port. The NMS maintains the OSN,
SDH, Metro, and DWDM network elements (NEs) on the entire network.The NMS can
implement end-to-end protection configuration for cross-mode services.
7.4 Operation and Maintenance
The cabinet, boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 3500 are designed according to the
customer requirements to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Hence,
the OptiX OSN 3500 provides powerful equipment maintenance capability for customers.
7.5 Alarm and Performance Management
OptiX OSN 3500 supports alarm and performance management, that can help the network
administrators to locate and rectify faults quickly.
7.6 ALS Function And Optical Power Management
OptiX OSN 3500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH optical interfaces
and provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the SDH single-mode optical
interfaces.
7.7 Fault Locating and Equipment Maintenance
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides multiple maintenance methods. In this manner, users can
conveniently monitor and commission the equipment, and locate the fault on the equipment.
7.8 Board Replacement and Equipment Upgrade
7 OAM
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports a network upgrade through board replacement or software
upgrade. The following part describes several key network upgrade methods.
7.1 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces
The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.
Table 7-1 lists the types of administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN
3500.
Table 7-1 Administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN 3500
Interface
Type
Description
Administration
interface
One remote maintenance interface (OAM)
Four broadcast data interfaces (S1-S4)
One 64 kbit/s codirectional data path interface (F1)
One Ethernet interface (10M/100M) for network management (ETH)
One administration serial interface (F&f)
One commissioning interface (COM)
Orderwire
interface
One orderwire phone interface (PHONE)
Two SDH NNI voice interfaces (V1 and V2)
Two SDH NNI signaling interfaces (S1 and S2, used with two broadcast
data interfaces)
Clock interface Two 75-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
Two 120-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
External synchronization and synchronous output
Alarm interface 16-input and 4-output alarm interface
Four cabinet alarm indicator output interfaces
Four cabinet alarm indicator concatenation input interfaces
Four cabinet alarm concatenation input interface
Microwave IF
interface
One coaxial cable connects to one ODU. Each board provides two cables
to separately connect two ODUs.
Two -48 VDC power input interfaces.

7.2 DCN Management Scheme
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports two DCN modes: outband data communication network (DCN)
and inband DCN.
7.2.1 Outband DCN
System

7-3

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports various outband DCN modes.
7.2.2 Inband DCN
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports various inband DCN modes.
7.2.1 Outband DCN
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports various outband DCN modes.
An outband DCN indicates that the other channels (excluding service channels) are used to
transmit the network management information, thus managing the network.
An outband DCN requires a dedicated communication channel and a maintenance channel
that is independent of the service channels. If the outband DCN mode is used, the network
management center can build a DCN network with the managed equipment through multiple
methods (for example, E1 private line or Ethernet). Then, the network management center can
manage the network under control.
Compared with an inband DCN, an outband DCN provides the management paths that are
more reliable. If any fault occurs on the service channels, the network management center can
obtain the network management information immediately and monitor the equipment in real
time.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following outband DCN networking technologies:

HWECC

IP over DCC

OSI over DCC
Table 7-2 lists the DCC resource allocation modes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 7-2 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 3500
DCC Allocation N4GSCC/N6GSCC
Channel type Supports the D1-D1, D1-D3, D4-D12 and GCCM_24 channel
types.
Mode 1 Supports 160 D1-D3 channels.
Supports 40 D4-D12 channels.
Mode 5 Supports eight D1-D3 channels.
Operation
mode
7 OAM
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

DCC Allocation N4GSCC/N6GSCC
Supports 9 GCCM_24 channels.
Protocol type Supports HWECC, IP, and OSI protocols.
Default mode Mode 1

When interconnected with the OptiX 155/622H
(Metro 1000)
, the OptiX OSN 3500 does not
support the D4-D12 channel type if the DCN networking runs the IP over DCC protocol.
Otherwise, communication is interrupted.
7.2.2 Inband DCN
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports various inband DCN modes.
In TDM mode, the SDH and Ethernet services carried by the equipment uses the outband
DCN networking. In packet mode, the Ethernet services carried by the equipment uses the
inband DCN networking.
If the inband DCN mode is used, the network management information is transmitted on the
services channels of the equipment.
If the inband DCN mode is used, the network management information is encapsulated as
payload and is transmitted through the service channels without setting up a dedicated DCN
channel.
The inband DCN networking provides the feature of flexible networking and does not require
extra equipment.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following inband DCN networking technologies:

HWECC

IP

By default, the inband DCN networking uses the IP technology.
System

7-5

For details on the inband DCN, see Feature Description.
7.3 Network Management
The OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the transmission network management system
(hereinafter referred to as the NMS) through the ETH port. The NMS maintains the OSN,
SDH, Metro, and DWDM network elements (NEs) on the entire network.The NMS can
implement end-to-end protection configuration for cross-mode services.
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T recommendations. The equipment adopts the
management information model and the object-oriented management technology. With the
NMS, the equipment can exchange information with the NE software through the
communication module to manage the alarms and performance events in a centralized manner.
In addition, the end-to-end configuration on the management plane can be realized.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the simple network management protocol
(SNMPv2/SNMPv3), which solves the uniform NMS problem for the networking of
equipment from different vendors.
7.4 Operation and Maintenance
The cabinet, boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 3500 are designed according to the
customer requirements to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Hence,
the OptiX OSN 3500 provides powerful equipment maintenance capability for customers.
7.5 Alarm and Performance Management
OptiX OSN 3500 supports alarm and performance management, that can help the network
administrators to locate and rectify faults quickly.

In the case of an emergency, the GSCC board generates audible and visual alarms to
prompt the network administrators to take proper measures.

The AUX board provides 16 alarm input interfaces, four alarm output interfaces, four
output interfaces for cabinet alarm indicators, and alarm concatenation interfaces to
facilitate operation and maintenance of the equipment.

Each board provides running and alarm indicators to help the network administrators to
locate and rectify faults quickly.

Alarm storms can be suppressed. If the number of reported alarms exceeds 1000, the NE
reports that excessive alarms are generated. Then, the board does not report excessive
alarms.

The NG-SDH equipment supports the alarm muting function. You can mute an alarm by
pressing the key on the GSCC board or by using the NM interface.

The connectivity of the network cable between NEs can be automatically monitored.
After detecting any faults, they automatically report the relevant alarms.

The working temperature of certain boards can be queried.

When an MSP switching or a TPS switching occurs, the state of an alarm or of a
performance event is not changed in the working path. Thus, the service administrator
focuses on the service state only.
7 OAM
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

7.6 ALS Function And Optical Power Management
OptiX OSN 3500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH optical interfaces
and provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the SDH single-mode optical
interfaces.
ALS Function
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the SDH
optical interfaces.

When a fiber that connects two optical interfaces is cut, an R-LOS alarm is generated at
the optical interface of the local end. If the R_LOS alarm lasts for 500 ms, the laser of
the transmit optical interface at the local end is automatically shut down. By default, the
laser pulse is generated at a 60-second interval and lasts for 2s every time.

After the fiber connection is restored, the optical interface at the opposite end detects the
laser pulse generated from the local end. The laser of the optical interface at the opposite
end then continuously launches laser beams. After receiving the laser beams launched by
the opposite end, the laser of the local end then also continuously launches the laser
beams. As a result, the two optical interfaces can communicate with each other and the
R-LOS alarm is cleared.
Optical Power Management

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH optical
interfaces.

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the function to query the parameters of the SDH optical
module. The parameters that can be queried include the optical interface type, fiber mode
(single-mode or multi-mode), transmission distance, transmission rate, and wavelength.

The optical interface board uses the pluggable optical module. Users can choose
single-mode or multi-mode optical modules according to the requirement, which
facilitates the maintenance.

The optical power threshold of the boards can be queried.
7.7 Fault Locating and Equipment Maintenance
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides multiple maintenance methods. In this manner, users can
conveniently monitor and commission the equipment, and locate the fault on the equipment.
Fault Locating

Certain tributary boards, line boards, and cross-connect boards support the PRBS test
and the remote bit error test.

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the press-to-collect function for fault data. This function
reduces the data collection time before service restoration. By using this function, the
user is able to selectively collect fault data, and to manually cancel the collection
according to the requirement.

The operation logs can be queried. The operations and maintenance activities can be
traced to determine the fault causes and the accident responsibilities.

The connectivity status of the services can be determined.
System

7-7

The faulty node can be analyzed.
ETH-OAM and MPLS OAM

Ethernet boards provide the OAM function. This function is used to automatically detect
faults in Ethernet, and to help locate and isolate these faults.

The MPLS OAM and ETH-OAM function is supported.

The enabling state of detecting the alarms in the MSP protection path can be queried.

The PW OAM and tunnel OAM function are supported. Different alarms are used to
detect the faults of working links.
Maintenance

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the orderwire phone function for management personnel
at different sites to communicate with each other.

The NMS can be used to dynamically monitor the equipment running status and alarms
of each set of equipment on a network.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the remote maintenance function. When the equipment
becomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use the public phone network to remotely
maintain the OptiX OSN 3500 system.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hot swapping of the boards.

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the board version replacement function. This helps to
replace the board of an old version with the board of a new version. After the
replacement, the configuration and service status of the board of a new version are the
same as the configuration and service status of the board of an old version.

The power consumption of the equipment and boards can be queried and controlled.
After being inserted, the board does not work if the total power consumption of the
boards exceeds the power consumption threshold of the equipment.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the query of the current status of the NE, board, and port.

The daylight saving time can be set. The daylight saving time is adjusted according to
the daylight saving time in the country.
7.8 Board Replacement and Equipment Upgrade
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports a network upgrade through board replacement or software
upgrade. The following part describes several key network upgrade methods.
The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version
board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are
consistent with the configuration and service status of the old version board.
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the functions of software package loading and simulation
software package loading.
7.8.3 Hot Patch
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hot patch technology.
7.8.4 NSF Function
7 OAM
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

NSF stands for Non-interrupted Service Forwarding. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the NSF
function. When the control plane of the equipment is faulty, the NSF function ensures that the
data services are not interrupted, thus ensuring transmission of the key services on the
network.
7.8.5 Smooth Upgrade
Based on the increasing demands for packet services and stable requirements for conventional
TDM services, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports a smooth upgrade from the TDM mode to the
packet mode.
The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version
board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are
consistent with the configuration and service status of the old version board.
This function provides a flexible board replacement scheme.
For detailed replacement relations of boards that support this function, refer to Part
Replacement Design.
When using the board version replacement function, note the following points:

The new board may not support the functions of the original board. Before the
replacement, fully consider the difference of functions of the two boards. For example, If
the N2SL64 board is configured with the TCM function or AU-3 services, it cannot be
replaced with the N1SL64 board.

The line board to be replaced cannot have an optical-path-shared MSP configured.

A board can support only the AU-3 services or TCM function.
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the functions of software package loading and simulation
software package loading.
Loading Software Packages
The software package loading function supports mass loading of software at NE-level. This
function realizes upgrade and management of NE software, simplifies the upgrade operations,
and improves the usability of the upgrade operations.
The software package loading has the following features:

The user loads the software on an NE basis and through a uniform operation interface.

The software package loading is incremental. That is, only the files for the upgrade need
to be downloaded.

Before the software package loading, the status of the NE must be normal.

When two or more NEs need to be upgraded at a time, the software package diffusion
can be used for the upgrade.
System

7-9

A version rollback is supported for an upgrade failure.
In addition, whether the equipment supports the software package loading is related to
whether the installed SCC board is equipped with a CF card. For details, see Table 7-3.
Table 7-3 Relationship Between the Software Package Loading and Different SCC Boards
Item Specifications of the
SCC Board
Whether to Support the
Online Automatic Match
With a CF card Supported Software package loading
Without a CF card Not supported

The software package loading applies to the following scenarios:

Upgrade of the NE software

Replacement of the service boards

Replacement of the auxiliary boards

Replacement of the cross-connect boards
The software package loading when the SCC board (with a CF card) also applies to the
following scenarios:
Simulation Package Loading
When you need to upload the whole set of the software to an NE, and the mapping between
the board and software is defined according to the format of the simulation software package,
you can use the simulation software package to improve the loading efficiency and upgrade
security, and reduce the operation complexity.
The simulation software package includes:

All the necessary software to be loaded to the NE

Package description document that specifies the loading attributes of each software
The simulation software package loading has the following features:

The user loads the software on an NE basis and through a uniform operation interface.

The status of the NE does not affect the loading.

A version rollback is supported for an upgrade failure.
7.8.3 Hot Patch
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hot patch technology.
Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is located or a
new requirement needs to be applied to the equipment software, a process of replacing old
codes with new codes should be performed to rectify the defect or realize the new requirement,
without any service interruption. These new codes are referred to as a hot patch.
The hot patch technology has the following features:

The hot patch solves most of the software problems without affecting services.
7 OAM
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

The hot patch effectively decreases the number of software versions and prevents
frequent software version upgrade.

The hot patch operation does not affect services and can be performed remotely. The hot
patch also provides a rollback function. This helps to decrease the upgrade cost and to
avoid upgrade risks.

The hot patch can be used as an effective method for locating faults, and thus improves
the efficiency of solving problems.
7.8.4 NSF Function
NSF stands for Non-interrupted Service Forwarding. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the NSF
function. When the control plane of the equipment is faulty, the NSF function ensures that the
data services are not interrupted, thus ensuring transmission of the key services on the
network.
The TDM Ethernet boards that support the NSF function are N4EFS0 and N2EFS4.
The packet Ethernet boards that support the NSF function are N1PEG16, N1PETF8, and
N1PEX1.
When a warm reset is performed on the packet cross-connect board N1PSXCS, the
interruption duration of the data services on processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 is
within 50 ms, thus complying with the carrier-level service non-interruption standard.
7.8.5 Smooth Upgrade
Based on the increasing demands for packet services and stable requirements for conventional
TDM services, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports a smooth upgrade from the TDM mode to the
packet mode.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following smooth upgrade schemes:

Smooth upgrade through adding boards and software upgrade, without replacement of
the original equipment

Smooth upgrade through replacement of the original cross-connect board with a
dual-mode cross-connect board, which can process the services in TDM mode and in
packet mode
System
Product Description 8 Security Management

8-1

8 Security Management
About This Chapter
The NMS uses many schemes to manage the security of the OptiX OSN 3500 NE.
8.1 Authentication Management
Considering the security, only the legal user can log in to the NE after authentication.
8.2 Authorization Management
Proper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful operations
performed by each user and the security of the NE system.
8.3 Network Security Management
Safe data transmission between the NMS and NEs is the prerequisite for the NMS to
effectively manage the NEs.
8.4 System Security Management
Considering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be executed
forcibly.
8.5 Log Management
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides log management functions.
8.1 Authentication Management
Considering the security, only the legal user can log in to the NE after authentication.

NE login management: You can successfully log in to the NE only by entering a valid
user name and a valid password.

NE user switching: On a client, only one user is allowed to operate the NE each time.
For this reason, if multiple users intend to operate the same NE simultaneously, they
need to be switched to ensure that the data is unique.

Forcibly making other users exit from the NE: To avoid errors caused by simultaneous
configuration by multiple users, or to prevent other users from illegally logging in to the
NE, one user can forcibly make other users who are at lower level exit from the NE.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

NE login locking: After the locking function is enabled, a user whose level is lower than
that of the current user is not allowed to log in to the NE.

NE setting locking: You can lock the settings of functional modules of the NE to prevent
other users from operating the locked modules.

Query the online NE users.
8.2 Authorization Management
Proper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful operations
performed by each user and the security of the NE system.

NE user management:
According to the operation authorities, NE users are divided into five levels, which
involve monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, and
debugging level in an ascending order.
According to the NMS, NE users are classified into LCT NE users, EMS NE users,
CMD NE users, and general NE users.
Create NE users, assign authorities, or specify a user flag.
Modify the user name, change the password, modify the operation authority, or
change the user flag.
Delete NE users.

NE user group management:
According to the operation authority, by default, NE user groups are divided into
administrator group, super administrator group, operator group, monitoring personnel
group, and maintenance personnel group.
Modify the group of a user.
8.3 Network Security Management
Safe data transmission between the NMS and NEs is the prerequisite for the NMS to
effectively manage the NEs.

The NMS communicates with NEs through the security socket layer (SSL) protocol.
Therefore, the data is complete and safe.

Set the ACL rule to filter the received IP packets, control the data traffic in the network,
and to avoid malicious attack. According to the system security level, the ACL rule is
divided into basic ACL and advanced ACL.
For an NE that requires lower security level, you can set the basic ACL rule only to
check the source address of the IP packets only.
For an NE that requires higher security level, you can set the advanced ACL rule. In
this case, the NE checks the source address, sink address, source port, sink port, and
protocol type of the received IP packets.
If both the advanced and the basic ACL rules are available, the NE adopts the
advanced ACL rule to check the packets.
Query the ACL rule.
Modify the ACL rule.
System

8-3

Delete the ACL rule.

An NE can access the NMS by using any of the following methods:
Access over the Ethernet network. By default, an NE allows the NMS to access it
over the Ethernet network.
Access through the serial interface.
Access through the OAM port.
Access through the COM port. Owing to the security, after an NE is initialized or
downloads data, by default, the COM access function is disabled. The COM access
function can be enabled when necessary.

Control the access to NEs by using LCT: If the NMS needs to be used to manage NEs,
you can enable the LCT access authority allowed by the NE on the NMS.

When the NMS communicates with an NE, confidential data (such as user name and
password) is encrypted.
8.4 System Security Management
Considering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be executed
forcibly.

Query or set the Warning Screen information of the NE.

Query and set the Warning Screen switch of the NE to decide whether to report an alarm
after a user logs in to the NE.

Query or set the earliest expiry time and the latest expiry time of the password.

Query or set the maximum number of illegal login attempts.

Query or set the maximum number of overdue password attempts.

Query or set the password uniqueness.
8.5 Log Management
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides log management functions.
8.5.1 NE Security Log Management
The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operation
results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations.
8.5.2 Syslog Management
The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. For
unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the log
server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol.
8.5.1 NE Security Log Management
The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operation
results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations.

Query the security logs of the NE.

Set forwarding NE logs to the Syslog Server.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

8.5.2 Syslog Management
The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. For
unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the log
server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports:

Enabling and disabling of Syslog protocol

Setting of Syslog protocol transmit modes: UDP (by default) and TCP

Adding and deletion of Syslog servers

Coexisting of multiple Syslog servers and the sending of logs to multiple servers at the
same time

Reporting of alarms upon the communication disconnection between the Syslog server
and the NE
Figure 8-1 shows how the Syslog protocol is transmitted in a network. To ensure the security
of system logs, make sure that at least two system log servers are available in a network.
Normally, IP protocol is used for the communication between the NE and the system log
servers. The communication between NEs can be realized through several methods, for
example, ECC mode or IP over DCC mode.
Figure 8-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting
NMS
Syslog Server A
Syslog Server B
real time
security log
TCP/IP
NE A
(client)
NE B
NE C
(client)
NE D
ECC/ IP OVER DCC

Normally, a system log server is a workstation or server that is dedicated to storing the system logs of all
NEs in a network.
A forwarding gateway NE receives the system logs of other NEs and forwards the logs to the system log
server. In Figure 8-1, NE A and NE C are forwarding gateway NEs.
When IP protocol is adopted on each NE for communication, every NE can directly
communicate with the two system log servers through the IP protocol. Hence, configure the IP
addresses and port numbers on the NE, and the system is able to transmit the NE logs to the
two Syslog servers through the auto addressing function of IP protocol. No forwarding
gateway NE is required.
When ECC mode is adopted on each NE for communication, the NE that does not directly
connect to the Syslog servers cannot communicate with the servers. The logs of the NE must
be transmitted to a gateway NE that directly communicates with the Syslog servers through
ECC. Then, the logs are forwarded to the Syslog servers by the gateway NE. Hence, the
System

8-5

forwarding gateway NE must be configured, for example, configure NE A as the forwarding
gateway NE for NE D.
For detailed Syslog configuration procedures, refer to the OptiX OSN 3500 Optical
Transmission System Configuration Guide.
System
Product Description 9 Technical Specifications

9-1

9 Technical Specifications
About This Chapter
The technical specifications provide the specifications of the optical interfaces, electrical
interfaces and environment.
9.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment
The overall specifications of the equipment include the specifications of the cabinet,
specifications of the subrack, power supply parameters, timeslot numbering, laser safety class,
timing and synchronization performance, transmission performance, protection performance,
and environmental specifications.
9.2 Performance Specifications of Packet Switching
This topic describes the performance specifications of packet switching of the OptiX OSN
3500 in terms of system, protection, and clock.
9.3 TDM Performance Specification
This topic describes the TDM performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of
clock, transmission, protection, timeslot, and laser safety class.
9.4 Microwave RF Performance
This topic describes the radio work mode, frequency band, receiver sensitivity, transceiver
performance, distortion sensitivity, IF performance, baseband signal processing performance
of the modem, and link reliability.
9.5 Parameters Specified for the Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces, STM-4 optical
interfaces, STM-16 optical interfaces, STM-64 optical interfaces, colored optical interfaces,
Ethernet optical interfaces, and ATM optical interfaces. This topic also provides information
on wavelength allocation.
9.6 Parameters Specified for the Electrical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces and DDN electrical
interfaces.
9.7 Parameters Specified for the Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the clock interfaces, 64 kbit/s interfaces, RS-232
interfaces, RS-422 interfaces, and orderwire phone interfaces.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

9.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment
The overall specifications of the equipment include the specifications of the cabinet,
specifications of the subrack, power supply parameters, timeslot numbering, laser safety class,
timing and synchronization performance, transmission performance, protection performance,
and environmental specifications.
9.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet
The technical specifications of the cabinet include the dimensions, weight, and number of
permitted subracks.
9.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack
The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and maximum
power consumption.
9.1.3 Power Supply Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring different PIU boards.
9.1.4 Laser Safety Class
The safety class of the laser on each board is Class 1, Class 4, or Class 1M.
9.1.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility
The OptiX OSN 3500 is designed according to the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards
stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
related tests.
9.1.6 Environmental Specification
The equipment requires proper environment for normal operation.
9.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet
The technical specifications of the cabinet include the dimensions, weight, and number of
permitted subracks.
Table 9-1 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet.
Table 9-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Number of Permitted
Subracks
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000
(H) (T63)
58 1
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000
(H) (N63E)
41 1
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000
(H) (N66T)
71 1
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000
(H) (T66)
80 1
System

9-3

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Number of Permitted
Subracks
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200
(H) (T63)
63 2
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200
(H) (N63E)
45 2
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200
(H) (N66T)
76 2
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200
(H) (T66)
85 2
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600
(H) (T63)
73 2
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600
(H) (T66)
101 2

Both the N63E cabinet and N66T cabinet are available in two heights, namely, 2000 mm and 2200 mm.
If the cabinet that is 2600 mm high is required, add an enclosure frame that is 400 mm high on a cabinet
that is 2200 mm high.
The DC power distribution unit (PDU) is located on the top of a cabinet and is used to provide
power to the equipment. Table 9-2 lists the technical specifications of the PDU.
Table 9-2 Technical specifications of the PDU
Board Single-Cabinet
Input Voltage
(V)
Single-Cabinet
Output Voltage
(V)
Output
Current (A)
Maximum
Number of
Allowed
Subracks
-48 (DC) -38.4 to -57.6 N1PDU
-60 (DC) -48 to -72

4x20 A

4x32 A
2
-48 (DC) -38.4 to -57.6 TN51PDU
02
-60 (DC) -48 to -72

4x60 A

4x30 A
2
NOTE
Two power inputs need to be provided, and they work in 1+1 mode. Theoretically, the two power inputs
work in load-sharing mode. In the telecommunications room, however, it is required that the PDU needs
to provide power supply for an entire subrack. In this case, power failure does not occur if either of the
power inputs fails.

9.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack
The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and maximum
power consumption.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 9-3 lists the dimensions and weight of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
Table 9-3 Dimensions and weight of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
497 (W) x 295 (D) x 722 (H) 23 (net weight of the subrack that is not
installed with boards and fans)

Table 9-4 lists the maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
Table 9-4 Maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
Maximum Configuration Typical Configuration Subrack
Type
Maximum
Power
Consumption
Fuse
Capacity
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on
Typical Configuration
General
OptiX OSN
3500 subrack
720 W 20 A 496 W

Two N1SLD64
(S-64.2b, LC) boards

Two N2SLQ4 (S-4.1,
LC) boards

Two N1SLQ16 (L-16.2,
LC) boards

Two N1SLH1 (S-1.1,
LC) boards

Four N1OU08 boards

Two N2EGT2 boards

Two N1PSXCS boards

One N4GSCC board

One N1AUX board

Two N1PIU boards
Enhanced
OptiX OSN
3500 subrack
1100 W 32 A 626 W

Two N1SL64 (S-64.2b,
LC) boards

Two N2SLQ4 (S-4.1,
LC) boards

One N1SLT1 (S-1.1,
LC) board

Two N1PEG8 boards

Two N1PEX2 boards

Two N1PETF8 boards

Two N2PSXCSA boards

One N1AUX board

Two N1PIUA boards
System

9-5

Maximum Configuration Typical Configuration Subrack
Type
Maximum
Power
Consumption
Fuse
Capacity
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on
Typical Configuration
Enhanced
OptiX OSN
3500 subrack
2300 W
a
60 A 920 W

Five N1PEG8 boards

Two N1PEX2 boards

Two N2PEX1 boards

Three N1PETF8 boards

Two N2PSXCSA boards

One N1AUX board

Two N1PIUB boards
a: indicated the default maximum power consumption of the equipment is 1100 W.

9.1.3 Power Supply Parameters
This topic describes the parameters for configuring different PIU boards.
Table 9-5 lists the power supply parameters.
Table 9-5 Power supply parameters
Item Specification
Power supply mode DC power supply
Nominal voltage -48 V or -60 V
Voltage range -38.4 V to -57.6 V or -48 V to -72 V
Maximum current 16 A/28.4 A
b
60 A/
c

b: This value indicates the maximum current of the equipment when the enhanced subrack
(1100 W) is used.
c: This value indicates the maximum current of the equipment when the enhanced subrack
(2300 W) is used.

9.1.4 Laser Safety Class
The safety class of the laser on each board is Class 1, Class 4, or Class 1M.
The safety classes of the lasers are defined as follows:

Class 1: The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is less than 10
dBm (10 mW).

Class 4: The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is more than 27
dBm (500 mW).
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Class 1M: The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is within the
range from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW).
Table 9-6 lists the safety classes of the lasers on the boards.
Table 9-6 Laser safety class
Laser Safety
Class
Board
Class 1 SDH boards:
N1SL64, N2SL64, N1SF64, N1SF64A, N1SLD64, N1SL16, N2SL16,
N3SL16, N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N3SL16A, N1SLO16, N1SLQ16,
N2SLQ16, N1SF16, N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4, N3SLO1, N3SLQ41,
N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4,
N1SLT1, N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, N2SLQ1, N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1,
N2SLO1
Data boards:
N1EGT2, N2EGT2, N2EGS2, N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N1EAS2,
N2EGR2, N2EMR0, N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, N1IDQ1, N1MST4
Interface boards and switching and bridging boards:
N1OU08, N2OU08, N1EFF8
Packet boards :
N1PEG16, N1PEX1, N1PEG8, N1PEX2, N2PEX1
Dual-mode bridging boards:
N1EDQ41
CES boards:
N1CQ1
WDM boards:
N1MR2C, N1FIB, N1MR2A, N1LWX
Class 4 Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards:
N1RPC01, N1RPC02
Class 1M WDM boards:
TN11OBU1, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4
Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards:
BA2, BPA, 61COA, N1COA, 62COA

9.1.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility
The OptiX OSN 3500 is designed according to the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards
stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
related tests.
Table 9-7 lists the passed EMC-related test specifications.
System

9-7

Table 9-7 EMC test results
Item Standard
Radiated emission CISPR22 Class
AEN55022 Class A
Conducted emission for DC ports CISPR22 Class A
EN55022 Class A
Conducted emission for signal ports CISPR22 Class A
EN55022 Class A
Immunity to radiated electromagnetic
field
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-3(80 MHz-2700 MHz: 10
V/m)
Immunity to electrostatic discharge ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-2 (air discharge: 8 kV;
contact discharge: 6 kV)
Immunity to electrical fast transient bursts
for DC ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-4 (1 kV)
Immunity to electrical fast transient bursts
for signal ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2
IEC 61000-4-4 (1 kV)
Immunity to surges for DC ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-5 (line to line: 1 kV, line to
ground: 2 kV)
Immunity to surges for signal ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-5 (1 kV)
Immunity to continuous conducted
interference for DC ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V)
Immunity to continuous conducted
interference for signal ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V)
Immunity to continuous voltage dips and
short interruption and voltage variation for
DC power port
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-29

9.1.6 Environmental Specification
The equipment requires proper environment for normal operation.
The equipment can operate normally in a long term in the environment defined in Table 9-8.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 9-8 Environment specifications for long-term operation
Specifications Description
Altitude 4850 m
Air pressure 55 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature 0 to 45
Relative humidity 10% to 90%
Anti-seismic performance Compliant with ETS300-019-2-3-AMD

9.2 Performance Specifications of Packet Switching
This topic describes the performance specifications of packet switching of the OptiX OSN
3500 in terms of system, protection, and clock.
9.2.1 Packet System Performance
The same performance parameters are available for different performance items of the OptiX
OSN 3500.
9.2.2 Protection Performance of Packet Switching
The protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements.
9.2.3 IEEE 1588 V2 Synchronization Performance
The timing and synchronization performance complies with ITU-T G.813.
9.2.1 Packet System Performance
The same performance parameters are available for different performance items of the OptiX
OSN 3500.
Table 9-9 lists the system performance parameters specified for the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 9-9 System performance specifications
Item Specification
MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protection
switching time
< 50 ms
LAG protection switching time

< 500 ms in the case of link interruption in both
directions

< 3s in the case of link interruption in one direction
GSCC switching performance The services are not affected in the case of board
removal or manual switching.
System

9-9

Item Specification
MSTP topology convergence
time
In the case of a link fault, the switching time is less
than 1s if the rapid switching condition is met; the
switching time is less than 30s if the rapid switching
condition is not met.
Number of supported MPLS
tunnels
Supports 16K MPLS unidirectional/bidirectional
tunnels.
Number of static pseudo wires
(PW)
Supports 16K MPLS unidirectional/bidirectional PWs.
Number of supported E-Line
services
8K
Number of supported E-LAN
services
1K
Number of supported E-Aggr
services
4
Maximum number of virtual ports
supported by each VSI
256
Number of static MAC addresses
of the entire equipment on a
private network
2048
Number of VLANs 64K
Committed access rate (CAR) 8192
Address resolution protocol
(ARP)
Static: 512
Dynamic: 256

The preceding table lists only the maximum value of each packet-related item.
9.2.2 Protection Performance of Packet Switching
1+1 and 1:1 Protection for MPLS Tunnels
Table 9-10 lists the parameters of the MPLS 1+1 and 1:1 protection.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 9-10 MPLS 1+1 and 1:1 protection parameters
Swit
chin
g
Type
Revert
ive
Mode
Swit
chin
g
Prot
ocol
Switchi
ng
Mode
Switc
hing
Time
Switching
Delay Time
Default
WTR
Time
Switching
Condition
1+1
single
-ende
d
switc
hing
Non-re
vertive
APS Locked
switching
Forced
switching
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
50
ms
0 to 100ms (0
by default)
-
1+1
dual-
ended
switc
hing
Non-re
vertive
APS Locked
switching
Forced
switching
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
50
ms
0 to 100ms (0
by default)
-
1+1
single
-ende
d
switc
hing
Reverti
ve
APS Locked
switching
Forced
switching
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
50
ms
0 to 100ms (0
by default)
5m
1+1
dual-
ended
switc
hing
Reverti
ve
APS Locked
switching
Forced
switching
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
50
ms
0 to 100ms (0
by default)
5m
Any of the
following
conditions
triggers the
switching:

The board
has a
hardware
or
software
failure.

The board
is in a cold
reset.

A
switching
command
is
manually
issued.

Tunnel
faulty is
detected
by MPLS
OAM.
System

9-11

Swit
chin
g
Type
Revert
ive
Mode
Swit
chin
g
Prot
ocol
Switchi
ng
Mode
Switc
hing
Time
Switching
Delay Time
Default
WTR
Time
Switching
Condition
1:1
dual-
ended
switc
hing
Non-re
vertive
APS Locked
switching
Forced
switching
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
50
ms
0 to 100ms (0
by default)
-
1:1
dual-
ended
switc
hing
Reverti
ve
APS Locked
switching
Forced
switching
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
50
ms
0 to 100ms (0
by default)
5m

PW APS 1+1/1:1 Protection
Table 9-11 provides the parameters for PW APS protection.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 9-11 PW APS 1+1/1:1 protection parameters
Swit
chin
g
Type
Revert
ive
Mode
Swit
chin
g
Prot
ocol
Switchi
ng
Mode
Switc
hing
Time
Switching
Delay Time
Default
WTR
Time
Switching
Condition
1+1
1:1
Reverti
ve
Non-re
vertive
APS Locked
switching
Forced
switching
Automati
c
switching
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
50
ms
0s to 10s 1 min to
12 min
Any of the
following
conditions
triggers the
switching:
The board
has a
hardware or
software
failure.
The board is
in a cold
reset.
A switching
command is
manually
issued.
PW faulty is
detected by
PW OAM.

LPT Protection
Table 9-12 provides parameters for point-to-point LPT protection.
Table 9-12 Parameters for point-to-point LPT protection
Switching
Performance
3s 16 LinkDown
ETH_LOS
None
System

9-13

Switching
Performance
500 ms 16 On the network side:

dServer

dLOCV

dTTSI_Mismatch

dTTSI_Mismerge

dExcess
On the client side:

ETH_LOS

LINK_DOWN
None

Table 9-13 provides parameters for point-to-multipoint LPT protection.
Table 9-13 Parameters for point-to-multipoint LPT protection
Switching
Performance
Instance Switching
Condition
Switching Mode
3s 16 LinkDown
ETH_LOS
Strict mode
Non-strict mode
500 ms 16 On the network side:

dServer

dLOCV

dTTSI_Mismatch

dTTSI_Mismerge

dExcess
On the user side:

ETH_LOS

LINK_DOWN
Strict mode
Non-strict mode

LAG Protection
Table 9-14 lists the related parameters of the LAG protection.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 9-14 Parameters for 1+1 LAG protection of Ethernet boards (packet mode)
Parameter LAG
Switching condition (Any of
the following conditions
triggers the switching.)

cut in both directions. Switching time 500 ms.

cut in one direction. In addition, the ports of the
mode. Switching time 500 ms.

connected to each other through static LAG, no
both directions. Switching time 3.5s.
Revertive mode

Revertive (default)

Non-revertive
LAG Type

Static

Manual
Load sharing mode

Load sharing

Load non-sharing
NOTE
In the case of a manually aggregated LAG and the full-duplex configured for the ports, a fiber cut in one
direction cannot ensure successful switching. In the other cases, the switching can be performed
successfully within a period of three to six seconds.
with the IEEE 802.3ad standard. The ports include FE and GE ports.

VRRP Protection
Table 9-15 provides the parameters for VRRP protection.
Table 9-15 Parameters for RNC dual-homing by using the VRRP technology
Traced
Object
VRRP
Priority
Switchi
ng
Protocol
Switching
Mode
Switching
Delay
Time
Switching
Condition
BFD 1 to 254
100 by
default
VRRP
protocol
Preemption
mode
Non-preempti
on mode
Preemption
mode: 0s to
120s
Non-preem
ption
mode: 0
Any of the following
conditions triggers
the switching:
ETH_LOS
LINK_DOWN
BFD_DOWN
System

9-15

9.2.3 IEEE 1588 V2 Synchronization Performance
Table 9-16 provides the timing and synchronization performance of the IEEE 1588 V2 high
precision clock.
Table 9-16 Timing and synchronization performance of the IEEE 1588 V2 high precision clock
Performance Description
Precision in the case of one station 30 ns
Precision in the case of 20 stations 1 us

Table 9-17 provides the timing and synchronization performance of the synchronous Ethernet.
Table 9-17 Timing and synchronization performance of the synchronous Ethernet
Clock frequency accuracy (24 hours) 1 ppm

9.3 TDM Performance Specification
This topic describes the TDM performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of
clock, transmission, protection, timeslot, and laser safety class.
9.3.1 Timing and Synchronization Performance
9.3.2 Transmission Performance
The transmission performance complies with ITU-T standards.
9.3.3 Protection Performance
9.3.4 Timeslot Numbering
The equipment supports two TU-12 numbering schemes.
9.3.1 Timing and Synchronization Performance
Table 9-18 lists the timing and synchronization performance.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 9-18 Timing and synchronization performance
Output Jitter ITU-T G.813 compliant
Output Frequency in Free-Run Mode ITU-T G.813 compliant
Long-Term Phase Variation in Locked
Mode
ITU-T G.813 compliant

9.3.2 Transmission Performance
The transmission performance complies with ITU-T standards.
Table 9-19 lists the transmission performance.
Table 9-19 Transmission performance
Jitter at STM-N Interface Compliant with ITU-T G.813/G.825
Jitter at PDH Interface Compliant with ITU-T G.823/G.783
Bit Error Compliant with ITU-T G.826

9.3.3 Protection Performance
Linear MSP
Table 9-20 lists the linear MSP parameters.
Table 9-20 Linear MSP parameters
Protection
Type
Revertive
Mode
Switching
Protocol
Switching
Time
Default
WTR
Time
Switching
Condition
1+1
single-ended
switching
Non-reverti
ve
Not
required
50 ms -
1+1
single-ended
switching
Revertive Not
required
50 ms 600s
1+1
dual-ended
switching
Non-reverti
ve
APS
protocol
50 ms -
Any of the
following
conditions
triggers the
switching:

R_LOS

R_LOF

MS_AIS

B2_EXC
System

9-17

Protection
Type
Revertive
Mode
Switching
Protocol
Switching
Time
Default
WTR
Time
Switching
Condition
1+1
dual-ended
switching
Revertive APS
protocol
50 ms 600s
1:N (N14)
dual-ended
switching
Revertive APS
protocol
50 ms 600s

B2_SD
(optional)

Forced
switching

Manual
switching

Exercise
switching

MSP Ring
Table 9-21 lists the MSP ring parameters.
Table 9-21 MSP ring parameters
Protection
Type
Revertiv
e Mode
Switching Mode Switchi
ng
Time
Default
WTR
Time
Switching
Condition
Two-fiber
bidirectional
MSP
Revertive

Forced switching

Manual switching

Exercise
switching
50 ms 600s
Two-fiber
unidirection
al MSP
Revertive

Forced switching

Manual switching

Exercise
switching
50 ms 600s
Four-fiber
bidirectional
MSP
Revertive

Forced switching
- ring

Manual switching
- ring

Exercise
switching - ring

Forced switching
- span

Manual switching
- span

Exercise
switching - span
50 ms 600s
Any of the
following
conditions
triggers the
switching:

R_LOS

R_LOF

MS_AIS

B2_EXC

B2_SD

Forced
switching

Manual
switching

Exercise
switching

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

SNCP
Table 9-22 lists the SNCP parameters.
Table 9-22 SNCP parameters
Protection
Type
Revertive
Mode
Switching
Time
Default WTR
Time
Switching
Conditions
SNCP Revertive 50 ms 600s Any of the
System

9-19

Protection
Type
Revertive
Mode
Switching
Time
Default WTR
Time
Switching
Conditions
Non-revertive 50 ms -
following
alarms triggers
the switching of
VC4 level
SNCP:

R_LOS

R_LOF

R_LOC

MS_AIS

B2_EXC

AU_AIS

AU_LOP

B3_EXC
(Optional)

B3_SD
(Optional)

HP_UNEQ
(Optional)

HP_TIM
(Optional)
Any of the
following
alarms triggers
the switching of
VC3 level
SNCP:

TU_LOP

TU_AIS

B3_EXC
(Optional)

B3_SD
(Optional)
Any of the
following
alarms triggers
the switching of
VC12 level
SNCP:

TU_LOP

TU_AIS

BIP_EXC
(Optional)

BIP_SD
(Optional)
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

9.3.4 Timeslot Numbering
The equipment supports two TU-12 numbering schemes.
Table 9-23 and Table 9-24 describe the two TU-12 numbering schemes of the OptiX OSN
3500.
Table 9-23 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (scheme I)
TUG2
(7-1)
TUG2
(7-2)
TUG2
(7-3)
TUG
(7-4)
TUG
(7-5)
TUG
(7-6)
TUG
(7-7)
TU-3 (3-1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
TU-3 (3-2) 2
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
2
6
2
7
2
8
2
9
3
0
3
1
3
2
3
3
3
4
3
5
3
6
3
7
3
8
3
9
4
0
4
1
4
2
TU-3 (3-3) 4
3
4
4
4
5
4
6
4
7
4
8
4
9
5
0
5
1
5
2
5
3
5
4
5
5
5
6
5
7
5
8
5
9
6
0
6
1
6
2
6
3

Table 9-24 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (scheme II)
TUG2
(7-1)
TUG2
(7-2)
TUG2
(7-3)
TUG2
(7-4)
TUG2
(7-5)
TUG2
(7-6)
TUG2
(7-7)
TU-3 (3-1) 1 2
2
4
3
4 2
5
4
6
7 2
8
4
9
1
0
3
1
5
2
1
3
3
4
5
5
1
6
3
7
5
8
1
9
4
0
6
1
TU-3 (3-2) 2 2
3
4
4
5 2
6
4
7
8 2
9
5
0
1
1
3
2
5
3
1
4
3
5
5
6
1
7
3
8
5
9
2
0
4
1
6
2
TU-3 (3-3) 3 2
4
4
5
6 2
7
4
8
9 3
0
5
1
1
2
3
3
5
4
1
5
3
6
5
7
1
8
3
9
6
0
2
1
4
2
6
3

9.4 Microwave RF Performance
This topic describes the radio work mode, frequency band, receiver sensitivity, transceiver
performance, distortion sensitivity, IF performance, baseband signal processing performance
of the modem, and link reliability.

This topic describes the specifications of the ODU. The OptiX OSN equipment does not support the
256QAM modulation scheme or the 56 MHz channel spacing.
9.4.1 Radio Work Modes
The OptiX OSN equipment supports various work modes bases on TU/SDH microwave
frames.
System

9-21

9.4.2 IF Performance
The IF performance indicates the performances of the IF signals and ODU O&M signals.
9.4.3 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
The baseband signal processing performance of the modem indicates the performances of the
FEC encoding mode and adaptive time-domain equalizer for baseband signals.
9.4.4 Equipment Reliability
The 1+0 non-protection configuration and 1+1 protection configuration have different link
reliabilities.
9.4.5 SP ODU
The SP ODU is a type of the standard power ODU.
9.4.6 HP ODU
The HP ODU is a type of the high power ODU.
9.4.1 Radio Work Modes
The OptiX OSN equipment supports various work modes bases on TU/SDH microwave
frames.
Table 9-25 Radio work modes
Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)
4xE1 QPSK 7
4xE1 16QAM 3.5
8xE1 QPSK 14 (13.75)
8xE1 16QAM 7
16xE1 QPSK 28 (27.5)
16xE1 16QAM 14 (13.75)
STM-1 128QAM 28
22xE1 32QAM 14 (13.75)
26xE1 64QAM 14 (13.75)
35xE1 16QAM 28 (27.5)
44xE1 32QAM 28 (27.5)
53xE1 64QAM 28 (27.5)

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.
The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the OptiX
OSN equipment. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.
9.4.2 IF Performance
The IF performance indicates the performances of the IF signals and ODU O&M signals.
Table 9-26 IF performance
Item Performance
IF signal
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 140
Impedance (ohm) 50
ODU O&M signal
Modulation scheme ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 5.5
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 10

9.4.3 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
The baseband signal processing performance of the modem indicates the performances of the
FEC encoding mode and adaptive time-domain equalizer for baseband signals.
Table 9-27 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item Performance
Encoding mode

Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH signals

Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for
SDH signals
Adaptive
time-domain
equalizer for
baseband signals
Support

9.4.4 Equipment Reliability
The 1+0 non-protection configuration and 1+1 protection configuration have different link
reliabilities.
System

9-23

Table 9-28 Link reliability per hop
Performance Item
1+0 Non-protection
Configuration
1+1 Protection
Configuration
MTBF (h) 12.03x10
4
51.6x10
4

MTTR (h) 1 1
Availability 99.99917% 99.99981%

9.4.5 SP ODU
The SP ODU is a type of the standard power ODU.
Modulation Mode
Table 9-29 Modulation Mode (SP ODU)
Item Performance
Modulation
mode
QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM
Channel
Spacing
3.5/7/14/28 MHz

Frequency Band
Table 9-30 Frequency Band (SP ODU)
Frequency
Band
Frequency Range (GHz) T/R Spacing (MHz)
7GHz 7.0937.897 154, 161, 168, 196, 245
8GHz 7.7318.496 119, 126, 266, 311.32
11GHz 10.67511.745 490, 500, 530
13GHz 12.75113.248 266
15GHz 14.40315.348 315, 322, 420, 490, 728
18GHz 17.68519.710 1008, 1010, 1560
23GHz 21.20023.618 1008, 1200, 1232
26GHz 24.54926.453 1008
38GHz 37.04440,105 700, 1260
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Transceiver Performance
Table 9-31 Transceiver Performance (SP ODU)
Performance Item
QPSK 16QAM/32QA
M
64QAM/128Q
AM
256QAM
Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm)
@7 GHz 27 22.5 18.5 16.5
@8 GHz 27 22.5 18.5 16.5
@11 GHz 26 21.5 17.5 15.5
@13 GHz 26 21.5 17.5 15.5
@15 GHz 26 21.5 17.5 15.5
@18 GHz 25.5 21.5 17.5 15.5
@23 GHz 24 20.5 16.5 14.5
@26 GHz 23.5 19.5 15.5 13.5
@38 GHz 22 17.5 13.5 11.5
Nominal
minimum
transmit power
(dBm)
6
Nominal
maximum
receive power
(dBm)
20 25
Frequency
stability (ppm)
5

IF Performance
Table 9-32 IF Performance
Item Performance
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
350 IF signal
Receive frequency of
the IF board (MHz)
140
System

9-25

Item Performance
Impedance (ohm) 50
Modulation mode ASK
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
5.5
ODU O&M signal
the IF board (MHz)
10

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption
Table 9-33 Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption (SP ODU)
Item Performance
Dimensions < 280 mm x 92 mm x 280 mm (width x depth x
height)
Typical Weight (kg) 4.6
Typical Power Consumption (W) 35

Frequency information

Frequency ranges shown are Tx signal frequencies lower / upper limits, that is, not the channel center
frequencies. The lowest available channel center frequency is at least the lowest frequency shown plus
one half of the selected channel spacing. The highest available channel center frequency is at most the
maximum frequency shown minus one half of the selected channel spacing.
Table 9-34 Frequency information of the 7 GHz frequency band (SP ODU)
Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
154 A 7,428.00 7,484.00 7,582.00 7,638.00
154 B 7,470.00 7,526.00 7,624.00 7,680.00
154 C 7,512.00 7,568.00 7,666.00 7,722.00
161 A 7,114.00 7,177.00 7,275.00 7,338.00
161 B 7,149.00 7,212.00 7,310.00 7,373.00
161 C 7,184.00 7,247.00 7,345.00 7,408.00
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
161 D 7,219.00 7,282.00 7,380.00 7,443.00
161 E 7,239.00 7,302.00 7,400.00 7,463.00
161 F 7,274.00 7,337.00 7,435.00 7,498.00
161 G 7,309.00 7,372.00 7,470.00 7,533.00
161 H 7,344.00 7,407.00 7,505.00 7,568.00
161 I 7,414.00 7,477.00 7,575.00 7,638.00
161 J 7,449.00 7,512.00 7,610.00 7,673.00
161 K 7,484.00 7,547.00 7,645.00 7,708.00
161 L 7,519.00 7,582.00 7,680.00 7,743.00
161 M 7,539.00 7,602.00 7,700.00 7,763.00
161 N 7,574.00 7,637.00 7,735.00 7,798.00
161 O 7,609.00 7,672.00 7,770.00 7,833.00
161 P 7,644.00 7,707.00 7,805.00 7,868.00
168 A 7,443.00 7,499.00 7,611.00 7,667.00
168 B 7,485.00 7,541.00 7,653.00 7,709.00
168 C 7,527.00 7,583.00 7,695.00 7,751.00
196 A 7,093.00 7,149.00 7,289.00 7,345.00
196 B 7,121.00 7,177.00 7,317.00 7,373.00
196 C 7,149.00 7,205.00 7,345.00 7,401.00
196 D 7,177.00 7,233.00 7,373.00 7,429.00
196 E 7,205.00 7,261.00 7,401.00 7,457.00
245 A 7,400.00 7,484.00 7,645.00 7,729.00
245 B 7,484.00 7,568.00 7,729.00 7,813.00
245 C 7,568.00 7,652.00 7,813.00 7,897.00

System

9-27

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
119/126 A 8,279.00 8,307.00 8,398.00 8,426.00
119/126 B 8,293.00 8,321.00 8,412.00 8,440.00
119/126 C 8,307.00 8,335.00 8,426.00 8,454.00
119/126 D 8,321.00 8,349.00 8,440.00 8,468.00
119/126 E 8,335.00 8,363.00 8,454.00 8,482.00
119/126 F 8,349.00 8,377.00 8,468.00 8,496.00
266 A 7,905.00 8,024.00 8,171.00 8,290.00
266 B 8,017.00 8,136.00 8,283.00 8,402.00
311.32 A 7,731.00 7,867.00 8,042.00 8,178.00
311.32 B 7,835.00 7,971.00 8,146.00 8,282.00

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
490/500 A 10,700.00 10,890.00 11,200.00 11,390.00
490/500 B 10,855.00 11,045.00 11,355.00 11,545.00
490/500 C 11,010.00 11,200.00 11,510.00 11,700.00
530 A 10,675.00 10,855.00 11,205.00 11,385.00
530 B 10,795.00 10,975.00 11,325.00 11,505.00
530 C 10,915.00 11,135.00 11,445.00 11,665.00
530 D 11,035.00 11,215.00 11,565.00 11,745.00

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
266 A 12,751.00 12,814.00 13,017.00 13,080.00
266 B 12,807.00 12,870.00 13,073.00 13,136.00
266 C 12,863.00 12,926.00 13,129.00 13,192.00
266 D 12,919.00 12,982.00 13,185.00 13,248.00

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
315/322 A 14,627.00 14,746.00 14,942.00 15,061.00
315/322 B 14,725.00 14,844.00 15,040.00 15,159.00
315/322 C 14,823.00 14,942.00 15,138.00 15,257.00
420 A 14,501.00 14,613.00 14,921.00 15,033.00
420 B 14,606.00 14,725.00 15,026.00 15,145.00
420 C 14,718.00 14,837.00 15,138.00 15,257.00
420 D 14,816.00 14,928.00 15,236.00 15,348.00
490 A 14,403.00 14,522.00 14,893.00 15,012.00
490 B 14,515.00 14,634.00 15,005.00 15,124.00
490 C 14,627.00 14,746.00 15,117.00 15,236.00
490 D 14,739.00 14,858.00 15,229.00 15,348.00
728 B 14,500.00 14,625.00 15,228.00 15,353.00

System

9-29

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
1010/1008 A 17,685.00 17,985.00 18,695.00 18,995.00
1010/1008 B 17,930.00 18,230.00 18,940.00 19,240.00
1010/1008 C 18,180.00 18,480.00 19,190.00 19,490.00
1010/1008 D 18,400.00 18,700.00 19,410.00 19,710.00
1560 C 17,700.00 18,140.00 19,260.00 19,700.00

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
1,008 A 21,994.00 22,330.00 23,002.00 23,338.00
1,008 B 22,274.00 22,610.00 23,282.00 23,618.00
1,200 A 21,200.00 21,600.00 22,400.00 22,800.00
1,200 B 21,600.00 22,000.00 22,800.00 23,200.00
1,200 C 22,000.00 22,400.00 23,200.00 23,600.00
1,232 A 21,200.00 21,500.00 22,432.00 22,732.00
1,232 B 21,472.00 21,786.00 22,704.00 23,018.00
1,232 C 21,779.00 22,093.00 23,011.00 23,325.00
1,232 D 22,086.00 22,386.00 23,318.00 23,618.00

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
1008 A 24,549.00 24,885.00 25,557.00 25,893.00
1008 B 24,829.00 25,165.00 25,837.00 26,173.00
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
1008 C 25,109.00 25,445.00 26,117.00 26,453.00

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
700 A 38,595.00 38,805.00 39,295.00 39,505.00
700 B 38,795.00 39,005.00 39,495.00 39,705.00
700 C 38,995.00 39,205.00 39,695.00 39,905.00
700 D 39,195.00 39,405.00 39,895.00 40,105.00
1260 A 37,044.00 37,632.00 38,304.00 38,892.00
1260 B 37,604.00 38,192.00 38,864.00 39,452.00

9.4.6 HP ODU
The HP ODU is a type of the high power ODU.
Modulation Mode
Table 9-43 Modulation Mode (HP ODU)
Item Performance
Modulation
mode
QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM
Channel
Spacing
7/14/28/40/56MHz

System

9-31

Frequency Band
Table 9-44 Frequency band (HP ODU)
Frequency
Band
Frequency Range (GHz) T/R Spacing (MHz)
7 GHz 7.0937.897 154, 161, 168, 196, 245
8 GHz 7.7318.497 119, 126, 151.614, 208, 266, 311.32
11 GHz 10.67511.745 490, 500, 530
13 GHz 12.75113.248 266
15 GHz 14.40015.353 315, 322, 420, 490, 644, 728
18 GHz 17.68519.710 1008, 1010, 1560
23 GHz 21.20023.618 1008, 1200, 1232
26 GHz 24.54926.453 1008
32 GHz 31.81533.383 812
38 GHz 37.04440.105 700, 1260

Transceiver Performance
Table 9-45 Transceiver performance (HP ODU)
Performance Item
QPSK 16QAM/32QA
M
64QAM/128Q
AM
256QAM
Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm)
@7 GHz 30 28 25 23
@8 GHz 30 28 25 23
@11 GHz 28 26 22 20
@13 GHz 26 24 20 18
@15 GHz 26 24 20 18
@18 GHz 25.5 23 19 17
@23 GHz 25 23 19 17
@26 GHz 25 22 19 17
@32 GHz 23 21 17 15
@38 GHz 23 20 17 15
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Performance Item
QPSK 16QAM/32QA
M
64QAM/128Q
AM
256QAM
Nominal minimum transmit power (dBm)
@7 GHz 9
@8 GHz 9
@11 GHz 6
@13 GHz 3
@15 GHz 3
@18 GHz 2
@23 GHz 2
@26 GHz 2
@32 GHz 1
@38 GHz 1
Nominal
maximum
receive power
(dBm)
20 25
Frequency
stability (ppm)
5

IF Performance
Table 9-46 IF Performance
Item Performance
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
350
the IF board (MHz)
140
IF signal
Impedance (ohm) 50
Modulation mode ASK ODU O&M signal
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
5.5
System

9-33

Item Performance
the IF board (MHz)
10

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption
Table 9-47 Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption (HP ODU)
Item Performance
Dimensions < 280 mm x 92 mm x 280 mm (width x depth x
height)
Typical Weight (kg) 4.6
Typical Power Consumption (W) 40 (13/15/18/23/26/32/38GHz)
52 (7/8/11GHz)

Frequency information

Frequency ranges shown are Tx signal frequencies lower / upper limits, that is, not the channel center
frequencies. The lowest available channel center frequency is at least the lowest frequency shown plus
one half of the selected channel spacing. The highest available channel center frequency is at most the
maximum frequency shown minus one half of the selected channel spacing.
Table 9-48 Frequency information of the 7 GHz frequency band (HP ODU)
Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
154 A 7,428.00 7,484.00 7,582.00 7,638.00
154 B 7,470.00 7,526.00 7,624.00 7,680.00
154 C 7,512.00 7,568.00 7,666.00 7,722.00
161 A 7,114.00 7,177.00 7,275.00 7,338.00
161 B 7,149.00 7,212.00 7,310.00 7,373.00
161 C 7,184.00 7,247.00 7,345.00 7,408.00
161 D 7,219.00 7,282.00 7,380.00 7,443.00
161 E 7,239.00 7,302.00 7,400.00 7,463.00
161 F 7,274.00 7,337.00 7,435.00 7,498.00
161 G 7,309.00 7,372.00 7,470.00 7,533.00
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
161 H 7,344.00 7,407.00 7,505.00 7,568.00
161 I 7,414.00 7,477.00 7,575.00 7,638.00
161 J 7,449.00 7,512.00 7,610.00 7,673.00
161 K 7,484.00 7,547.00 7,645.00 7,708.00
161 L 7,519.00 7,582.00 7,680.00 7,743.00
161 M 7,539.00 7,602.00 7,700.00 7,763.00
161 N 7,574.00 7,637.00 7,735.00 7,798.00
161 O 7,609.00 7,672.00 7,770.00 7,833.00
161 P 7,644.00 7,707.00 7,805.00 7,868.00
168 A 7,443.00 7,499.00 7,611.00 7,667.00
168 B 7,485.00 7,541.00 7,653.00 7,709.00
168 C 7,527.00 7,583.00 7,695.00 7,751.00
196 A 7,093.00 7,149.00 7,289.00 7,345.00
196 B 7,121.00 7,177.00 7,317.00 7,373.00
196 C 7,149.00 7,205.00 7,345.00 7,401.00
196 D 7,177.00 7,233.00 7,373.00 7,429.00
196 E 7,205.00 7,261.00 7,401.00 7,457.00
245 A 7,400.00 7,484.00 7,645.00 7,729.00
245 B 7,484.00 7,568.00 7,729.00 7,813.00
245 C 7,568.00 7,652.00 7,813.00 7,897.00

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
119/126 A 8,279.00 8,307.00 8,398.00 8,426.00
119/126 B 8,293.00 8,321.00 8,412.00 8,440.00
119/126 C 8,307.00 8,335.00 8,426.00 8,454.00
System

9-35

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
119/126 D 8,321.00 8,349.00 8,440.00 8,468.00
119/126 E 8,335.00 8,363.00 8,454.00 8,482.00
119/126 F 8,349.00 8,377.00 8,468.00 8,496.00
151.614 A 8,203.00 8,271.00 8,355.00 8,423.00
151.614 B 8,240.00 8,308.00 8,392.00 8,460.00
151.614 C 8,277.00 8,345.00 8,429.00 8,497.00
208 A 8,043.00 8,113.00 8,251.00 8,321.00
208 B 8,099.00 8,169.00 8,307.00 8,377.00
208 C 8,155.00 8,225.00 8,363.00 8,433.00
208 D 8,211.00 8,281.00 8,419.00 8,489.00
266 A 7,905.00 8,024.00 8,171.00 8,290.00
266 B 8,017.00 8,136.00 8,283.00 8,402.00
311.32 A 7,731.00 7,867.00 8,042.00 8,178.00
311.32 B 7,835.00 7,971.00 8,146.00 8,282.00

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
490/500 A 10,700.00 10,890.00 11,200.00 11,390.00
490/500 B 10,855.00 11,045.00 11,355.00 11,545.00
490/500 C 11,010.00 11,200.00 11,510.00 11,700.00
530 A 10,675.00 10,855.00 11,205.00 11,385.00
530 B 10,795.00 10,975.00 11,325.00 11,505.00
530 C 10,915.00 11,135.00 11,445.00 11,665.00
530 D 11,035.00 11,215.00 11,565.00 11,745.00

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
266 A 12,751.00 12,814.00 13,017.00 13,080.00
266 B 12,807.00 12,870.00 13,073.00 13,136.00
266 C 12,863.00 12,926.00 13,129.00 13,192.00
266 D 12,919.00 12,982.00 13,185.00 13,248.00

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
315/322 A 14,627.00 14,746.00 14,942.00 15,061.00
315/322 B 14,725.00 14,844.00 15,040.00 15,159.00
315/322 C 14,823.00 14,942.00 15,138.00 15,257.00
420 A 14,501.00 14,613.00 14,921.00 15,033.00
420 B 14,606.00 14,725.00 15,026.00 15,145.00
420 C 14,718.00 14,837.00 15,138.00 15,257.00
420 D 14,816.00 14,928.00 15,236.00 15,348.00
490 A 14,403.00 14,522.00 14,893.00 15,012.00
490 B 14,515.00 14,634.00 15,005.00 15,124.00
490 C 14,627.00 14,746.00 15,117.00 15,236.00
490 D 14,739.00 14,858.00 15,229.00 15,348.00
644 A 14,400.00 14,512.00 15,044.00 15,156.00
644 B 14,498.00 14,610.00 15,142.00 15,254.00
644 C 14,596.00 14,708.00 15,240.00 15,352.00
728 A 14,500.00 14,615.00 15,228.00 15,343.00
728 B 14,500.00 14,625.00 15,228.00 15,353.00

System

9-37

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
1010/1008 A 17,685.00 17,985.00 18,695.00 18,995.00
1010/1008 B 17,930.00 18,230.00 18,940.00 19,240.00
1010/1008 C 18,180.00 18,480.00 19,190.00 19,490.00
1010/1008 D 18,400.00 18,700.00 19,410.00 19,710.00
1560 C 17,700.00 18,140.00 19,260.00 19,700.00

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
1008 A 21,994.00 22,330.00 23,002.00 23,338.00
1008 B 22,274.00 22,610.00 23,282.00 23,618.00
1200 A 21,200.00 21,600.00 22,400.00 22,800.00
1200 B 21,600.00 22,000.00 22,800.00 23,200.00
1200 C 22,000.00 22,400.00 23,200.00 23,600.00
1232 A 21,200.00 21,500.00 22,432.00 22,732.00
1232 B 21,472.00 21,786.00 22,704.00 23,018.00
1232 C 21,779.00 22,093.00 23,011.00 23,325.00
1232 D 22,086.00 22,386.00 23,318.00 23,618.00

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
1008 A 24,549.00 24,885.00 25,557.00 25,893.00
1008 B 24,829.00 25,165.00 25,837.00 26,173.00
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
1008 C 25,109.00 25,445.00 26,117.00 26,453.00

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
812 A 31,815.00 32,207.00 32,627.00 33,019.00
812 B 32,179.00 32,571.00 32,991.00 33,383.00

Lower Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
Higher Sub-band Tx
Frequency (MHz)
T/R
Spacing
(MHz)
Sub-band
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
700 A 38,595.00 38,805.00 39,295.00 39,505.00
700 B 38,795.00 39,005.00 39,495.00 39,705.00
700 C 38,995.00 39,205.00 39,695.00 39,905.00
700 D 39,195.00 39,405.00 39,895.00 40,105.00
1260 A 37,044.00 37,632.00 38,304.00 38,892.00
1260 B 37,604.00 38,192.00 38,864.00 39,452.00

9.5 Parameters Specified for the Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces, STM-4 optical
interfaces, STM-16 optical interfaces, STM-64 optical interfaces, colored optical interfaces,
Ethernet optical interfaces, and ATM optical interfaces. This topic also provides information
on wavelength allocation.

System

9-39

The multi-mode optical interface operates at wavelength 850 nm, whereas the single-mode
optical interface operates at wavelength 1310 nm or 1550 nm. The optical interfaces of
different modes cannot be interconnected.
The optical module type should match the optical fiber type. It is recommended that the
single-mode optical fiber uses the single-mode optical module, and the multi-mode optical
fiber uses the multi-mode optical module.
9.5.1 STM-1 Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces.
9.5.5 Ethernet Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
3500.
9.5.6 Tunable-Wavelength Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the tunable-wavelength optical interface.
9.5.7 ATM Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces.
9.5.8 Colored Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
3500.
9.5.9 Wavelength Allocation
This topic provides information on wavelength allocation of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 9-58 lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
3500.
Table 9-58 Parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 155520 kbit/s
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Parameter Value
Application code I-1 Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2 0 to 2 2 to 15 20 to 40 60 to 80 80 to
100
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1260 to
1360
1270 to
1380
1261 to
1360
1263 to
1360
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
Type of fiber Single-m
ode LC
Multi-m
ode LC
Single-
mode
LC
Single-m
ode LC
Single-
mode
LC
Single-m
ode LC
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -20 to
-14
-15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0 -3 to 0
Receiver sensitivity
(dBm)
-23 -30 -28 -34 -34 -34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -14 -8 -10 -10 -10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2 10 8.2 10 10 10

3500.
Parameter Value
Application code I-4 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2
Transmission distance (km) 0 to 2 2 to 15 20 to 40 50 to 80 80 to 100
Operating wavelength range
(nm)
1261 to
1360
1274 to
1356
1280 to
1335
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Launched optical power
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -15 to -8 -3 to 2 -3 to 2 -3 to 2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -23 -28 -28 -28 -34
Minimum overload (dBm) -8 -8 -8 -8 -13
System

9-41

Parameter Value
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2 8.2 10 10 10.5

3500.
Parameter Value
Application
code
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 L-16.2Je V-16.2J
e (BA)
U-16.2Je
(BA+PA
)
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2 2 to 15 25 to 40 50 to
80
80 to
100
105 to
140
145 to
170
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1266
to
1360
1260 to
1360
1280 to
1335
1500
to
1580
1530 to
1560
1530 to
1565
1550.12
Without
the
booster
amplifie
r (BA):
-2 to 3
Without
the BA
or
pre-ampl
ifier
(PA): -2
to 3
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-10 to
-3
-5 to 0 -2 to 3 -2 to 3 5 to 7
With the
BA: 13
to 15
With the
BA: 15
to 18
Without
the BA
or PA:
-28
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-18 -18 -27 -28 -28 -28
With the
PA: -34
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-3 0 -9 -9 -9 -9 Without
the BA
or PA: -9
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Parameter Value
With the
PA: -10
Dispersion
tolerance
(ps/nm)
12 - - 1200
to
1600
2000 2800 3400
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

Table 9-61 lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 9-61 Parameters specified for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500
Parameter Value
Application code Ue-16.2c Ue-16.2d Ue-16.2f
Meaning of the code
a
FEC + BA (14
dB) + PA
FEC + BA (17
dB) + PA
FEC + BA (17 dB) +
RA + PA
Operating wavelength range
(nm)
1550.12 1550.12 1550.12
Without the BA
or PA: -5 to -1
Without the BA
or PA: -5 to -1
Without the BA, RA,
or PA: -5 to -1
range (dBm)
With the BA:
13 to 15
With the BA:
13 to 15
With the BA: 15 to 18
Without the BA
or PA: -27.5
Without the BA
or PA: -27.5
Without the BA, RA,
or PA: -27.5
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
With the PA:
-37
With the PA:
-37
With the PA: -42
Minimum overload (dBm)
b
-10 -10 -10
(dB)
c

10 10 10
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example,
"BA (14 dB)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC + BA
+ PA" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the FEC,
BA, and PA are used.
b: The parameter values are applicable only to the PA.
c: The parameter values are applicable only to the optical modules. The parameter values of
the amplifier are not provided.
System

9-43

#cn_osn_ts_0007/tab_0123_06 lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 optical
interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 9-62 lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 9-62 Parameters specified for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500
Parameter Value
Application code Ue-64.2c Ue-64.2d Ue-64.2e
Meaning of the
code
a

FEC + BA (14 dB)
+ PA + DCU (60 +
80)
c

FEC + BA (17 dB) +
PA + DCU (80 x 2)
FEC + BA (17 dB) +
RA + PA + DCU (60
x 3)
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1550.12 1550.12 1550.12
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
b

-4 to -1 -4 to -1 -4 to -1
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
b

-14 -14 -14
Minimum
overload (dBm)
b

-1 -1 -1
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
b

10 10 10
Dispersion
tolerance (ps/nm)
b

800 800 800
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example,
"BA (14 dB)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC + BA
+ PA + RA" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the
FEC, BA, PA, and Raman amplifier (RA) are used.
b: The parameter values are applicable only to the optical modules. The parameter values of
the amplifier and dispersion compensation unit (DCU) are not provided.
c: The parameter values indicate the distances that correspond to different dispersion
compensation values.

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

9.5.5 Ethernet Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
3500.
The characteristics of the 10-Gigabit Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500
comply with IEEE 802.3ae. The characteristics of the Gigabit Ethernet optical interfaces of
the OptiX OSN 3500 comply with IEEE 802.3z. The characteristics of the 100 Mbit/s
Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 comply with IEEE 802.3u. Table 9-63 and
Table 9-64 list the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces.
Table 9-63 Parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500
Param
eter
Value
Type of
interfac
e
1000B
ASE-Z
X
1000B
ASE-V
X
1000B
ASE-L
X
1000B
ASE-S
X
100BA
SE-FX
100BA
SE-FX
100BA
SE-FX
100BA
SE-FX
Transm
ission
distanc
e (km)
80 40 10 0.5 80 40 15 2
Type of
fiber
Single-
mode
LC
Single-
mode
LC
Single-
mode
LC
Multi-
mode
LC
Single-
mode
LC
Single-
mode
LC
Single-
mode
LC
Multi-m
ode LC
Launch
ed
optical
power
range
(dBm)
-2 to 5 -5 to 0 -11 to
-3
-9.5 to
0
-5 to 0 -5 to 0 -15 to
-8
-19 to
-14
Operati
ng
wavele
ngth
range
(nm)
1500 to
1580
1270 to
1355
1270 to
1355
770 to
860
1263 to
1360
1480 to
1580
1261 to
1360
1270 to
1380
Minimu
m
overloa
d
(dBm)
-3 -3 -3 0 -10 -10 -7 -14
Receive
r
sensitiv
ity
(dBm)
-22 -22 -19 -17 -34 -34 -28 -30
System

9-45

Param
eter
Value
Minimu
m
extincti
on ratio
(dB)
9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10

Table 9-64 Parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500
Parameter Value
Type of
interface
10GBASE-SR
(LAN)
10GBASE-SW
(WAN)
10GBASE-LR
(LAN)
10GBASE-LW
(WAN)
10GBASE-ER
(LAN)
10GBASE-E
W (WAN)
10GBASE-ZR
(LAN)
10GBASE-ZW
(WAN)
Transmission
distance (km)
0.3 2 10 40 80
Type of fiber Multi-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
-1.3 to -7.3 -6 to -1 -1 to +2 0 to 4
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
840 to 860 1260 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-1 -1 0.5 -1 -7
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-7.5 -11 -15 -24
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
3 6 8.2 9

9.5.6 Tunable-Wavelength Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the tunable-wavelength optical interface.
Table 9-65 lists the specifications of the tunable-wavelength optical interface that complies
with ITU-T G.692.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 9-65 Parameters specified for the tunable-wavelength optical interface
Nominal bit rate 10.709 Gbit/s
Dispersion limit (km) 80
(dBm)
-4 to -1
Optical receiver sensitivity
(dBm)
-14
Minimum overload point
(dBm)
0
Maximum dispersion
allowed on the path (ps/nm)
800
(dB)
13.5

For details on the parameters specified for the STM-64 tunable-wavelength optical interface,
see 9.5.4 STM-64 Optical Interfaces.
9.5.7 ATM Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces.
Table 9-66 lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 3500.
Table 9-67 lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 3500.
Table 9-66 Parameters specified for the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500
Parameter Value
Application code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2
Transmission distance
(km)
0 to 2 2 to 20 20 to 60 60 to 80 80 to 100
Operating wavelength
range (nm)
1270 to
1380
1261 to
1360
1263 to
1360
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
Type of fiber Multi-mo
de LC
Single-mo
de LC
Single-mo
de LC
Single-mo
de LC
Single-mo
de LC
range (dBm)
-20 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0 -3 to 0
(dBm)
-30 -28 -34 -34 -34
System

9-47

Parameter Value
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-14 -8 -10 -10 -10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
10 8.2 10 10 10

Table 9-67 Parameters specified for the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500
Parameter Value
Application code S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2
Transmission distance
(km)
2 to 15 20 to 40 50 to 80 80 to 100
Operating wavelength
range (nm)
1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580
range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -3 to 2 -3 to 2 -3 to 2
(dBm)
-28 -28 -28 -34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-8 -8 -8 -13
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2 10 10 10.5

9.5.8 Colored Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
3500.
With colored interfaces, the OptiX OSN equipment can directly be interconnected with the
WDM equipment.
Table 9-68 the parameters specified for the colored interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 9-68 Parameters specified for the STM-16 and STM-64 colored optical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 3500
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 2488320 kbit/s 2666057
kbit/s
9953280
kbit/s
10709225
kbit/s
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Parameter Value
Dispersion-limite
d distance (km)
170 640 640 40 40
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)
-2 to 3 -5 to -1 -5 to -1 -4 to -1 -4 to -1
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-28 -28 -28 -14 -14
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-9 -9 -9 -1 -1
Maximum
allowed
dispersion (ps/nm)
3400 10880 10880 800 800
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2 10 10 10 10
With the
FEC: 16
With the
FEC: 20
Optical
signal-to-noise
ratio (OSNR)
(dB)
Without the FEC:
20
Without the
FEC: 21
Without the
FEC: 22
Without the
FEC: 26

9.5.9 Wavelength Allocation
This topic provides information on wavelength allocation of the OptiX OSN 3500.
The STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 support the output of the
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The output wavelengths can be directly added
to the WDM system. Table 9-69 provides the wavelength allocation information of the
STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces.
Table 9-69 Wavelength allocation information of the STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces
No. Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
No. Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
1 192.1 1560.61 21 194.1 1544.53
2 192.2 1559.79 22 194.2 1543.73
3 192.3 1558.98 23 194.3 1542.94
4 192.4 1558.17 24 194.4 1542.14
5 192.5 1557.36 25 194.5 1541.35
6 192.6 1556.56 26 194.6 1540.56
7 192.7 1555.75 27 194.7 1539.77
System

9-49

No. Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
No. Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
8 192.8 1554.94 28 194.8 1538.98
9 192.9 1554.13 29 194.9 1538.19
10 193.0 1553.33 30 195.0 1537.40
11 193.1 1552.52 31 195.1 1536.61
12 193.2 1551.72 32 195.2 1535.82
13 193.3 1550.92 33 195.3 1535.04
14 193.4 1550.12 34 195.4 1534.25
15 193.5 1549.32 35 195.5 1533.47
16 193.6 1548.51 36 195.6 1532.68
17 193.7 1547.72 37 195.7 1531.90
18 193.8 1546.92 38 195.8 1531.12
19 193.9 1546.12 39 195.9 1530.33
20 194.0 1545.32 40 196.0 1529.55

9.6 Parameters Specified for the Electrical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces and DDN electrical
interfaces.
9.6.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces.
9.6.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces.
9.6.3 Ethernet Electrical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet electrical interfaces.
9.6.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces.
Table 9-70 lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
3500.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 9-70 Parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces
Type of
Electrical
Interface
1544
kbit/s
2048
kbit/s
34368
kbit/s
44736
kbit/s
139264
kbit/s
155520
kbit/s
Line code
pattern
B8ZS,
AMI
HDB3 HDB3 B3ZS CMI CMI
Signal bit rate at
the output
interface
Complies with ITU-T
G.703.
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Allowed
frequency
deviation at the
input interface
Allowed
attenuation at the
input interface
Input jitter
tolerance

9.6.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces.
Table 9-71 lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces.
Table 9-71 Parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces
Type of
Interface
Description Standard
Framed E1
interface
Framed E1 signal The physical and electrical characteristics of the
interface comply with ITU-T G.703. The frame
structure of the interface complies with ITU-T
G.704.
V.35 interface Complies with ITU-T V.35.
V.24 interface Complies with ITU-T V.24.
X.21 interface Complies with ITU-T X.21.
RS-449 interface Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS-423A and
RS-422A).
RS-530 interface Complies with EIA RS-530.
Nx64 kbit/s
interface
RS-530A
interface
Complies with EIA RS-530A.

System

9-51

9.6.3 Ethernet Electrical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet electrical interfaces.
Table 9-72 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 9-72 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces
Type of Interface Code Type
1000BASE-T, RJ-45 4D-PAM5

9.7 Parameters Specified for the Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the clock interfaces, 64 kbit/s interfaces, RS-232
interfaces, RS-422 interfaces, and orderwire phone interfaces.
9.7.1 Clock Interface Specifications
The specifications of the clock interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
9.7.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications
The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
9.7.3 RS-232 Interface Specifications
The specifications of the RS-232 interface comply with EIA RS-232.
9.7.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications
The specifications of the orerwire phone interface comply with ITU-T.
9.7.1 Clock Interface Specifications
The specifications of the clock interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
The specifications of the clock interface are listed as Table 9-73.
Table 9-73 Specifications of the clock interface
Output frequency
accuracy
Compliant with G.813
Output jitter 0.05 UIpp

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

9.7.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications
The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface are listed as Table 9-74.
Table 9-74 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface
Bit rate 64 kbit/s
Timing signals From RX
Coding style Compliant with ITU-T G.703
Compliant Compliant with ITU-T G.703
Output interface characteristics Compliant with ITU-T G.703
Incoming interface characteristics Compliant with ITU-T G.703

The specifications of the RS-232 interface are listed as Table 9-75.
Table 9-75 Specifications of the RS-232 interface
Bit rate 19.2 kbit/s
Mode RS-232 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical levels 5V15V

The specifications of the RS-422 interface are listed as Table 9-76.
Table 9-76 Specifications of the RS-422 interface
Bit rate 19.2 kbit/s
Mode RS-422 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical levels 2.0V

System

9-53

9.7.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications
The specifications of the orerwire phone interface comply with ITU-T.
The specifications of the orerwire phone interface are listed as Table 9-77.
Table 9-77 Specifications of the orerwire phone interface
Speech channel interface
Impedance 600 ohms
Bandwidth 300 Hz3400 Hz
Operating current 18 mA
Input gain 4/0/0 dB
Output gain 0/7/0 dB
Signalling DTMF compliant with ITU-T Rec. Q.23
Analog EOW extension
Impedance 600 ohms
Bandwidth 300 Hz3400 Hz
Tx level 3.5 dBr 1 dBr
Rx level 3.5 dBr 1 dBr

System
Product Description
10 Quick Reference of Power Consumption and Weight
of Each Board

10-1

10 Quick Reference of Power
Consumption and Weight of Each Board
This topic lists the power consumption and weight of each board of the OptiX OSN series
equipment.
Table 10-1 lists the power consumption and weight of each board.
Table 10-1 Power consumption and weight of each board
Board Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Board Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
SDH boards
N1SLQ41 12 0.6 N1SLD4 17 0.6
N1SF64A 33(the OptiX
OSN 3500/3500
II/2500 REG
supports)
26(the OptiX
OSN 7500
supports)
1.1 N2SLD4 15 1.0
N1SF64 33(the OptiX
OSN 3500/3500
II/2500 REG
supports)
26(the OptiX
OSN 7500
supports)
1.1 R1SLD4 11 0.5
N1SLD64 41 1.2 R3SLD4 11 0.5
N1SL64A 40 1.1 N1SL4A 17 0.6
of Each Board
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Board Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Board Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
N1SL64 30(the OptiX
OSN 3500/3500
II/2500 REG
supports)
22(the OptiX
OSN 7500
supports)
1.1 N1SL4 17 0.6
N2SL64 32 1.1 N2SL4 15 1.0
T2SL64 40 1.1 R1SL4 10 0.5
N1SF16 26 1.1 R3SL4 11 0.5
N1SLO16 38 1.0 N1SEP1 17 1.0
N1SLQ16 20 0.9 N1SLH1 27 1.0
N2SLQ16 35 1.3 N1SLT1 22 1.3
N1SLD16 23 0.9 N2SLO1 26 1.1
N1SL16A 20 0.6 N3SLO1 20 1.2
N2SL16A 20 1.1 N1SLQ1A 15 1.0
N3SL16A 22 0.9 N1SLQ1 15 1.0
N1SL16 19 1.1 N2SLQ1 15 1.0
N2SL16 19 1.1 R1SLQ1 12 0.4
N3SL16 22 1.1 N1SL1A 17 0.6
N1SLQ4A 17 1.0 N1SL1 17 0.6
N1SLQ4 17 1.0 N2SL1 14 1.0
N2SLQ4 16 1.0 R1SL1 10 0.3
N1SLD4A 17 0.6 R3SL1 11 0.3
T2SL64A 40 1.1 - - -
PDH boards
N1SPQ4 24 0.9 N2PL3 12 0.9
N2SPQ4 24 0.9 N1PQM 22 1.0
N1DXA 10 0.8 N1PQ1 19 1.0
N1DX1 15 1.0 N2PQ1 13 1.0
N1PQ3 13 0.9 R1PD1 15 0.6
N1PD3 19 1.1 R2PD1 15 0.6
System
Product Description
of Each Board

10-3

Board Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Board Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
N2PD3 12 1.1 R3PD1 8 0.4
N1PL3A 15 1.0 N1PL1 7 0.5
N2PL3A 12 0.9 R1PL1 7 0.5
N1PL3 15 1.0 - - -
EoS/EoP boards
N1MST4 26 0.9 N2EFS4 30 1.0
N1IDQ1 41 1.0 N3EFS4 18 0.6
N1IDL4 41 1.0 N1EFS0A 32 0.7
N1ADQ1 41 1.0 N1EFS0 35 1.0
N1ADL4 41 0.9 N2EFS0 35 1.0
N1EAS2 70 1.2 N4EFS0 35 1.0
N1EMR0 47 1.2 N5EFS0 22 0.6
N2EGR2 40 1.1 N1EGT2 29 0.9
N1EGS4A 53 1.1 N2EGT2 15 0.9
N1EGS4 70 1.1 N1EFT8A 26 1.0
N3EGS4 70 1.1 N1EFT8 26 1.0
N4EGS4 34 0.7 N1EFT4 14 0.5
N1EMS4 65 1.1 N1EFT8A 26 1.0
N1EMS2 40 0.8 N1EFT8 26 1.0
N2EGS2 43 1.0 N1EFT4 14 0.5
N3EGS2 25 0.6 R1EFT4 14 0.5
N1EFS4 30 1.0 N2EMR0 50 1.2
N1IDL4A 46 1.5 - - -
Interface boards and switching and bridging boards
N1DM12 0 0.4 N1EU08 11 0.4
N1ETS8 0 0.4 N1EU04 6 0.4
N1ETF8A 11 0.4 N1C34S 0 0.3
N1ETF8 2 0.4 N1D34S 0 0.4
N1EFF8A 15 0.4 N1D75S 0 0.4
of Each Board
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Board Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Board Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
N1EFF8 6 0.4 N1L75S 3 0.3
N1TSB8 0 0.3 N1D12S 0 0.4
N1TSB4 3 0.3 N1D12B 0 0.3
N1MU04 2 0.4 R1L12S 5 0.3
N1OU08 6 0.4 - - -
Packet boards
R1PEFS8 12 0.3 N1PETF8 8 0.4
Q1PEGS2 9 0.6 N1PEG16 137 2.3
R1PEGS1 8 0.4 N1PEX1 107 2.4
N1PEG8 80 1.2 N1PEX2 78 1.4
N2PEX1 75 1.4 N1PEFF8 14 0.5
R1PEF4F 15 0.4 - - -
Dual-Mode bridging boards
N1EDQ41 75 1.2 - - -
CES boards
N1MD75 14 0.5 N1MD12 14 0.5
N1CQ1 15 0.5 R1ML1A/
B
16 0.4
Microwave boards
N1IFSD1 24 1.1 N1RPWR 45 1.4
WDM boards
N1FIB 0 0.4 N1MR2B 0 1.0
OBU101 16 1.3 N1MR2A 0 1.0
OBU102 18 1.3 N1MR2 0 0.9
N1LWX 30 1.1 N1CMR4 0 0.9
N1MR4 0 0.9 N1CMR2 0 0.8
N1MR2C 0 1.0 - - -
Cross-Connect and system control boards
N4GSCC 19 1.0 - - -
N1PSXCS 90 2.1 R1PCXLN 60 1.0
System
Product Description
of Each Board

10-5

Board Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Board Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
N2PSXCS
A
80 2 - - -
N6GSCC 35 0.7 - - -
T1PSXCS
A
100 1.3 - - -
Auxiliary boards
N1FANA 19 1.2 R1AMU 8 0.5
XE1FAN 16 1.5 R1AUX 19 1.0
XE3FAN 10 1.2 R2AUX 19 1.0
R1FAN 20 0.8 Q1AUX 10 0.5
Q1SEI 10 0.9 N1AUX 19 1.0
N1SEI 1 0.9 T1AUX 3 0.4
Q1SAP 20 0.7 T1EOW 13 0.5
Q2SAP 25 1.0 R1EOW 10 0.4
Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards
N1DCU 0 0.4 62COA 75 8.0
N2DCU 0 0.4 N1COA 10 3.5
N1RPC02 110 4.2 N1BPA 20 1.0
N1RPC01 70 4.0 N2BPA 11 1.2
61COA 10 3.5 N1BA2 20 1.0
Power interface boards
R1PIUA 2 0.5 N1PIU 8 1.2
R1PIUB 4 0.4 Q2PIU 2 0.3
R1PIUC 5 0.5 Q1PIU 8 1.3
N1PIUA 3 0.5 R1PIU 2 0.4
T1PIU 8 1.3 UPM - 15
N1PIUB 6 0.6 - - -
T1PIUB 6 0.5 - - -

System
Product Description 11 Energy Saving and Sustainable Development

11-1

11 Energy Saving and Sustainable
Development
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with RoHS directive (2002/95/CE) and WEEE directive
(2002/96/CE).
11.1 Energy Saving and Emission Reduction
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the control and monitoring of dynamic energy saving.
11.2 Sustainable Development
The OptiX OSN 3500 is designed according to the requirements of sustainable development.
All components and packages of the equipment are identified in compliance with the
associated standards for recycling.
11.1 Energy Saving and Emission Reduction
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the control and monitoring of dynamic energy saving.
Static Energy Saving
Regarding static energy saving, the OptiX OSN 3500 takes the following measures:

Uses an easy scheme for board design.

Uses the power module with high efficiency.

Replaces the linear power supplies with switching power supplies.

Uses the standard digital voltage.

Provides a power switch for each subrack. Thus, the power supply for the subrack can be
shut down the manually.
Dynamic Energy Saving
Energy saving (power down) design for boards:
11 Energy Saving and Sustainable Development
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Idle buses are powered down. That is, the buses that are not configured with services and
the buses of the idle slots are in power down state. In this manner, no power is
consumed.

Idle optical ports are powered down. That is, idle optical ports of the line boards or data
boards are in power down state. In this manner, no power is consumed.
Control and Monitoring of Energy Saving
You can control and monitor the energy saving through the NMS.
You can query the power consumption of a board on a real-time basis.
11.2 Sustainable Development
The OptiX OSN 3500 is designed according to the requirements of sustainable development.
All components and packages of the equipment are identified in compliance with the
associated standards for recycling.

The OptiX OSN 3500 not only provides necessary packing materials, but also guarantees
that the size of the package containing the equipment and accessories is at most three
times the size of the net equipment.

The product is also designed for easy unpacking. For details about how to unpack the
equipment, see the associated manual. In addition, all hazardous substances contained in
packaging decompose easily.

Every plastic component that weighs over 25g is labeled according to the standards of
ISO 11469 and ISO 1043-1 to ISO 1043-4. All components and packages of the
equipment are provided with standard labels for recycling.

Plugs and connectors are easy to find, and the associated operations can be performed by
using simple tools.

All the attached materials, such as labels, are easy to remove. Certain identification
information, such as silkscreens, is printed on the front panel or subrack.
System
Product Description 12 Compliant Standards

12-1

12 Compliant Standards
About This Chapter
This topic lists the standards that OptiX OSN 3500 complies with.
12.1 ITU-T Recommendations
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the ITU-T recommendations.
12.2 IEEE Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the IEEE standards.
12.3 IETF Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the IETF standards.
12.4 ANSI Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the ANSI related standards.
12.5 Environment Related Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the environment related standards.
12.6 EMC Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the EMC related standards.
12.7 Safety Compliance Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the safety compliance related standards.
12.8 Protection Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the protection related standards.
12.9 ASON Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the ASON related standards.
12.10 Microwave Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the microwave related standards.
12.11 Packet Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500complies with the packet related standards.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

12.12 Glossary
12.13 Acronyms and Abbreviations
12.1 ITU-T Recommendations
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the ITU-T recommendations.
Table 12-1 ITU-T recommendations
Recommendation Description
G.652 Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable
G.655 Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode
optical fiber and cable
G.661 Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters
of optical fiber amplifiers
G.662 Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices and
sub-systems
G.663 Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices and
sub-systems
G.671 Transmission characteristics of optical components and
subsystems
G.691 Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64 and other SDH
systems with optical amplifiers
G.692 Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical
amplifiers
G.694.1 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid
G.694.2 Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM wavelength grid
G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates
G.703 Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces
G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448
and 44736kbit/s hierarchical levels
G.7041 Generic framing procedure (GFP)
G.7042 Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy
(SDH)
G.709 Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission
systems
System

12-3

G.774 1-5 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management information
model for the network element view
G.775 Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) defect
detection and clearance criteria
G.783 Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
equipment functional blocks
G.784 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management
G.803 Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous
Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.811 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks
G.812 Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node
clocks in synchronization networks
G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which
are based on the 2048kbit/s hierarchy
are based on the 1544kbit/s hierarchy
are based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for international,
constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate
G.831 Management capabilities of transport networks based on the
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection
architectures
G.842 Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures
G.957 Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to the
synchronous digital hierarchy
G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy
for use on optical fiber cables
I.121 Broadband aspects of ISDN
I.150 B-ISDN asynchronous transfer mode functional characteristics
I.311 B-ISDN general network aspects
I.321 B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions
I.361 B-ISDN ATM layer specification
I.630 ATM protection switching
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

M.3010 Principles for a telecommunication management network
Q.811 Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
Q.812 Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
V.24 List of definitions for interchange circuits between data terminal
equipment (DTE) and data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)
V.35 Data transmission at 48 kilobits per second using 60-108 kHz
group band circuits
V.28 Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current
interchange circuits
X.21 Use on public data networks of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)
which is designed for interfacing to synchronous V-Series
modems
X.86 Ethernet over LAPS
Y.1731 OAM functions and mechanisms for Ethernet based networks

12.2 IEEE Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the IEEE standards.
Table 12-2 IEEE standards
Standard Description
IEEE 802.17 Resilient packet ring access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.1ad Virtual bridged local area networks Amendment 4: Provider
bridges
IEEE 802.1ag Connectivity fault management
IEEE 802.1d Media access control (MAC) bridges
IEEE 802.1q Virtual bridged local area networks
IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)
access method and physical layer specification
IEEE 802.3ad Aggregation of multiple link segments
IEEE 802.3ae Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, and
management parameters for 10 Gb/s operation
IEEE 802.3ah Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)
access method and physical layer specifications
System

12-5

IEEE 802.3u Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, medium
attachment units, and repeater for 100 Mb/s operation, type
100BASE-T
IEEE 802.3x Standards for local and metropolitan area networks: specification for
802.3 full duplex operation
IEEE 802.3z Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, repeater
and management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation
IEEE 1588 V2 Defines precise synchronization of clocks in measurement and
control systems implemented with technologies

12.3 IETF Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the IETF standards.
Table 12-3 IETF standards
RFC 2615 (1999) PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) over
SONET/SDH
RFC 1662 (1994) PPP in HDLC-like Framing
RFC 1661 (1994) The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
RFC 1990 The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP)
RFC 2514 Definitions of textual conventions and
OBJECT-IDENTITIES for ATM
management
RFC 3031 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)
Architecture
RFC 3032 MPLS Label Stack Encoding

12.4 ANSI Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the ANSI related standards.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Table 12-4 ANSI related standards
ANSI X3.296 SBCON (ESCON): FICON
ANSI X3.230 Fiber channel - physical and signaling
interface (FC-PH)

12.5 Environment Related Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the environment related standards.
Table 12-5 Environment related standards
IEC 60068-2 Basic environmental testing procedures
IEC 60068-3-3 Environmental testing - Part 3: Background information - Subpart
3: Guidance. Seismic test methods for equipments
IEC 60721-2-6 Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake
vibration
IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification
of groups of environmental parameters and their severities -
Section 1: Storage
IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification
of groups of environmental parameters and their severities -
Section 3: Stationary use at weatherprotected locations
ETS 300 019-1-1 Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations
ETS 300 019-1-3 Partly temperature-controlled location
NEBS GR-63-CORE Network equipment-building system (NEBS) requirements:
Physical protection

12.6 EMC Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the EMC related standards.
System

12-7

Table 12-6 EMC related standards
IEC 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic compatibility-Part4-2: Testing and
measurement techniques-Electrostatic discharge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-3: Testing and
measurement techniques-Radiated, radio-frequency,
electromagnetic field immunity test
IEC 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-4
measurement techniques-Electrical fast transient/burst immunity
test
IEC 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-5
measurement techniques-Surge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-6
measurement techniques-Immunity to conducted disturbances,
induced by radio-frequency fields
IEC 61000-4-29
EN 61000-4-29
measurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot interruptions and
voltage variations on d.c. input power port immunity tests
CISPR 22/EN 55022 Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance
characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement
CISPR 24/EN 55024 Information technology equipment-immunity
charateristics-Limits and methods of measurement
ETSI EN 300386 Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters
(ERM); Telecommunication network equipment;
ElectroMagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements
ETSI EN 201468 Elecromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters
(ERM); Additional electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of
service in specific applications
ETSI EN 300132-2 Power supply interface at the input to telecommunications
equipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc)

12.7 Safety Compliance Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the safety compliance related standards.
Table 12-7 Safety compliance related standards
EN 60950 Information technology equipment - safety
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

IEC 60950 Safety of information technology equipment including electrical
business equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No
1-M94
Audio, video and similar electronic equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No
950-95
Safety of information technology equipment
73/23/EEC Low voltage directive
UL 60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)

12.8 Protection Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the protection related standards.
Table 12-8 Protection related standards
IEC 61024-1 Protection of structures against lightning
IEC 61312-1 Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse part I:
general principles
IEC 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part 4: Testing and
measurement techniques - Section 5: Surge immunity test
ITU-T K.11 Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents
ITU-T K.20 Resistibility of telecommunication switching equipment to
overvoltages and overcurrents
ITU-T K.27 Bonding configurations and earthing inside a telecommunication
building
ITU-T K.41 Resistibility of internal interfaces of telecommunication centres to
surge overvoltages

12.9 ASON Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the ASON related standards.
System

12-9

Table 12-9 ASON related standards
G.807 Requirements for automatic switched
transport networks (ASTN)
G.8080 Architecture for the automatically switched
optical network (ASON)
G.7712 Architecture and specification of data
communication network
G.7713 Distributed call and connection management
(DCM) based on PNNI
G.7714 Protocol for automatic discovery in SDH
and OTN networks
G.7715 ASON routing architecture and
requirements for link state protocols
G.7716 Control plane initial establishment,
reconfiguration and recovery
G.7717 Connection admission control
G.7718 Framework for ASON management
RFC 3471 (GMPLS) Signaling functional description

12.10 Microwave Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the microwave related standards.
Table 12-10 Microwave related standards
ITU-R F.384-7 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for medium and high capacity
analogue or digital radio-relay systems operating in the upper 6 GHz
band
ITU-R F.383-6 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for high capacity radio-relay
systems operating in the lower 6 GHz band
ITU-R F.385-8 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for fixed wireless systems
operating in the 7 GHz band
ITU-R F.386-6 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for medium and high capacity
analogue or digital radio-relay systems operating in the 8 GHz band
ITU-R F.387-9 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

operating in the 13 GHz frequency band
ITU-R F.595-8 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for fixed wireless systems
operating in the 18 GHz frequency band
operating in the 25, 26 and 28 GHz bands
ITU-R F.749-2 Radio-frequency arrangements for systems of the fixed service
ITU-R F.1191-1 1 Bandwidths and unwanted emissions of digital radio-relay systems
ITU-R
SM.329-10
Unwanted emissions in the spurious domain
ETSI EN 302
217-1 V1.1.4
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for
point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 1: Overview and
system-independent common characteristics
ETSI EN 302
217-2-1 V1.1.3
point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 2-1: System-dependent
requirements for digital systems operating in frequency bands where
frequency co-ordination is applied
ETSI EN 302
217-2-2 V1.1.3
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements
forpoint-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 2-2: Harmonized EN
covering essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE Directive for
digital systems operating in frequency bands where frequency
co-ordination is applied
ETSI EN 302
217-3 V1.1.3
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements
forpoint-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 3: Harmonized EN
equipment operating in frequency bands where no frequency
co-ordination is applied
ETSI EN 302
217-4-1 V1.1.3
point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 4-1: System-dependent
requirements for antennas
ETSI EN 302
217-4-2 V1.2.1
point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 4-2: Harmonized EN
antennas
ETSI EN 301
126-1 V1.1.2
Fixed Radio Systems; Conformance testing; Part 1: Point-to-Point
equipment - Definitions, general requirements and test procedures
System

12-11

ETSI EN 301
126-3-1 V1.1.2
Fixed Radio Systems; Conformance testing; Part 3-1: Point-to-Point
antennas; Definitions, general requirements and test procedures
ETSI EN 301 390
V1.2.1
Fixed Radio Systems; Point-to-point and Multipoint Systems;
Spurious emissions and receiver immunity limits at equipment/antenna
port of Digital Fixed Radio Systems
iec 60153-2-1974 Hollow metallic waveguides Part 2: Relevant specifications for
ordinary rectangular waveguides
iec 60154-2-1980 Flanges for waveguides Part 2: Relevant specifications for flanges for
ordinary rectangular waveguides

12.11 Packet Standards
The OptiX OSN 3500complies with the packet related standards.
Table 12-11 Packet related standards
Packet related
standards
Description
ITU-T G.8112 Interfaces for the transport MPLS (T-MPLS) hierarchy
ITU-T G.8031 Protection switching for transport MPLS (T-MPLS) networks
ITU-T Y.1711 Operation & Maintenance mechanism for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1720 Protection switching for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1561 Performance and availability parameters for MPLS networks
ITU-T G.8110 MPLS layer network architecture
ITU-T G.8110.1 Application of MPLS in the transport network
ITU-T G.8121 Characteristics of transport MPLS equipment functional blocks
ITU-T Y.1710 Requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks
RFC 3031 MPLS architecture
RFC 3469 Framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS)-based recovery
RFC 4220 Traffic engineering link management information base
RFC 4221 Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) management overview
RFC 4377 Operations and management (OAM) requirements for multi-protocol
label switched (MPLS) networks
RFC 4378 A framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) operations
and management (OAM)
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

12.12 Glossary
Numerics
1+1 protection A 1+1 protection architecture has one normal service signal,
one working SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a
permanent bridge.
1:N protection A 1:N protection architecture has N normal service signals,
N working SNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. It may
have one extra service signal.
10BASE-T Physical layer specification for a 10 Mbit/s CSMA/CD local
area network over two pairs of twisted-pair telephone wire.
100BASE-T Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mbit/s CSMA/CD
local area network.
100BASE-TX Physical layer specification for a 100 Mbit/s CSMA/CD
local area network over two pairs of category 5 unshielded
twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair (STP) wire.
1PPS Pulse per second, which, strictly speaking, is not a time
synchronization signal. This is because 1PPS provides only
the "gauge" corresponding to the UTC second, but does not
provide the information about the day, month, or year.
Therefore, 1PPS is used as the reference for frequency
synchronization. On certain occasions, 1PPS can also be
used on other interfaces for high precision timing.
3R Reshaping, Retiming, Regenerating.

A
ACAP The Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization (ACAP)
operation provides orthogonal polarizations between two
adjacent communication channels.
ADM Add/Drop Multiplexing. Network elements that provide
access to all or some subset of the constituent signals
contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals
are added to (inserted), and/or dropped from (extracted) the
STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.
Administrator A user with the authority to use the management functions of
the NMS.
Administrative unit The information structure which provides adaptation
between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section
layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order
VC) and a AU pointer which indicates the offset of the
payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame
start.
System

12-13

Administrative unit group One or more Administrative Units occupying fixed, defined
positions in an STM payload are termed an Administrative
Unit Group (AUG).An AUG-1 consists of a homogeneous
assembly of AU-3s or an AU-4.
AIS Alarm Indication Signal. A signal sent downstream in a
digital network if an upstream failure has been detected and
persists for a certain time.
Alarm A visible or an audible indication to notify the person
concerned that a failure or an emergency has occurred.
Alarm correlation
analysis
A process wherein alarm is raised within five seconds after
alarm 1 is raised, and alarm 2 complies with the conditions
defined in the alarm correlation analysis rule. You can either
suppress alarm 2 or raise its severity level according to the
behavior defined in the alarm correlation rule.
Alarm indication On the cabinet of an NE, there are three indicators with
different colors indicating the current state of the NE. You
can stop the NE alarm indication through the NMS.
Alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication
that an upstream failure has been detected. It is associated
with multiple transport layers.
Alarm reversion A function that is used to avoid generating relevant alarm
information, thus preventing alarm interference, for the port
that has already been configured but not actually loaded with
services.
Alarm reversion mode The alarm reversion mode of an NE that defines whether
the port is automatically restored to the normal status after a
service is accessed or a fault is removed. There are three
alarm reversion modes: automatic, manual and not-revertive.
Alarm Severity Four alarm levels defined by the ITU-T Recommendations.
The four levels are critical, major, minor and warning.
Alarm suppression When alarms of various levels occur at the same time,
certain lower-level alarms are suppressed by higher-level
alarms, and thus will not be reported.
Antistatic floor The floor which is ESD preventive.
Anti-Static Jack Jacks on the cabinet or subrack with the ESD label. The
other end of the antistatic wrist strap is inserted into the jack.
APS Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is the capability of a
transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility
and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
Asynchronous A network where transmission system payloads are not
synchronized and each network terminal runs on its own
clock.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A transfer mode in which the
information is organized into cells. It is asynchronous in the
sense that the recurrence of cells containing information
from an individual user is not necessarily periodic. It is a
protocol within the OSI layer 1. An ATM cell consists of a 5
octet header followed by 48 octets of data.
ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control. A method of
automatically adjusting the transmit power at the opposite
end based on the transmit signal detected at the receiver.
Attenuation Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually
expressed in decibels.
Attenuator A passive component that attenuates an electrical or optical
signal.
Attribute Property of an object.
Auto negotiation The algorithm that allows two devices at either end of a link
segment to negotiate common data service functions.
Automatic protection
switching
The ability of a network element to detect a failed working
line and switch the service to a spare (protection) line. 1+1
APS pairs a protection line with each working line. 1:N APS
provides one protection line for every n working lines.

B
Backup A method to save the data to prevent damage to the original
data.
Backplane A PCB circuit board in the subrack, which is connected with
all the boards in position.
Bandwidth Information-carrying capacity of a communication channel.
Analog bandwidth is the range of signal frequencies that can
be transmitted by a communication channel or network.
BER The ratio of the number of bits received in error to the total
number of bits received.
BIP BIP-X code is defined as a method of error monitoring. With
even parity an X-bit code is generated by the transmitting
equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a
manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over
the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of
the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the
second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified
portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X
bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored
partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all
bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit
sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered
portion includes the BIP-X.
System

12-15

BIP-8 Bit Interleaved Parity-8. A method of error checking in
SONET which allows a full set of performance statistics to
be generated. For example, a BIP-8 creates eight-bit
(one-byte) groups, then does a parity check for each of the
eight bit positions in the byte.
Binding In virtual concatenated payload configuration, to specify one
binding number to identify the VC4s of the same virtual
concatenated payload. If a fault occurs to one of the bound
services, all bound services will switch as a whole.
Binding strap The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side
(made of transparent polypropylene material) and one mat
side (made of black nylon material).
Bit Error An error to some bits in the digital code stream after
receiving, generation. Bit errors accompany the damage to
the transmitted ation.
Bit error rate The number of coding violations detected in a unit of time,
usually one second. Bit error rate (BER) is calculated with
this formula: BER = errored bits received/total bits sent
BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply. A building timing
supply that minimizes the number of synchronization links
entering an office. Sometimes referred to as a
synchronization supply unit.
Bound path The VC Trunk refers to the 2 Mbps paths which are bound
together to transmit Ethernet data. The VC Trunk is an entity
between the Ethernet port and the 2 Mbps path.
Bridge It refers to a functional unit that connects two or more local
area networks (LANs).
Broadcast The act of sending a frame addressed to all stations on the
network.
Build-in WDM A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into
products that belong to the OSN series . That is, the OSN
products can add or drop several wavelengths directly.

C
Cabling The methods to route the cables or fibers.
Cabling frame The frame which is used for cable routing over the cabinet.
Cabling hole A hole which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.
Cabling ladder The ladder between the cabinet and the cabling rack, which
is used for cable routing.
Cabling trough The trough which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.
CAR Committed Access Rate. The CAR limits the input or output
transmission rate on an interface.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

CBR Constant Bit Rate. The Constant Bit Rate service category is
used by connections that request a static amount of
bandwidth that is continuously available during the
connection lifetime. This amount of bandwidth is
characterized by a peak cell Rate (PCR) value.
CCM Connectivity check message (CCM) is a type of message
that is used to check the link status.
CDVT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance. Information sent in the
forward and backward direction to determine the upper
bound of the tolerance admitted for the time interval between
cells pertaining to a given cell flow. The backward CDVT
values included in the IAM and MOD shall be interpreted as
maximum acceptable values for the cell flow in the
backward direction.
Centralized alarm system The system that gathers all the information about alarms into
a certain terminal console.
CFM Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) is an
end-to-end per-service-instance Ethernet layer operation,
administration, and management (OAM) protocol. It
includes proactive connectivity monitoring, fault
verification, and fault isolation for large Ethernet
metropolitan area networks (MANs) and wide area networks
(WANs).
Chain network One type of network that all network nodes are connected
one after one to be in series.
Channel The smallest subdivision of a circuit that provides a type of
communication service; usually a path with only one
direction.
Check alarms To compare one or more uncleared alarms on the NMS with
alarms in the NE. If an alarm is included in the current
alarms on the NE, it is kept on the NMS. If not, it will be
removed from the NMS.
Circuit A communications path or network; usually a pair of
channels providing bi-directional communication.
Client A kind of terminal (PC or workstation) connected to a
network that can send instructions to a server and get results
through a user interface. See also server.
Clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being
synchronized with a clock source in a network.
Clock Synchronization Also called frequency synchronization, clock
synchronization means that the signal frequency traces the
reference frequency, but the start point need not be
consistent.
System

12-17

Concatenation Concatenation is a critical feature of the SDH. Concatenation
refers to a process in which multiple virtual containers are
combined into one group that serves as an independent
container with bit sequence integrity. This meets the
requirements of client signal transmission in capacities larger
than C-4. Concatenation is classified into adjacent
concatenation and virtual concatenation.
Configuration To set the basic parameters of an operation object.
Configuration Data A command file for an NE which defines the configuration
of the NE hardware. With the file, the NE can coordinate
with other NEs in the entire network. Configuration data is
the key factor for the normal running of the entire network.
Configuration
management
Configuration management enables inventory query of
network configuration resources, including relevant
configuration of NMS or SNMS, NE, subnet, links, SNC,
route, TP, edge point, equipment, and so on. Real-time
inventory change report can also be provided through this
resource, it will be timely reported to the upper NMS to
notify the carrier of the current network operation status and
ensure data consistency of the upper NMSs.
Congestion The condition that exists in a network if the capacity needed
for the instantaneous traffic exceeds the bandwidth available
in the network.
Connection A "transport entity" which consists of an associated pair of
"unidirectional connections" capable of simultaneously
transferring information in opposite directions between their
respective inputs and outputs.
Convergence The process of developing a model of the echo path which
will be used in the echo estimator to produce the estimate of
the circuit echo.
Convergence service A service that provides enhancements to an underlying
service in order to provide for the specific requirements of
the convergence service user.
Conversion In the context of message handling, a transmittal event in
which an MTA transforms parts of a message content from
one encoded information type to another, or alters a probe so
it appears that the described messages were so modified.
Corrugated pipe A plastic pipe which is used for fiber routing.
CoS Class of service (CoS) is a technology or method used to
classify services into different categories according to the
service quality.
Current Alarms Alarms that have not been cleared, or those that have been
cleared but are not acknowledged.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Current Performance
Data
Performance data stored in the current register. An NE
provides two types registers for each performance parameter
of the performance monitoring entity. The registers are
15-minute register and 24-hour register, which are used to
accumulate the performance data within the current
monitoring period.
Cyclic redundancy check A technique for using overhead bits to detect transmission
errors.

D
DDF Digital Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer
cables.
Defect A limited interruption in the ability of an item to perform a
required function.
Demultiplexing A process applied to a multiplex signal for recovering
signals combined within it and for restoring the distinct
individual channels of the signals.
Digital signal An electrical or optical signal that varies in discrete steps.
Electrical signals are coded as voltages, optical signals are
coded as pulses of light.
DLAG The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is a
board-level port protection technology used to detect
unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite
end. In the case of a link down failure on a port or a
hardware failure on a board, the services can automatically
be switched to the slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection
for the inter-board ports.
Downward cabling Route cables or fibers between the rack and other
equipments from the bottom of the cabinet.
Drop The port on a network element where the service to an end
customer may be connected, e.g., a tributary card on a
SONET ADM. For example, a drop for a DS1 customer
service may be provided by a VT1.5 card terminating a
VT1.5 trail.
DSCP Differentiated services code point.
It is defined as the first six bits of the ToS field by RFC2474.
If the DSCP is used to mark the packets, the packets can be
classified into a maximum of 64 classes.

E
ECC Embedded Control Channel. An ECC provides a logical
operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data
communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer.
System

12-19

Ejector lever A component at the two ends of the front panel of a board,
which is used for inserting or removing the board.
EMU Environment Monitoring Unit. As one type of power and
environment monitoring unit, EMU is installed on the top of
the OptiX 155/622H equipment cabinet to monitor the
environment variables, such as the power supply and
temperature. With external signal input through the relay,
fire alarm, smoke alarm, burglary alarm, and so on can be
monitored as well. Displayed on the NMS, the change of
environment can be monitored timely and accurately.
Encapsulation In 1000BASE-X, the process by which a MAC packet is
enclosed within a PCS code-group stream.
Entity A part, device, subsystem, functional unit, equipment or
system that can be individually considered. For ETH-OAM,
an OAM entity generally refers to a specified system or
subsystem that supports the OAM protocol. For example, a
Huawei Ethernet service processing board is an OAM entity.
ESCON Enterprise System Connection. A path protocol which
connects the host with various control units in a storage
system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The
transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.
ESD Electrostatic Discharge. The phenomena that enables energy
to be instantly produced by the electrostatic resource
discharge .
EPL Ethernet Private Line. An EPL service is a point-to-point
interconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth
sharing. Transport bandwidth is never shared between
different customers.
EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN. An EPLAN service is both a LAN
service and a private service. Transport bandwidth is never
shared between different customers.
Ethernet A data line level protocol that consists of the two bottom
layers of the OSI model. Several physical media, such as
twisted pairs and co-axial cables, can be used for the
Ethernet broadcast network topology. The Ethernet uses the
CSMA/CD to detect conflict.
Ethernet Alarm Group The Ethernet alarm group periodically obtain the statistics
value to compare with the configured threshold. If the value
exceeds the threshold, an event is reported.
Ethernet History Control
Group
The Ethernet history control group controls the method for
periodically obtaining the statistics data from networks of
different types.
Ethernet History Group The Ethernet history group records the history statistics data
of the Ethernet network.
Ethernet Statistics Group The Ethernet statistics group records the current statistics
data of the Ethernet interfaces that are monitored.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line. An EVPL service is a service
that is both a line service and a virtual private service.
EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private Local Area Network. An EVPLAN
service is a LAN service and a virtual private service.
Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol
functions normally. The protection switching is not really
performed.
Extra traffic Unprotected traffic that is carried over the protection
channels when not occupied by working traffic. The extra
traffic may be preempted to provide transport channel for
protected or highly protected transport entities in the event of
failure.
E-LAN Ethernet LAN. A L2VPN service type that is provided for
the user Ethernet in different domains over the PSN network.
For the user Ethernet, the entire PSN network serves as a
Layer 2 switch.
E-Line Ethernet line. An point-to-point private service type that is
provided for the user Ethernet in different domains.

F
Failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an
item with a required function to be terminated. The item may
be considered as having failed; a fault has now been
detected.
Fairness For any link specified in a ring network, if the data packets
transmitted by the source node are constrained by the
fairness algorithm, the source node is provided with certain
bandwidth capacities. This feature of RPR is called fairness.
Fault A fault is the inability of a function to perform a required
action. This does not include an inability due to preventive
maintenance, lack of external resources, or planned actions.
FD Frequency Diversity. Two or more microwave frequencies
with certain frequency space are used to transmit/receive the
same signal and selection is then performed between the two
signals to ease the impact of fading.
FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interface. A standard for a 100 Mbit/s
fiber-optic local-area network.
Feature code Code(s) used to select/activate a service feature (e.g.
forwarding, using two or three digit codes preceded by * or
11 or #, and which may precede subsequent digit selection).
System

12-21

FEC Forwarding equivalence class. A term used in multiprotocol
label switching (MPLS) to describe a group of packets which
are forwarded in the same manner (e.g., over the same path,
with the same forwarding treatment). FEC can be classified
by address, service type, priority of packets, and may be
bound to a MPLS label
FEC Forward error correction, It is a kind of technology for
enhancing the reliability of digital transmission. It can
increase transmission distance and improve network
performance.
Fiber connector A device mounted on the end of a fiber-optic cable, light
source, receiver, or housing that mates to a similar device to
couple light into and out of optical fibers. A connector joins
two fiber ends, or one fiber end and a light source or
detector.
Fiber jumper The fiber which is used to connect the subrack with the
ODF.
FICON Fiber Connect. A new generation connection protocol which
connects the host with various control units. It carries single
byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber
channel, and provides higher rate and better performance
than ESCON.
Flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics.
On the NMS or NE software, flow is a group of
classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that
have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present,
two flows are supported: port flow and port+VLAN flow.
Port flow is based on port ID and port+VLAN flow is based
on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist in
the same port.
Forced switch This command performs ring switching from working
channels to the protection channels. This switch occurs
regardless of the state of the protection channels, unless the
protection channels are satisfying a higher priority bridge
request.
Frame A cyclic set of consecutive time slots in which the relative
position of each time slot can be identified.
Free-run mode An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which
is strongly influenced by the oscillating element and not
controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In this mode
the clock has never had a network reference input, or the
clock has lost external reference and has no access to stored
data, that could be acquired from a previously connected
external reference. Free-run begins when the clock output no
longer reflects the influence of a connected external
reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminates when the
clock output has achieved lock to an external reference.

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

G
Gateway IP IP address is used for TCP/IP communication between an
NE and the NMS, which is effective only when it is used for
TCP/IP communication. That is, only the gateway NE needs
the IP address. IP address cannot be used to identify an NE
uniquely. NEs in different TCP/IP networks may have the
same IP address. And one NE may have several IP addresses
(for example: an IP address of a dial-up network, an IP
address of the Ethernet port and so on).
Gateway NE Gateway Network Element. Gateway NE provides the
communications between NEs and network management
system.
GFP GFP is a framing and encapsulated method which can be
applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T
SG15.
Grooming Consolidating or segregating traffic for efficiency.
Guide slot A slot on the expansion bolt.

H
Half duplex Pertaining to, both parties that only one party can send data,
while the other party can only receive data on the
communication link.
Hardware loopback A method to use a fiber to connect the receiving optical
interface with the transmitting one on a board. It performs
transmission tests, which method usually does not require
the assistance of personnel at the served terminal.
HDLC A general-purpose data link control protocol defined by ISO
for use on both point-to-point and multipoint (multidrop)
data links. It supports full-duplex, transparent-mode
operation. It is used extensively in both multipoint and
computer networks.
History Performance
Data
The performance data that is stored in the history register or
that is autoreported and stored in the NMS.

I
IDU Indoor Unit. The indoor unit implements accessing,
multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.
IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM. The ATM inverse
multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and
de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among
links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose
rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is
referred to as an IMA group.
System

12-23

IMA frame The IMA frame is used as the unit of control in the IMA
protocol. It is a logical frame defined as M consecutive cells,
numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links in an
IMA group.
Input jitter tolerance The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter
frequency, which, when modulating the signal at an
equipment input port, results in no more than two errored
seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are
integrated over successive 30 second measurement intervals.
IP address A 32-bit identifier that is unique to each network device.
IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications
standards and controls the remote NEs through the Internet.
The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses
overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for
communication.
IPA The factors such as fiber cut, degradation of equipment, and
removal of connectors may result in the loss of the optical
power signals. The function of intelligent power adjusting
(IPA) enables the ROP laser and booster amplifier (BA) of a
section to be shut down automatically. In this way, the
maintainers, their eyes in particular, can be protected for the
exposed optical fibers when they are performing the repairs.
Isolation A nonreciprocal optical device intended to suppress
backward reflections along an optical fibre transmission line
while having minimum insertion loss in the forward
direction.

J
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage
fluctuations, and control system instability.
Jitter tolerance For STS-N electrical interfaces, input jitter tolerance is the
maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter
frequency, which results in no more than two errored
seconds cumulative, when the signal is modulated at an
equipment input port. These errored seconds are integrated
over successive 30 second measurement intervals.
Requirements on input jitter tolerance as just stated, are
specified in terms of compliance with a jitter mask, which
represents a combination of points. Each point corresponds
to a minimum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter
frequency which results in two or fewer errored seconds in a
30 second measurement interval when the signal is
modulated at the equipment input port. For the OC-N optical
interface, it is defined as the amplitude of the peak-to-peak
sinusoidal jitter applied at the input of an OC-N interface
that causes a 1 dB power penalty.

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

L
label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is part of an
IEEE specification (802.3ad) that allows you to bundle
several physical ports to form a single logical channel.
LACP allows a switch to negotiate an automatic bundle by
sending LACP packets to the peer.
LAG Link aggregation group. A group in which multiple links
connected to the same equipment are bundled together to
increase the bandwidth and improve the link reliability. An
LAG can be regarded as one link.
LAN A local area network that covers a small area such as a
family, an office, or a building group that consists of
families, offices and/or a university. Currently, most LANs
are constructed based on the switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi
technology, running at 1000 Mbit/s (namely, 1 Gbit/s).
Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of
narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence
than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the
semi-conductor laser as the light source.
Layer A concept used to allow the transport network functionality
to be described hierarchically as successive levels; each layer
being solely concerned with the generation and transfer of its
characteristic information.
Layer 2 switching Layer 2 switching can realize the packet switching between
switch ports according to MAC addresses of packets, by
adopting the 802.1d algorithm or 802.1q algorithm.
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. A solution features
flexible bandwidth and dynamic adjustment. In addition, it
provides a failure tolerance mechanism, which enhances the
viability of virtual concatenations and enables the dynamic
adjustment to bandwidth (non-service affecting).
License A permission provided by a vendor to authorize the use of
specific functions of a product. Generally the license consists
of encrypted codes, and the operation authority varies with
different level of license.
Link A "topological component" that provides transport capacity
between two endpoints in different subnetworks via a fixed
(i.e., inflexible routing) relationship. The endpoints are
"subnetwork termination point pools" for SONET, and link
termination points for ATM. Multiple links may exist
between a pair of subnetworks. A link also represents a set of
"link connections".
LLC According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link
Control (LLC) is the upper sublayer of the OSI data link
layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media
(such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).
System

12-25

Loopback A process to return the signals to the opposite end by setting
the hardware or software.
Lower Threshold When the performance event count value is smaller than a
certain value, a threshold-crossing event occurs. The value is
the lower threshold.
LSP Label switch path. An ingress and egress switched path built
through a series of LSRs to forward the packets of a
particular FEC using a label swapping forwarding
mechanism.
LSR Label switch router. LSR is to forward packets in an MPLS
network by looking only at the fixed-length label.

M
MAC Media Access Control. The data link sublayer that is
responsible for transferring data to and from the Physical
Layer.
Main Topology A basic component of man-machine interface for the NMS.
The main topology displays the networking details and the
basic ation about NEs, alarms of subnets, communication
status.
Maintenance Domain The network or the part of the network for which faults in
connectivity are to be managed, belonging to a single
administration. The boundary of a Maintenance Domain is
defined by a set DSAPs, each of which may become a point
of connectivity to a Service Instance.
Maintenance Association That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as
much as possible, the connectivity of which is maintained by
CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance Entities.
Mapping A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual
containers at the boundary of an SDH network.
Mean launched power The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence
coupled into the fibre by the transmitter.
MEP Maintenance association end point. An edge node of the
maintenance association.
MIB Management information base (MIB) is the formal
description for a group a network objects that can be
managed by the SNMP. MIB is the database of the network
performance information that is saved on the agent.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching. Multi-protocol label
switching. It is a standard routing and switching technology
platform, capable of supporting various high level protocols
and services. The data transmission over an MPLS network
is independent of route calculating. MPLS, as a
connection-oriented transmission technology, guarantees
QoS effectively, supports various network level
technologies, and is independent of the link layer.
MSP Multiplex Section Protection. The MSP function provides
capability for switching a signal from a working section to a
protection section.
MSTP Multi-service transmission platform. It is based on the SDH
platform, capable of accessing, processing and transmitting
TDM services, ATM services, and Ethernet services, and
providing unified management of these services.
MSTP Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a
loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks
redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a
tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless
cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The
protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and
multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data
cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in
STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the
VLANs.
Multicast Transmission of a frame to stations specified by a group
address.
Multiplex To transmit two or more signals over a single channel.
Multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer
signals are adapted into a higher order path or the multiple
higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex
section.
Multiplex section
overhead
The multiplex section overhead comprises rows 5 to 9 of the
SOH of the STM-N signal.
Multiplex section
protection
A function provides capability for switching a signal
between and including two MST functions, from a working
to a protection channel.

N
N+1 protection A microwave link protection system that employs N working
channels and one protection channel.
NE Network Element. A stand-alone physical entity that
supports network element functions and may also support
operations system function or mediation functions. It
contains managed objects, a message communication
function and a management applications function.
System

12-27

NE Explorer A main operation interface of the NMS. An expandable
object tree (function tree) is absent at the lower left pane of
the interface. The user can fast locate the operation object
from the object tree and then perform configuration,
management and maintenance accordingly.
NNI Network Node Interface. NNI identifies the interface
between the ATM network nodes. See also SDH NNI.
Non-revertive In non-revertive mode, when a protection switch occurs, the
working service will be switched to the protection service
and the status will remain after it returns normal.
NRZ Non Return to Zero. A digital code in which the signal level
is low for a 0 bit and high for a 1 bit and dose not return to 0
between successive 1 bits.

O
OAM auto-discovery In the case of OAM auto-discovery, two interconnected
ports, enabled with the Ethernet in the First Mile OAM
(EFM OAM) function, negotiate to determine whether the
mutual EFM OAM configuration match with each other by
sending and responding to the OAM protocol data unit
(OAMPDU). If the mutual EFM OAM configuration match,
the two ports enter the EFM OAM handshake phase. In the
handshake phase, the two ports regularly send the OAMPDU
to maintain the neighborhood relation.
ODF Optical Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to
transfer and spool fibers.
ODU Outdoor Unit. The outdoor unit implements frequency
conversion and amplification for RF signals.
ONE Optical Network Element. A stand-alone physical entity in
an optical transmission network that supports at least
network element functions.
Optical amplifier Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be
amplified by means of the stimulated emission taking place
in an suitable active medium. An optical amplifier is used to
amplify optical signals in an optical transmission system.
Optical attenuator A passive component that attenuates an electrical or optical
signal.
Optical Connector A component normally attached to an optical cable or piece
of apparatus for the purpose of providing frequent optical
interconnection/disconnection of optical fibers or cables.
Optical Interface A component that connects several transmit or receive units.

Orderwire It establishes voice communication among the operators and
maintenance engineers working in each working station.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

OTDR Optical Time Domain Reflectometer. An instrument that
measures transmission characteristics by sending a short
pulse of light down a fiber and observing backscattered light.
Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
Overhead Extra bits in a digital stream used to carry information
besides traffic signals. Orderwire, for example, would be
considered overhead information.

P
Paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by
using the bus on the backplane. When the SCC unit is faulty
or offline, the overheads can be passed through between the
paired slots by using the directly connected overhead bus.
When two SDH boards form an MSP ring, the boards need
to be inserted in paired slots so that the K bytes can be
passed through.
Pass-through The transmission equipment directly forwards the received
higher order path overhead to the next station, and this
station only performs detection.
Path A logical connection between the point at which a standard
frame format for the signal at the given rate is assembled,
and the point at which the standard frame format for the
signal is disassembled.
Path overhead Overhead accessed, generated, and processed by
path-terminating equipment. Path overhead includes nine
bytes of STS Path Overhead and, when the frame is
VT-structured, five bytes of VT Path Overhead.
Path protection The working principle of path protection: When the system
works in path protection mode, the PDH path uses the
dual-fed and signal selection mode. Through the tributary
unit and cross-connect unit, the tributary signal is sent
simultaneously to the east and west lines. Meanwhile, the
cross-connect matrix sends the signal dually sent from the
opposite end to the tributary board through the active and
standby buses, and the hardware of the tributary board
automatically and selectively receive the signal from the two
groups of buses automatically according to the AIS number
of the lower order path.
Payload The portion of the SONET signal available to carry service
signals such as DS1 and DS3. The contents of an STS SPE
or VT SPE.
Payload pointer The pointer that indicates the location of the beginning of the
Synchronous Payload Envelope.
PCR Peak Cell Rate. An upper limit on the rate at which cells can
be submitted on an ATM connection.
PVP Virtual path. Virtual path that consists of PVCs.
System

12-29

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy. PDH is the digital
networking hierarchy that is used before the advent of
Sonet/SDH.
PE Provider Edge. A PE is the name of the device or set of
devices at the edge of the provider network with the
functionality that is needed to interface with the customer.
Performance register Performance register is the memory space for performance
event counts, including 15-min current performance register,
24-hour current performance register, 15-min history
performance register, 24-hour history performance register,
UAT register and CSES register.
Performance threshold Performance events usually have upper and lower thresholds.
When the performance event count value exceeds the upper
threshold, a performance threshold-crossing event is
generated; when the performance event count value is below
the upper threshold for a period of time, the performance
threshold-crossing event is ended. In this way, performance
jitter caused by some sudden events can be shielded.
Plesiochronous A network with nodes timed by separate clock sources with
almost the same timing.
Pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a
virtual container with respect to the frame reference of the
transport entity on which it is supported.
PRBS A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an
element is independent of the values of any of the other
elements, similar to real random sequences.
Primitive In the hierarchy of signaling system No.7, when the upper
layer applies for services from the lower layer or the lower
layer transmits services to the upper layer, the data is
exchanged between the user and the service provider. In this
case, the data transmitted between adjacent layers is called
primitive.
Private line Both communication parties are connected permanently.
Procedure A generic term for an action.
Process A generic term for a collection of actions.
Protection subnet In the NMS, the protection subnet becomes a concept of
network level other than multiplex section rings or path
protection rings. The protection sub-network involves NEs
and fibre cable connections.
Protection view A topology-based interface in the NMS. In the Protection
View, you can: 1. Search, view, create, set and manage
protection subnets. 2. Manage isolated nodes and SDH
NNIs. See also Trail View, Clock View.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

PVC Permanent Virtual Connection. Traditional ATM Permanent
Virtual Connection that is established/released upon a
request initiated by a management request procedure (that is
all nodes supporting the connections need to be instructed by
the network management).
PW Pseudo wire. A mechanism that bears the simulated services
between PEs on the PSN(Packet Switched Network).

Q
QoS Quality of Service. Information sent in the forward direction
to indicate the Quality of Service class requested by the user
for a connection. QoS classes are defined to allow a network
to optimize resources in supporting various service classes.

R
Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable
value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x
10-10 BER.
Reference clock A clock of very high stability and accuracy that may be
completely autonomous and whose frequency serves as a
basis of comparison for the frequency of other clocks.
REG A device that performs regeneration.
Regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal
so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal
elements are constrained within specified limits.
Regenerator section
overhead
The regenerator section overhead comprises rows 1 to 3 of
the SOH of the STM-N signal.
Remote defect indication
(RDI)
A signal returned to the transmitting Terminating Equipment
upon detecting a Loss of Signal, Loss of Frame, or AIS
defect. RDI was previously known as FERF.
Remote optical pumping
amplifier (ROPA)
An remote optical amplifier sub-system designed for
applications where power supply and monitoring systems are
unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power compensation
solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP)
transmission.
Ring network One type of network that all network nodes are connected
one after one to be a cycle.
RMON RMON is a type of the MIB defined by the Internet
engineering task force (IETF). The RMON mainly realizes
the monitoring of the data flow in a network section or in the
entire network.
Root path cost Value of root bridge can be reached with the least aggregate
path is called the root path cost.
System

12-31

Root port It refers to the port corresponding to the cheapest path to the
root bridge.
Route The path a trail takes.
RPR Resilient Packet Ring. A metropolitan area network (MAN)
technology supporting data transfer among stations
interconnected in a dual-ring configuration.
RS232 In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no
hand-shaking signal. It can communicate with RS232 and
RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the
transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s.
RS422 The interface can change to RS232 through the hardware
jumper and others are the same as RS232.
RSTP The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol is an evolution of the
Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
convergence after a topology change.

S
S1 byte The byte defined in ITU-T to transmit the network
synchronization status information.
SAN Storage Area Network. A dedicated high-speed data storage
network which interconnects multiple independent storage
systems with multiple servers through fibre path switch or
other switch equipment.
SD Space Diversity. Two or more antennas separated by a
specific distance transmit/receive the same signal and
selection is then performed between the two signals to ease
the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital
transport structures, standardized for the transport of suitably
adapted payloads over physical transmission networks.
Section The portion of a SONET transmission facility, including
terminating points, between (i) a terminal network element
and a regenerator or (ii) two regenerators. A terminating
point is the point after signal regeneration at which
performance monitoring is (or may be) done.
Section overhead Nine bytes of overhead accessed, generated, and processed
by section terminating equipment. This overhead supports
functions such as framing the signal and performance
monitoring.
Self-healing Self-healing is the establishment of a replacement
connection by network without the NMC function. When a
connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is
found by the network elements and rerouted depending on
network resources available at that time.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Service protection The measures to make sure the service transmitting not to be
damaged or corrupted.
Settings Parameters of an operation that can be selected by the user.
SF A signal indicating that the associated data has failed. It
means that a near-end defect condition (not being the
degraded defect) is active.
SFP small form-factor pluggable.
Side mode suppression
ratio
The ratio of the largest peak of the total source spectrum to
the second largest peak.
Slide rail A component in the cabinet, which is used to place the
subrack.
Simple network
management protocol
An IETF protocol for monitoring and managing systems and
devices in a network. The data being monitored and
managed is defined by a Management Information Base
(MIB). The functions supported by the protocol are the
request and retrieval of data, the setting or writing of data,
and traps that signal the occurrence of events.
Signal cable The cable which is used to transmit electrical signals,
different from the power cable or fiber.
Signal degrade A signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the
sense that a degraded defect (dDEG) condition is active.
Signal fail A signal indicating the associated data has failed in the sense
that a near-end defect condition (not being the degraded
defect) is active.
SNCP Subnet Connection Protection. A working subnetwork
connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork
connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if
its performance falls below a required level.
SNCP node A node that is set on the protection subnet to support SNCP
that spans protection subnets. The SNCP node of the ring
subnet can support electric circuit dual feed and selectively
receive a time slot out of the ring, thus implementing subnet
connection protection.
SNCMP Subnetwork connection multipath protection. The only
difference is that SNCP is of 1+1 protection and SNCMP is
of N+1 protection. That is, several backup channels protect
one active channel in SNCMP.
SNCTP Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection. SNCTP provides
a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel
is faulty, the services of the entire VC-4 path can be
switched over to the protection channel.
SSM Synchronization Status Message. ITU-T defines S1 byte to
transmit the network synchronization status information. It
uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1
byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades.
System

12-33

Statistical multiplexing In the statistical multiplexing mode, bandwidth is
dynamically allocated based on the data amount within the
transmission capacity of the physical equipment. This mode
is suitable to any transmission rate.
STM-N Synchronous Transport Module. An STM is the information
structure used to support section layer connections in the
SDH. It consists of information payload and Section
Overhead (SOH) information fields organized in a block
frame structure which repeats every 125 ms. The information
is suitably conditioned for serial transmission on the selected
media at a rate which is synchronized to the network. A
basic STM is defined at 155.520 kbit/s.
STP STP is a protocol that provides a loop free topology for any
bridged LAN and is used in switched networks to prevent
loops by blocking certain ports on some of the bridges in the
network.
Subnet The logical entity in the transmission network and comprises
a group of network management objects. A subnet can
contain NEs and other subnets. A subnet planning can
enhance the organization of a network view.
Subnet mask Also referred to as the network mask off code, it is used to
define network segments, so that only the computers in the
same network segment can communicate with one another,
thus suppressing broadcast storm between different network
segments.
Support The frame on the bottom of a cabinet, when installing the
cabinet on the antistatic floor.
Switching priority There may be the case that several protected boards need to
be switched; thus the tributary board switching priority
should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set
the same, the tributary board that fails later cannot be
switched. The board with higher priority can preempt the
switching of that with lower priority.
Synchronous A network where transmission system payloads are
synchronized to a master (network) clock and traced to a
reference clock.
Synchronous source A clock providing timing services to connected network
elements. This would include clocks conforming to
Recommendations G.811, G.812 and G.813.

T
T2000 A subnet management system (SNMS). In the
telecommunication management network architecture, the
T2000 is located between the NE level and network level,
which can supports all NE level functions and part of the
network level management functions.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

T2000 LCT A lite version of T2000. It is an element level management
system for the optical transmission network. It can manage
SDH, DWDM and Metro optical transmission equipment.
See also LCT.
TCM Tandem Connection Monitor. In the SDH transport
hierarchy, the TCM is located between the AU/TU
management layer and HP/LP layer. It uses the N1/N2 byte
of POH overhead to monitor the quality of the transport
channels on a transmission section (TCM section).
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Common
name for the suite of protocols developed to support the
construction of worldwide internetworks.
Timeslot Single timeslot on a E1 digital interfacethat is, a 64-kbps,
synchronous, full-duplex data channel, typically used for a
single voice connection.
Time Synchronization Also called the moment synchronization, time
synchronization means that the synchronization of the
absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the
signals keeps consistent with the UTC time.
TMN The entity which provides the means used to transport and
process information related to management functions for the
telecommunications network.
ToS Type of service. A field in an IP packet (IP datagram) that is
used for quality of service (QoS). The ToS field is eight bits,
broken into five subfields.
TPS Tributary Protection Switch. Tributary protection switching,
a function provided by the equipment, is intended to protect
N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary
processing board.
Trail A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring
signal from the input of the trail source to the output of the
trail sink, and monitoring the integrality of the transferred
signal.
Trail management
function
A network level management functions of the NMS.
Through trail management, you can configure end-to-end
services, view graphic interface and visual routes of a trail,
query detailed information of a trail, filter, search and locate
a trail quickly, manage and maintain trails in a centralized
manner, manage alarms and performance data by trail, and
print a trail report.
Transceiver An electronic device which has both transmit and receive
capabilities.
Transparent transmission A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not
processed in the content but encapsulated in the format for
the processing of the next phase.
Tray A discal component in the cabinet, which is used to place the
chassis or other equipment.
System

12-35

Tributary loopback A fault location method. A fault can be located for each
service path by performing loopback on each path of the
tributary board. There are three types of loopback modes:
Non-loopback, Outloop and Inloop.
Tributary unit An information structure which provides adaptation between
the lower order path layer and the higher order path layer. It
consists of an information payload (the lower order VC) and
a TU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame
start relative to the higher order VC frame start.
TUG A unit group that contains one or more Tributary Units,
occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VC-n
payload. TUGs are defined in such a way that mixed
capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units
can be constructed to increase flexibility of the transport
network.
TUG-3 Tributary unit group. One or more Tributary Units,
occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VC-n
payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are
defined in such a way that mixed capacity payloads made up
of different size Tributary Units can be constructed to
increase flexibility of the transport network. A TUG-2
consists of a homogeneous assembly of identical TU-1s or a
TU-2. A TUG-3 consists of a homogeneous assembly of
TUG-2s or a TU-3.

U
U2000 To be oriented to the future network trend, the iManager
U2000 that is the unifed network management system
(NMS) combines all-IP and FMC, and manages carrier
equipment and access equipment in a centralized manner.
U2000 LCT Local maintenance terminal of the U2000, the simplified
version of the U2000. It is the NE-level management system
of the transport network, and can implement comprehensive
management of multi-service transport network.
UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter. This is used
for serial communications. The UART translates between
serial and parallel signals, and provides data sent to or from
the computer.
UNI UNI is the abbreviation for User Network Interface. It
identifies the interface between the user and the ATM
network node.
UPC/NPC User Parameter Control/Network Parameters Control. A set
of actions taken by the ATM NE to monitor and control
service. Their main purpose is to detect violations of
negotiated service parameters and to take appropriate action.
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

Upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an
NE to the NMS. The configuration data then covers the
configuration data stored at the NMS side.
Upper threshold The critical value that can induce unexpected events if
exceeded.
Upward cabling Cables or fibers connect the rack with other equipment from
the top of the cabinet.
User The user of the NMS client, and the user and password
define the corresponding authority of operation and
management of the NMS.

V
VC Virtual container.
VCC Virtual Channel Connection. That is a VC connection
between two nodes.
VCI Virtual Channel Identifier. That is the identifier of VC.
Virtual concatenation
(VC)
Virtual concatenation refers to a scheme in which VC-12,
VC-3 or VC-4 distributed in different STM-N services are
concatenated (by using the same route or different routes)
into a VC-4-xv for transmission.
VLAN Virtual local area network. A subset of the active topology of
a Bridged Local Area Network. Associated with each VLAN
is a VLAN Identifier (VID).
VPI The VPI, shorted for Virtual Path Identifier, occupies 12 bits
in the NNI cell, and 8 bits in the UNI cell.
VPN Virtual Private Network. Enables IP service to be transmitted
securely over a public TCP/IP network by encrypting all the
services from one network to another.

W
WAN A wide area network. It uses a communication circuit to
connect medium nodes.
Wander The long-term variations of the significant instants of a
digital signal from their ideal position in time (where
long-term implies that these variations are of frequency less
than 10Hz).
Washer A washer which is used to level the cabinet.
Wavelength protection
group
The wavelength protection group is important to describe the
wavelength protection structure. Its function is similar to that
of the protection subnetwork in the SDH NE. The
wavelength path protection can only work with the correct
configuration of the wavelength protection group.
System

12-37

WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing. WDM technology
utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low
attenuation of single mode optical fibre, uses multiple
wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to
transmit simultaneously in a single fibre.
Winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
WTR Wait to Restore. This command is issued when working
channels meet the restoral threshold after an SD or SF
condition. It is used to maintain the state during the WTR
period unless it is pre-empted by a higher priority bridge
request.
WTR time A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault
recovered - trail/connection can be used again to transport
the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic
signal from.

12.13 Acronyms and Abbreviations
A
ABR Available Bit Rate
AC Alternating Current
ADM Add/drop Multiplexer
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
APID Access Point Identifier
APS Automatic Protection Switching
APSC Automatic Protection Switching Control
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control
AU Adaptation Unit
AUG Administrative Unit Group

B
BA Booster Amplifier
BBE Background Block Error
BER Bit Error Rate
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

BDI Backward Defect Indicator
BGND Backhaul Ground
BIP Bit-Interleaved Parity
BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply
BMC Best Master Clock
BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit
BPS Board Protection Switching
BSC Base Station Controller
BSS Base Station Subsystem
BWS Backbone WDM System

C
CAR Committed Access Rate
CAS Channel Associated Signaling
CBPDU Configuration BPDU
CBR Constant Bit Rate
CBS Committed Burst Size
CC Connectivity Check
CCDP Co-Channel Dual Polarization
CCM Continuity Check Message
CDR Clock and Data Recovery
CDVT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
CFM Connectivity Fault Management
CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol
CIR Committed Information Rate
CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree
CLP Cell Loss Priority
CoS Class of Service
CPE Customer Premises Equipment
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CSF Client Signal Fail
CST Common Spanning Tree
System

12-39

CTS Cordless Telephony System
C-VLAN Customer VLAN

D
DC Direct Current
DCC Data Communication Channel
DCD Data Carrier Detect
DCE Data Circuit-terminal Equipment
DCN Data Communication Network
DDF Digital Distribution Frame
DDN Digital Data Network
DiffServ Differentiated Service
DLAG Distributed Link Aggregation Group
DNI Dual Node Interconnection
DQDB Distributed Queue Dual Bus
DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point
DSL Digital Subscriber Line
DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
DSR Data Set Ready
DTE Data Terminal Equipments
DTR Data Terminal Ready
DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcast- Asynchronous
Serial Interface
DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

E
ECC Embedded Control Channel
EFM Ethernet in the First Mile
EMS Element Management System
EoS Ethernet Over SDH
EPL Ethernet Private Line
EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

ESCON Enterprise Systems Connection
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ES-IS End System-Intermedia System
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards
Institute
EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line
EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private LAN
E-AGGR Ethernet-Aggregation
E-Line Ethernet Line
E-LAN Ethernet LAN

F
FC Fiber Channel
FCS Frame Check Sequence
FD Frequency Diversity
FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interface
FDI Forward Defect Indicator
FE Fast Ethernet
FEC Forwarding Equivalence Class
FEC Forward Error Correction
FICON Fiber Connection
FIFO First In First Out
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
FS Forced Switching
FTP File Transfer Protocol

G
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFC Generic Flow Control
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
GND Ground
GPS Global Positioning System
GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
System

12-41

GTS Generic Traffic Shaping
GUI Graphic User Interface

H
HDLC High level Data Link Control
HEC Header Error Control
HP Higher Order Path
HPA Higher Order Path Adaptation
HPOH Higher Order Path Overhead
HPT Higher Order Path Termination
HSB Hot Standby
HSM Hitless Switch Mode

I
IC Integrated Circuit
ICP IMA Control Protocol
ID Identity
IDU Indoor Unit
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IF Intermediate Frequency
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol
IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM
IP Internet Protocol
IPA Intelligent Power Adjusting
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
ISO International Standard Organization
ISP Internet Service Provider
IST Internal Spanning Tree
IS-IS Intermedia System-Intermedia System
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union -
Telecommunication Standardization Sector

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

L
LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG Link Aggregation Group
LAN Local Area Network
LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH
LB Loopback
LBM Loopback Message
LBR Loopback Return
LC Lucent Connector
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LLC Logical Link Control
LOC Loss of Continuity
LOF Loss of frame
LOM Loss Of Multiframe
LOS Loss Of Signal
LP Lower Order Path
LPA Linear Power Amplifier
LPT Link State Pass Through
LSP Label Switched Path
LSR Label Switching Router
LT Link Trace
LTM Link Trace Message

M
MA Maintenance Association
MAC Medium Access Control
MADM Multiple Add/drop Multiplexer
MAN Metropolitan Area Network
MBS Max Burst Size
MCF Message Communication Function
MCR Minimum Cell Rate
System

12-43

MD Maintenance Domain
MEP Maintenance End Point
MIB Management Information Base
MIP Maintenance Intermediate Point
MODEM MOdulator-DEModulator
MP Maintenance Point
MPID Maintenance Point Identification
MPLS Multi-Protocol Label Switch
MS Multiplex Section
MSA Multiplex Section Adaptation
MSOH Multiplex Section Overhead
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MST Multiplex Section Termination
MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance
MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MSTP Multiservice Transport Platform
MTIE Maximum Time Interval Error
MTU Maximum Transmission Unit

N
NE Network Element
NLP Normal Link Pulse
NM Network Manager
NMS Network Management System
NNI Network Node Interface
NPC Network Parameter Control
nrt-VBR non-real time Variable Bit Rate
NRZ Non Return to Zero code
NSAP Network Service Access Point
NTP Network Time Protocol

O
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

OAM Operations, Administration and
Maintenance
OAMPDU OAM Protocol Data Unit
OCS Optical Core Switching
ODF Optical Distribution Frame
ODU Outdoor Unit
OFS Out-of-frame Second
OHA Overhead Access Function
OLT Optical Line Terminal
ONU Optical Network Unit
OOF Out of Frame
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSN Optical Switch Node
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
OTDR Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer

P
PA Power Amplifier
PBS Peak Burst Size
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PCR Peak Cell Rate
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PE Provider Edge
PGND Protection Ground
PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense
Mode
PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse
Mode
PIR Peak Information Rate
POH Path Overhead
POS Packet Over SDH
PLL Phase-Locked Loop
System

12-45

PPI PDH Physical Interface
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PPS Port Protection Switching
PRBS Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence
PRC Primary Reference Clock
PS Packet Switched
PSD Power Spectral Density
PTI Payload Type Indicator
PTP Precision Time Protocol
PW Pseudo Wire
PVC Permanent Virtual Connection

Q
QinQ 802.1Q in 802.1Q
QoS Quality of Service

R
RDI Remote Defect Indication
RF Radio Frequency
RFA Request For Announcement
RFI Request for Information
RMON Remote Network Monitoring
RNC Radio Network Controller
RP Rendezvous Point
RPR Resilient Packet Ring
RSL Received Signal Level
RSOH Regenerator Section Overhead
RST Regenerator Section Termination
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RTN Radio Transmission Node
rt-VBR real time Variable Bit Rate
RX Receiver/Reception

System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

S
SAN Storage Area Network
SC Square Connector
SCB System Control Board
SCC System Control & Communication Unit
SCR Sustained Cell Rate
SD Signal Degrade
SD Space Diversity
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDP Serious Disturbance Period
SEC SDH Equipment Clock
SES Severely Errored Second
SETS Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
SF Signal Fail
SFP Small Form-Factor Pluggable
SHDSL Single Pair High-bit-rate Digital Subscriber
Line
SLM Single Longitudinal Mode
SNC SubNetwork Connection
SNCMP Subnetwork Connection Multiple Protection
SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection
SNCTP Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR Signal-to-Noise Ratio
SOH Section Overhead
SPI SDH Physical Interface
SSM Synchronization Status Marker
SSMB Synchronization Status Message Byte
SSU Synchronization Supply Unit
STM-1 SDH Transport Module -1
SSU Synchronization Supply Unit
System

12-47

STG Synchronous Timing Generator
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
SVC Switching Virtual Connection
S-VID Service VLAN ID
S-VLAN Service VLAN

T
TCN BPDU Topology Change Notification BPDU
TCI Tag Control Information
TCM Tandem Connection Monitor
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
TM Terminal Multiplexer
TMN Telecommunications Management Network
ToS Type of Service
TPID TAG Protocol ID
TPS Tributary Protection Switch
TSD Trail Signal Degrade
TTL Time To Live
TU Tributary Unit
TUG Tributary Unit Group

U
UART Universal Asynchronous
Receiver/Transmitter
UAS Unavailable Second
UBR Unspecified Bit Rate
UNI User Network Interface
UPC Usage Parameter Control
UPI User Payload Identifier
UPM Uninterruptible Power Module
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
System
Product Description

Issue 01 (2010-01-15)

UTC Universal Time Coordinated

V
VB Virtual Bridge
VBR Variable Bit Rate
VC Virtual Connection
VCG Virtual Concatenation Group
VCI Virtual Channel Identifier
VLAN Virtual LAN
VP Virtual Path
VPI Virtual Path Identifier
VPN Virtual Private Network

W
WAN Wide Area Network
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing
WRED Weighted Random Early Detection
WTR Wait-to-Restore

OptiX OSN 3500 V200R011 Product Description V1.0 (20100129)

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

OptiX OSN 3500 V200R011 Product Description V1.0 (20100129)

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen